You are on page 1of 441

HUAWEI UMG8900 V100R007

Installation Guide

Issue Date Part Number

02 2009-01-09 000392311

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For any assistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com

Website: Email:

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2009. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions


and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Contents

Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................1 1 Installation Procedure...............................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Hardware Installation Procedure.....................................................................................................................1-2 1.2 Hardware Installation Steps............................................................................................................................1-3 1.3 Precautions......................................................................................................................................................1-3

2 Installation Preparations...........................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Preparing Documents......................................................................................................................................2-2 2.2 Requirements for Construction Engineers......................................................................................................2-2 2.3 Preparing Installation Tools............................................................................................................................2-2 2.4 Checking Environment....................................................................................................................................2-7 2.4.1 Checking Building Conditions of Equipment Rooms............................................................................2-8 2.4.2 Checking Environment Conditions........................................................................................................2-8 2.4.3 Checking Power Supply Conditions......................................................................................................2-8 2.4.4 Checking Grounding Conditions............................................................................................................2-8 2.4.5 Checking the Lightning Protection System............................................................................................2-9 2.4.6 Requirements for DDFs/ODFs...............................................................................................................2-9 2.4.7 Optical Transmission Devices................................................................................................................2-9 2.4.8 Distribution Requirements for Terminals and Alarm Boxes.................................................................2-9

3 Unpacking and Inspection.......................................................................................................3-1


3.1 Inspecting Packages........................................................................................................................................3-2 3.2 Unpacking.......................................................................................................................................................3-2 3.2.1 Unpacking Wooden Crates.....................................................................................................................3-2 3.2.2 Unpacking Cartons.................................................................................................................................3-6 3.2.3 Unpacking Boards..................................................................................................................................3-7 3.3 Inspection........................................................................................................................................................3-8

4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESD-Preventive Floor................................4-1


4.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions.....................................................................................................4-5 4.2 Removing Package Accessories......................................................................................................................4-5 4.3 Positioning Supports.......................................................................................................................................4-5 4.4 Installing Expansion Bolts............................................................................................................................4-11 4.5 Installing Supports.........................................................................................................................................4-15 4.6 Installing Cabinets on the ESD-Preventive Floor.........................................................................................4-20 Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i

Contents

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

4.7 Attaching the Cabinets..................................................................................................................................4-27

5 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESD-Preventive Floor...........................5-1


5.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions.....................................................................................................5-5 5.2 Removing Package Accessories......................................................................................................................5-5 5.3 Positioning Supports.......................................................................................................................................5-8 5.4 Installing Expansion Bolts............................................................................................................................5-11 5.5 Installing Supports.........................................................................................................................................5-15 5.6 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESD-Preventive Floor........................................................5-19 5.7 Attaching the Cabinets..................................................................................................................................5-24

6 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor.............................................. 6-1


6.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions.....................................................................................................6-5 6.2 Removing Package Accessories......................................................................................................................6-5 6.3 Positioning Cabinets........................................................................................................................................6-5 6.4 Installing Expansion Bolts............................................................................................................................6-11 6.5 Fixing Cabinets on the Cement Floor...........................................................................................................6-15 6.6 Attaching the Cabinets..................................................................................................................................6-21

7 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor..........................................7-1


7.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions.....................................................................................................7-6 7.2 Removing the Grounding Cables and Cabinet Doors.....................................................................................7-6 7.3 Installing Expansion Bolts..............................................................................................................................7-9 7.4 Attaching the Cabinets..................................................................................................................................7-13

8 Connecting PGND cables and power cables for cabinets..................................................8-1


8.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions.....................................................................................................8-3 8.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables...........................................................................................8-3 8.3 Cabling Mode of Power Cables......................................................................................................................8-4 8.4 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables Between Cabinets and DC Power Distribution Cabinets.......8-7 8.5 Connecting Interconnected PGND Cables Between Cabinets......................................................................8-14

9 Installing Internal Components..............................................................................................9-1


9.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions.....................................................................................................9-2 9.2 Installing SSM Frames....................................................................................................................................9-3 9.3 Installing Boards in SSM Frames....................................................................................................................9-4 9.4 Installing Boards in the UA Frames................................................................................................................9-6

10 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for Internal Components....................10-1


10.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions.................................................................................................10-3 10.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables of Internal Components in Front-Access Cabinets.......10-3 10.3 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables of Internal Components in Rear-Access Cabinets........10-8 10.4 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for the SSM Frames.........................................................10-12 10.5 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for the UA Frames............................................................10-13 10.6 Connecting the PGND Cables and Power Cables of Low-Density UA Fan Frame..................................10-16 10.7 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for Monitoring Boxes.......................................................10-16 ii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Contents

10.8 Connecting AC Power Cables...................................................................................................................10-18

11 Connecting Signal Cables....................................................................................................11-1


11.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions.................................................................................................11-4 11.2 Connecting Signal Cables.........................................................................................................................11-12 11.2.1 Connections of Monitoring Cables..................................................................................................11-13 11.2.2 Connections of UAM Cables...........................................................................................................11-16 11.2.3 Connections of Internal Cables in UA Frames.................................................................................11-33 11.3 Connecting Monitoring Cables.................................................................................................................11-38 11.4 Connecting Trunk Cables..........................................................................................................................11-38 11.4.1 Connecting E1/T1 Cables in the SSM Frame..................................................................................11-39 11.4.2 Connecting E1/T1 Cables in the UA Frame.....................................................................................11-40 11.4.3 Connecting Tailor-Made Internal Trunk Cables Between the SSM-4 Frame and the UA Frame...11-41 11.4.4 Connecting Internal HW Trunk Cables in the UA Frame................................................................11-42 11.4.5 Connecting E3/T3 Trunk Cables......................................................................................................11-42 11.5 Connecting Signal Cables of Access Service in the UA Frame................................................................11-43 11.5.1 Connecting POTS Subscriber Cables...............................................................................................11-43 11.5.2 Connecting ATI Subscriber Cables..................................................................................................11-43 11.5.3 Connecting SDL Subscriber Cables and Trunk Cables...................................................................11-44 11.5.4 Connecting HSL Subscriber Cables.................................................................................................11-44 11.6 Connecting BITS Clock Cables................................................................................................................11-44 11.7 Connecting Service Bearer Network Cables.............................................................................................11-45 11.8 Connecting Service Bearer Optical Fibers................................................................................................11-47

12 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinet Fittings...................................................................12-1


12.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions.................................................................................................12-2 12.2 Introduction to Fittings of Cabinet Doors...................................................................................................12-2 12.3 Installing Door Lintels................................................................................................................................12-3 12.4 Installing Cabinet Side Panels.....................................................................................................................12-4 12.5 Installing Front and Back Doors.................................................................................................................12-4 12.6 Connecting PGND Cables for Cabinet Doors.............................................................................................12-7 12.7 Recovering the ESD-Preventive Floor......................................................................................................12-11

13 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinet Fittings...............................................................13-1


13.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions.................................................................................................13-2 13.2 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinet Side Panels....................................................................................13-2 13.3 Installing Front and Rear Doors of Normalized N66-22 Cabinets..............................................................13-3 13.4 Connecting PGND Cables for Normalized N66-22 Cabinet Doors............................................................13-5 13.5 Recovering the ESD-Preventive Floor........................................................................................................13-8

14 Installing Peripherals............................................................................................................14-1
14.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions.................................................................................................14-2 14.2 Installing Terminals.....................................................................................................................................14-2 14.3 Installing Alarm Boxes................................................................................................................................14-3

15 Checking Installation............................................................................................................15-1
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

Contents

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

15.1 Checking Specifications and Precautions...................................................................................................15-3 15.2 Checking Cabinet Installation.....................................................................................................................15-3 15.3 Checking Connections of PGND Cables and Power Cables.......................................................................15-3 15.4 Checking Connection of Signal Cables.......................................................................................................15-4 15.5 Checking Installation of Connectors and Sockets.......................................................................................15-4 15.6 Checking Installation of Peripherals...........................................................................................................15-4 15.7 Checking Installation of Other Components...............................................................................................15-5 15.8 Checking the Power Supply........................................................................................................................15-5 15.8.1 Checking the Power Supply to Cabinets............................................................................................15-6 15.8.2 Checking the Power Supply to Frames..............................................................................................15-7 15.8.3 Checking the Power Supply to Boards and Running State................................................................15-7

16 Installing LMT Software......................................................................................................16-1


16.1 Installation Procedure..................................................................................................................................16-3 16.2 Preparation for LMT Software Installation.................................................................................................16-3 16.3 Installing LMT Software.............................................................................................................................16-5 16.4 Checking Installation.................................................................................................................................16-10 16.4.1 Checking System Components.........................................................................................................16-10 16.4.2 Checking Software Versions............................................................................................................16-11 16.4.3 Checking Running Status of LMT Service Manager.......................................................................16-12 16.5 Uninstalling LMT Software......................................................................................................................16-13

17 Loading Host Software..........................................................................................................17-1


17.1 Loading Procedure......................................................................................................................................17-2 17.2 Software Loading Preparation.....................................................................................................................17-2 17.2.1 System Hardware Preparation............................................................................................................17-3 17.2.2 System Software Preparation.............................................................................................................17-4 17.2.3 Configuring MML Batch Files...........................................................................................................17-4 17.2.4 Setting FTP Server.............................................................................................................................17-5 17.2.5 Setting the HyperTerminal...............................................................................................................17-11 17.2.6 Configuring IP address on OMC Interface......................................................................................17-15 17.2.7 Configuring LMT Office Direction..................................................................................................17-16 17.2.8 Modifying MML Timeout Settings..................................................................................................17-17 17.3 Loading Host Software..............................................................................................................................17-18 17.4 Loading the License File...........................................................................................................................17-18 17.5 Loading Tone Files Dynamically..............................................................................................................17-19 17.6 Loading PV8 Software..............................................................................................................................17-21 17.7 Loading RSP Software..............................................................................................................................17-25 17.8 Checking Loading Result..........................................................................................................................17-26 17.9 Problems Handling....................................................................................................................................17-28 17.9.1 No Display on Serial Port Console After System Starts up.............................................................17-28 17.9.2 Illegible Characters Displayed on Serial Port Console After System Starts up...............................17-29 17.9.3 Normal Display After System Starts up but Command Input Failure.............................................17-29 17.9.4 Communication Failure Between the UMG8900 and the FTP Serve on LMT...............................17-29 iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Contents

17.9.5 OMU Board Startup Failure.............................................................................................................17-31 17.9.6 Loading Failure of Other Boards.....................................................................................................17-31 17.9.7 UMG8900 Host Software Incorrectly Uploaded to the OMU Hard Disk........................................17-32 17.9.8 Using File Uploading Command of Loading Management Wrongly..............................................17-32 17.9.9 Using Unmatched Version...............................................................................................................17-32 17.9.10 Failing to Recover Configuration Data After System Restarts up.................................................17-33

18 Configuring Remote Maintenance System.......................................................................18-1


18.1 Installation Procedure..................................................................................................................................18-3 18.2 Installing the Modem..................................................................................................................................18-3 18.3 Installing the Remote Access Server...........................................................................................................18-6 18.4 Adding Dial-up Users................................................................................................................................18-17 18.5 Checking the Remote Maintenance System..............................................................................................18-20 18.5.1 Checking Modem.............................................................................................................................18-20 18.5.2 Checking Remote Access Server.....................................................................................................18-21

19 Loading OMU Software Manually.....................................................................................19-1


19.1 Loading Procedure......................................................................................................................................19-2 19.2 Software Loading Preparation.....................................................................................................................19-3 19.2.1 System Hardware Preparation............................................................................................................19-3 19.2.2 System Software Preparation.............................................................................................................19-3 19.3 Software Loading Procedure.......................................................................................................................19-4

A Mounting Cabling Racks........................................................................................................A-1


A.1 Introduction to Cabling Racks.......................................................................................................................A-3 A.2 Mounting Indoor Cabling Racks...................................................................................................................A-4 A.3 Mounting Outdoor Cabling Racks.................................................................................................................A-9 A.4 Mounting Cabling Ladders..........................................................................................................................A-12 A.5 Mounting Cabling Troughs.........................................................................................................................A-17 A.6 Mounting Accessories.................................................................................................................................A-21

B Assembling Cable Connectors...............................................................................................B-1


B.1 Assembling Power Cable Connectors............................................................................................................B-2 B.1.1 Cutting Power Cables...........................................................................................................................B-2 B.1.2 Mounting Heat-Shrinkable Tubes.........................................................................................................B-3 B.1.3 Stripping Power Cables.........................................................................................................................B-3 B.1.4 Crimping Power Cable Connectors......................................................................................................B-5 B.1.5 Shrinking Heat-Shrinkable Tubes of Power Cable Connectors............................................................B-7 B.1.6 Checking Power Cable Connectors......................................................................................................B-8 B.2 Assembling RJ45 Connectors........................................................................................................................B-9 B.2.1 Stripping Network Cables...................................................................................................................B-10 B.2.2 Inserting Network Cables...................................................................................................................B-12 B.2.3 Crimping RJ45 Connectors.................................................................................................................B-16 B.2.4 Inspecting RJ45 Connectors...............................................................................................................B-17 B.3 Assembling RJ48 Connectors of Twisted Pair Trunk Cables......................................................................B-17 Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

Contents

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide B.3.1 Stripping Twisted Pair Trunk Cables..................................................................................................B-18 B.3.2 Inserting Twisted Pair Trunk Cables..................................................................................................B-20 B.3.3 Crimping RJ48 Connectors.................................................................................................................B-21 B.3.4 Inspecting RJ48 Connectors...............................................................................................................B-22

B.4 Assembling SMB Connectors......................................................................................................................B-22 B.4.1 Mounting Heat-Shrinkable Tubes and Crimping Sleeves..................................................................B-23 B.4.2 Stripping Trunk Signal Cables............................................................................................................B-24 B.4.3 Welding Pins of SMB Connectors......................................................................................................B-25 B.4.4 Crimping SMB Connectors.................................................................................................................B-25 B.4.5 Shrinking Heat-Shrinkable Tubes of SMB Connectors......................................................................B-26 B.4.6 Inspecting SMB Connectors...............................................................................................................B-27

C Introduction to Engineering Labels......................................................................................C-1


C.1 Description of Labels.....................................................................................................................................C-2 C.2 Engineering Labels for External Cables of Alarm Boxes..............................................................................C-9 C.3 Engineering Labels for Network Cables......................................................................................................C-10 C.4 Engineering Labels for Optical Fibers.........................................................................................................C-11 C.5 Engineering Labels for Trunk Cables..........................................................................................................C-13 C.6 Engineering Labels for Power Cables..........................................................................................................C-16

D Introduction to File System Directory................................................................................. D-1


D.1 Introduction to the LMT File Directory........................................................................................................D-2 D.2 Introduction to BAM File Directory..............................................................................................................D-2 D.3 Introduction to Configuration Files...............................................................................................................D-4 D.3.1 Description of Main Version................................................................................................................D-4 D.3.2 Description of Board Software.............................................................................................................D-5 D.4 Introduction to Higher Layer Software of Boards.........................................................................................D-7

E Requirements for Device Running Environment...............................................................E-1


E.1 Requirements for Equipment Room Location................................................................................................E-2 E.2 Requirements for Equipment Room Construction.........................................................................................E-2 E.3 Requirements for Temperature and Humidity................................................................................................E-4 E.4 Requirements for Indoor Sanitation...............................................................................................................E-5 E.5 Requirements for Erosive Gas Condition.......................................................................................................E-5 E.6 Requirements for Electromagnetic Environment...........................................................................................E-6 E.7 Requirements for ESD Prevention.................................................................................................................E-6 E.8 Requirements for Lightning Protection Grounding........................................................................................E-7 E.9 Requirements for Power Supply.....................................................................................................................E-9

vi

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figures

Figures
Figure 1-1 Hardware installation procedure.........................................................................................................1-2 Figure 3-1 Moving the wooden crate with a fork truck........................................................................................3-3 Figure 3-2 Straightening tongues (1)....................................................................................................................3-4 Figure 3-3 Straightening tongues (2)....................................................................................................................3-4 Figure 3-4 Straightening tongues (3)....................................................................................................................3-4 Figure 3-5 Lifting and removing covers...............................................................................................................3-5 Figure 3-6 Removing surrounded wooden boards...............................................................................................3-6 Figure 3-7 Unpacking cartons..............................................................................................................................3-7 Figure 4-1 Installation procedure.........................................................................................................................4-2 Figure 4-2 Cabinet after installation.....................................................................................................................4-3 Figure 4-3 Line drawing template (for installation on the ESD-preventive floor-unit: mm)...............................4-7 Figure 4-4 Mounting holes of the supports for a single cabinet (unit: mm).........................................................4-8 Figure 4-5 Mounting holes of supports for multiple cabinets in a row (unit: mm)..............................................4-9 Figure 4-6 Mounting holes of the supports for a single cabinet (unit: mm).........................................................4-9 Figure 4-7 Mounting holes of supports for multiple cabinets in a row (unit: mm)............................................4-10 Figure 4-8 Mounting holes of supports for back-to-back cabinets in two rows (unit: mm)..............................4-10 Figure 4-9 Method for drilling a hole.................................................................................................................4-12 Figure 4-10 Drilling a hole.................................................................................................................................4-12 Figure 4-11 Components of the expansion bolts................................................................................................4-13 Figure 4-12 Installation of the expansion tube and the expansion nut (1).........................................................4-14 Figure 4-13 Installation of the expansion tube and the expansion nut (2).........................................................4-14 Figure 4-14 Installed expansion bolts................................................................................................................4-15 Figure 4-15 Adjusting the support......................................................................................................................4-16 Figure 4-16 Assembling supports and guide rails..............................................................................................4-17 Figure 4-17 Positions of supports.......................................................................................................................4-18 Figure 4-18 Fixing supports...............................................................................................................................4-18 Figure 4-19 Installing the holder fixing components.........................................................................................4-20 Figure 4-20 Disassembling plastic coverings.....................................................................................................4-22 Figure 4-21 Fixing cabinets................................................................................................................................4-23 Figure 4-22 Leveling cabinets (1)......................................................................................................................4-24 Figure 4-23 Leveling cabinets (2)......................................................................................................................4-25 Figure 4-24 Testing the insulation......................................................................................................................4-26 Figure 4-25 Installing plastic coverings.............................................................................................................4-27 Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

Figures

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide Figure 4-26 Connecting plates between cabinets...............................................................................................4-28 Figure 4-27 Installing connecting plates for combined cabinets........................................................................4-28 Figure 4-28 Installing connecting plates for multiple H66-22 cabinets in back-to-back way...........................4-29 Figure 5-1 Installation procedure.........................................................................................................................5-2

Figure 5-2 A single cabinet installed on an ESD-Preventive floor......................................................................5-3 Figure 5-3 Several cabinets installed on an ESD-Preventive floor......................................................................5-3 Figure 5-4 Removing the packing accessories.....................................................................................................5-6 Figure 5-5 Removing the cabinet doors...............................................................................................................5-6 Figure 5-6 Placing the cabinet doors....................................................................................................................5-7 Figure 5-7 Line drawing template for installation on the ESD-preventive floor (unit: mm)...............................5-9 Figure 5-8 Installing the side-by-side line drawing template for installation on the ESD-preventive floor (unit: mm).......................................................................................................................................................................5-9 Figure 5-9 Mounting holes of supports for a single cabinet (unit: mm)............................................................5-10 Figure 5-10 Mounting holes of supports for multiple cabinets in a row (unit: mm)..........................................5-10 Figure 5-11 Mounting holes of supports for back-to-back cabinets in two rows (unit: mm)............................5-11 Figure 5-12 Settling the drill bit.........................................................................................................................5-12 Figure 5-13 Drilling holes..................................................................................................................................5-13 Figure 5-14 Components of the expansion bolts................................................................................................5-14 Figure 5-15 Installing the expansion tube..........................................................................................................5-14 Figure 5-16 Unscrewing the bolt and accessories..............................................................................................5-15 Figure 5-17 Installed expansion bolts................................................................................................................5-15 Figure 5-18 Tightening the assembly screws.....................................................................................................5-16 Figure 5-19 Installing slide rails.........................................................................................................................5-17 Figure 5-20 Level and fix the supports of a single cabinet................................................................................5-18 Figure 5-21 Appearance of the insulation plate.................................................................................................5-19 Figure 5-22 Positions of supports.......................................................................................................................5-19 Figure 5-23 Removing the Air Filter..................................................................................................................5-20 Figure 5-24 Placing the cabinet..........................................................................................................................5-21 Figure 5-25 Leveling the cabinet........................................................................................................................5-22 Figure 5-26 Testing the insulation of the cabinet...............................................................................................5-23 Figure 5-27 Restoring the Air Filter...................................................................................................................5-24 Figure 5-28 Installing the connecting plates......................................................................................................5-25 Figure 5-29 Leveling the combined cabinets.....................................................................................................5-25 Figure 6-1 Installation procedure.........................................................................................................................6-2 Figure 6-2 Installed cabinets................................................................................................................................6-3 Figure 6-3 Line drawing template (unit: mm)......................................................................................................6-7 Figure 6-4 Picture of line drawing template.........................................................................................................6-8 Figure 6-5 Hole positions for installing a single cabinet (unit: mm)...................................................................6-8 Figure 6-6 Hole positions for installing cabinets in a row (unit: mm).................................................................6-9 Figure 6-7 Hole positions for installing a single cabinet (unit: mm)...................................................................6-9 Figure 6-8 Hole positions for installing cabinets in a row (unit: mm)...............................................................6-10 Figure 6-9 Hole positions for installing back-to-back cabinets in a row (unit: mm).........................................6-10 Figure 6-10 Method for drilling a hole...............................................................................................................6-12 viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figures

Figure 6-11 Drilling a hole.................................................................................................................................6-12 Figure 6-12 Components of the expansion bolts................................................................................................6-13 Figure 6-13 Installation of the expansion tube and the expansion nut (1).........................................................6-14 Figure 6-14 Installation of the expansion tube and the expansion nut (2).........................................................6-14 Figure 6-15 Installed expansion bolts................................................................................................................6-15 Figure 6-16 Disassembling plastic coverings.....................................................................................................6-16 Figure 6-17 Fixing cabinets on the cement floor...............................................................................................6-17 Figure 6-18 Leveling cabinets (1)......................................................................................................................6-18 Figure 6-19 Leveling cabinets (2)......................................................................................................................6-19 Figure 6-20 Testing the insulation......................................................................................................................6-20 Figure 6-21 Installing plastic coverings.............................................................................................................6-21 Figure 6-22 Connecting plates between cabinets...............................................................................................6-22 Figure 6-23 Installing connecting plates for combined cabinets........................................................................6-23 Figure 6-24 Installing connecting plates for multiple H66-22 cabinets in back-to-back way...........................6-24 Figure 7-1 Installation procedure.........................................................................................................................7-2 Figure 7-2 A single cabinet installed on a concrete floor.....................................................................................7-3 Figure 7-3 Several cabinets installed on a concrete floor.....................................................................................7-4 Figure 7-4 Removing the grounding cables.........................................................................................................7-7 Figure 7-5 Removing the doors of the rear access cabinet...................................................................................7-7 Figure 7-6 Removing the doors of the front access cabinet.................................................................................7-8 Figure 7-7 Removing the side panels...................................................................................................................7-9 Figure 7-8 Settling the drill bit...........................................................................................................................7-10 Figure 7-9 Drilling holes....................................................................................................................................7-11 Figure 7-10 Components of the expansion bolts................................................................................................7-12 Figure 7-11 Installing the expansion tube..........................................................................................................7-12 Figure 7-12 Unscrewing the bolt and accessories..............................................................................................7-13 Figure 7-13 Installed expansion bolts................................................................................................................7-13 Figure 7-14 Installing the connecting plates......................................................................................................7-14 Figure 7-15 Leveling the combined cabinets.....................................................................................................7-15 Figure 8-1 Connection procedure.........................................................................................................................8-1 Figure 8-2 Cable distribution in the DC power distribution cabinets and the cabinets of the UMG8900...........8-4 Figure 8-3 Overhead cabling mode on the power distribution cabinet side.........................................................8-5 Figure 8-4 Underfloor cabling mode on the power distribution cabinet side.......................................................8-6 Figure 8-5 Connections of the OT terminals........................................................................................................8-7 Figure 8-6 Wiring terminals in the power distribution cabinet............................................................................8-9 Figure 8-7 Overhead cabling of the DC power distribution cabinet (1).............................................................8-10 Figure 8-8 Overhead cabling of the DC power distribution cabinet (2).............................................................8-11 Figure 8-9 Terminal positions of the PGND cables...........................................................................................8-12 Figure 8-10 RTN connections (at the power distribution cabinet side).............................................................8-13 Figure 8-11 48 V terminals at the power distribution cabinet side..................................................................8-13 Figure 8-12 Cascading the equipotential grounding cables...............................................................................8-15 Figure 9-1 Wearing an ESD-preventive wrist strap correctly..............................................................................9-2 Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix

Figures

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide Figure 9-2 Installing SSM frames........................................................................................................................9-4

Figure 9-3 Installing boards.................................................................................................................................9-6 Figure 9-4 Panels..................................................................................................................................................9-7 Figure 10-1 Connections of power cables between components and front-access PDFs in TG-only application .............................................................................................................................................................................10-4 Figure 10-2 Connections of power cables between components and front-access PDFs in low-density AG application...........................................................................................................................................................10-5 Figure 10-3 Connections of power cables between components and front-access PDFs in high-density AG application...........................................................................................................................................................10-7 Figure 10-4 Connections of power cables between components and rear-access PDFs....................................10-9 Figure 10-5 Connections of power cables between components and rear-access PDFs in high-density application ...........................................................................................................................................................................10-11 Figure 10-6 Connections of the PGND cables in the SSM frames..................................................................10-13 Figure 10-7 Connections of the PGND cables of the UA frames in the rear-access cabinet...........................10-15 Figure 10-8 Connections of PGND cables of the environment monitoring box in the rear-access cabinet.....10-18 Figure 10-9 Position of the AC power supply module.....................................................................................10-19 Figure 10-10 Appearance of the AC power supply module.............................................................................10-19 Figure 11-1 Connection Procedure.....................................................................................................................11-2 Figure 11-2 Cabling holes at the top and bottom of the N68-22 cabinet...........................................................11-4 Figure 11-3 Cabling holes at the top and bottom of the N68E-22 cabinet.........................................................11-5 Figure 11-4 Overhead cabling mode..................................................................................................................11-6 Figure 11-5 Downward cable ladder..................................................................................................................11-6 Figure 11-6 Layout of cables on the cabling rack..............................................................................................11-7 Figure 11-7 Underfloor cabling mode................................................................................................................11-8 Figure 11-8 Cabling along the lower enclosure frame.......................................................................................11-9 Figure 11-9 Cable ties inside the wire bushing................................................................................................11-10 Figure 11-10 Method for trimming the cable tie..............................................................................................11-11 Figure 11-11 Trimmed cable tie.......................................................................................................................11-11 Figure 11-12 Fixing the cable tie on the signal cable.......................................................................................11-12 Figure 11-13 Connections of monitoring cables for environment monitoring boxes in front-access cabinets in TGonly application.................................................................................................................................................11-13 Figure 11-14 Connections of monitoring cables for environment monitoring boxes in front-access cabinets in lowdensity AG application......................................................................................................................................11-14 Figure 11-15 Connections of monitoring cables for environment monitoring boxes in front-access cabinets in highdensity AG application......................................................................................................................................11-14 Figure 11-16 Connections of monitoring cables for environment monitoring boxes in rear-access cabinets in lowdensity AG application......................................................................................................................................11-15 Figure 11-17 Connections of monitoring cables for environment monitoring boxes in rear-access cabinets in highdensity AG application......................................................................................................................................11-16 Figure 11-18 UMG8900 structure....................................................................................................................11-17 Figure 11-19 E1 interfaces on the MOMD......................................................................................................11-18 Figure 11-20 E1 interfaces of the UAFM frame..............................................................................................11-19 Figure 11-21 E1 interfaces of the RSP10 frame...............................................................................................11-20 Figure 11-22 8 E1 Cables of Low-Density Frames in Front-Access Cabinets................................................11-21 Figure 11-23 16 E1 Cables of Low-Density Frames in Front-Access Cabinets..............................................11-22 x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figures

Figure 11-24 8 E1 cables of low-density frames in rear-access cabinets.........................................................11-23 Figure 11-25 16 E1 cables of low-density frames in rear-access cabinets.......................................................11-24 Figure 11-26 Connecting trunk cables between the SSM-4 frame and HABD frame.....................................11-27 Figure 11-27 Connecting trunk cables between the SSM-4 frame and HABA frame.....................................11-28 Figure 11-28 Cascading between the UAFM main frame and UAFS subframe..............................................11-29 Figure 11-29 Cascading between the RSP10 main frame and RSP14 subframe.............................................11-30 Figure 11-30 HW cable with two connectors...................................................................................................11-31 Figure 11-31 Connections of the HW cables between high-density UA frames in the front-access cabinet...11-32 Figure 11-32 Connections of the HW cables between high-density UA frames in the rear-access cabinet....11-33 Figure 11-33 Connections of test and alarm cables between three front-access UA frames...........................11-34 Figure 11-34 Connections of test and alarm cables between two front-access UA frames.............................11-35 Figure 11-35 Connections of test and alarm cables between high-density and front-access cabinets.............11-36 Figure 11-36 Connections of test and alarm cables for rear-access UA cabinets............................................11-37 Figure 11-37 Connections of LVDS cables.....................................................................................................11-38 Figure 11-38 Connections of E1/T1 trunk cables............................................................................................11-39 Figure 11-39 Connections of E1/T1 cables in the UAFM frame.....................................................................11-40 Figure 11-40 Connections of E3/T3 trunk cables............................................................................................11-42 Figure 11-41 Connections of BITS clock cables..............................................................................................11-45 Figure 12-1 Fittings of cabinet door...................................................................................................................12-2 Figure 12-2 Installing door lintels......................................................................................................................12-3 Figure 12-3 Cabinets with top covers.................................................................................................................12-4 Figure 12-4 Installing the front and back doors.................................................................................................12-5 Figure 12-5 Installing the bottom of front and back doors.................................................................................12-6 Figure 12-6 Shuffle pins.....................................................................................................................................12-6 Figure 12-7 Opening the lock.............................................................................................................................12-7 Figure 12-8 Closing the lock..............................................................................................................................12-7 Figure 12-9 Cabinet door before the PGND cable is connected........................................................................12-8 Figure 12-10 Loosening the PGND bolt of the door..........................................................................................12-8 Figure 12-11 Connecting the PGND cable of the door......................................................................................12-9 Figure 12-12 Installing the washer.....................................................................................................................12-9 Figure 12-13 Fastening the bolt........................................................................................................................12-10 Figure 12-14 Cabinet door with the PGND cable connected...........................................................................12-10 Figure 12-15 Testing the Insulation.................................................................................................................12-11 Figure 12-16 Fixing floor holders and guide rails............................................................................................12-12 Figure 13-1 Installing side panels......................................................................................................................13-3 Figure 13-2 Installing the rear access cabinet doors..........................................................................................13-4 Figure 13-3 Installing the rear door of the front access cabinet.........................................................................13-5 Figure 13-4 Loosening the PGND bolt of the door............................................................................................13-6 Figure 13-5 Connecting the PGND cable of the door........................................................................................13-6 Figure 13-6 Fastening the bolt ...........................................................................................................................13-7 Figure 13-7 Testing the Insulation ....................................................................................................................13-7 Figure 13-8 Connected PGND Cables...............................................................................................................13-8 Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi

Figures

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide Figure 13-9 Installing the front pallets...............................................................................................................13-9 Figure 13-10 Cutting and restoring the antistatic floor......................................................................................13-9

Figure 14-1 Connection modes for the LMT.....................................................................................................14-2 Figure 14-2 Appearance of universal alarm boxes.............................................................................................14-4 Figure 15-1 Procedure for power-on checking...................................................................................................15-6 Figure 16-1 Connection between the LMT and the UMG8900.........................................................................16-2 Figure 16-2 LMT software installation procedure.............................................................................................16-3 Figure 16-3 Language selection.........................................................................................................................16-6 Figure 16-4 Welcome to the Installshield Wizard for Huawei LMT.................................................................16-6 Figure 16-5 License agreement..........................................................................................................................16-7 Figure 16-6 Selecting installation directory.......................................................................................................16-7 Figure 16-7 Components to be installed.............................................................................................................16-8 Figure 16-8 Entering CD KEY...........................................................................................................................16-8 Figure 16-9 Confirm Installation........................................................................................................................16-9 Figure 16-10 Copying files.................................................................................................................................16-9 Figure 16-11 Installation completed.................................................................................................................16-10 Figure 16-12 About window............................................................................................................................16-12 Figure 16-13 LMT Service Manager window..................................................................................................16-13 Figure 16-14 Uninstalling programs................................................................................................................16-14 Figure 17-1 Procedure for installing host software............................................................................................17-2 Figure 17-2 Disabling firewall...........................................................................................................................17-6 Figure 17-3 TCP/IP filtering..............................................................................................................................17-7 Figure 17-4 WFTPD window.............................................................................................................................17-8 Figure 17-5 Users/rights dialog box..............................................................................................................17-8 Figure 17-6 Configuring the user name.............................................................................................................17-9 Figure 17-7 Entering the password....................................................................................................................17-9 Figure 17-8 Setting the path to upload the file.................................................................................................17-10 Figure 17-9 TFTPD window............................................................................................................................17-10 Figure 17-10 Setting the path to upload the file...............................................................................................17-11 Figure 17-11 Establishing physical environment.............................................................................................17-12 Figure 17-12 Establishing serial port connection.............................................................................................17-12 Figure 17-13 Setting parameters for the HyperTerminal.................................................................................17-13 Figure 17-14 Setting attributes.........................................................................................................................17-14 Figure 17-15 Setting ASCII.............................................................................................................................17-14 Figure 17-16 User login...................................................................................................................................17-16 Figure 17-17 Setting the office information.....................................................................................................17-17 Figure 17-18 Modifying timeout setting..........................................................................................................17-17 Figure 17-19 Disabling firewall.......................................................................................................................17-30 Figure 17-20 TCP/IP filtering..........................................................................................................................17-31 Figure 18-1 Dial-up service networking............................................................................................................18-2 Figure 18-2 Procedure for installing remote maintenance system.....................................................................18-3 Figure 18-3 Installing a new modem..................................................................................................................18-4 xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figures

Figure 18-4 Selecting the modem......................................................................................................................18-4 Figure 18-5 Selecting the serial port for the modem..........................................................................................18-5 Figure 18-6 Completing modem installation......................................................................................................18-5 Figure 18-7 Setting Phone and Modem Properties............................................................................................18-6 Figure 18-8 Routing and remote access.............................................................................................................18-7 Figure 18-9 Welcome to the routing and remote access server setup wizard....................................................18-7 Figure 18-10 Common configurations...............................................................................................................18-8 Figure 18-11 Remote access server setup..........................................................................................................18-8 Figure 18-12 Remote client protocols................................................................................................................18-9 Figure 18-13 IP address assignment...................................................................................................................18-9 Figure 18-14 Address range assignment..........................................................................................................18-10 Figure 18-15 New address range......................................................................................................................18-10 Figure 18-16 Address range assignment..........................................................................................................18-11 Figure 18-17 Managing multiple remote access servers..................................................................................18-11 Figure 18-18 Completing the routing and remote access server setup wizard.................................................18-12 Figure 18-19 Configured remote access server................................................................................................18-12 Figure 18-20 Setting port properties................................................................................................................18-13 Figure 18-21 Selecting the modem..................................................................................................................18-13 Figure 18-22 Setting port properties of the modem.........................................................................................18-14 Figure 18-23 Network and dial-up connections...............................................................................................18-15 Figure 18-24 Incoming connections properties................................................................................................18-16 Figure 18-25 Incoming TCP/IP properties.......................................................................................................18-17 Figure 18-26 Computer management...............................................................................................................18-18 Figure 18-27 Setting local users and groups....................................................................................................18-18 Figure 18-28 Adding a new user......................................................................................................................18-19 Figure 18-29 User dial properties interface......................................................................................................18-19 Figure 18-30 Setting dial-in properties............................................................................................................18-20 Figure 18-31 Phone dialer................................................................................................................................18-21 Figure 18-32 Entering Dial-Up Networking dialog box.................................................................................18-22 Figure 18-33 Setting up a new connection.......................................................................................................18-22 Figure 19-1 Procedure for loading software to the OMU manually..................................................................19-2 Figure A-1 Procedure for mounting cabling racks..............................................................................................A-1 Figure A-2 Cabling ladder...................................................................................................................................A-3 Figure A-3 U-shaped connecting piece...............................................................................................................A-3 Figure A-4 Bracket angle....................................................................................................................................A-3 Figure A-5 Cable manager..................................................................................................................................A-3 Figure A-6 Triangular support.............................................................................................................................A-4 Figure A-7 Connecting clip.................................................................................................................................A-4 Figure A-8 Fixing clip.........................................................................................................................................A-4 Figure A-9 Cabling trough..................................................................................................................................A-4 Figure A-10 Movable bushing.............................................................................................................................A-4 Figure A-11 End cover........................................................................................................................................A-4 Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiii

Figures

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide Figure A-12 Rectangular frame...........................................................................................................................A-4

Figure A-13 U-steel.............................................................................................................................................A-4 Figure A-14 Mounting the cabling rack to the ceiling........................................................................................A-6 Figure A-15 Mounting the cabling rack to the ceiling with an obstacle.............................................................A-7 Figure A-16 Fixing the triangular support...........................................................................................................A-8 Figure A-17 Fixing the cabling ladder to the support.........................................................................................A-9 Figure A-18 Rectangular frame.........................................................................................................................A-10 Figure A-19 Mounting the outdoor cabling rack against the wall.....................................................................A-11 Figure A-20 Mounting the outdoor cabling rack on the ground........................................................................A-12 Figure A-21 Assembling cabling ladders..........................................................................................................A-13 Figure A-22 Turning the cabling ladder at the same level (without cabling troughs).......................................A-14 Figure A-23 Turning the cabling ladder at different levels...............................................................................A-15 Figure A-24 Connecting the cabling ladder to the wall.....................................................................................A-15 Figure A-25 Front jointing of climbing ladders................................................................................................A-16 Figure A-26 Side jointing of climbing ladders..................................................................................................A-16 Figure A-27 Oblique jointing of climbing ladders............................................................................................A-17 Figure A-28 Connecting cabling troughs..........................................................................................................A-18 Figure A-29 Mounting the cabling trough on a 200 mm [7.9 in.] or 400 mm [15.7 in.] cabling ladder...........A-18 Figure A-30 Mounting the cabling trough on a 600 mm [23.6 in.] cabling ladder...........................................A-19 Figure A-31 Cutting off the upper side of the triangle aperture in the cabling trough......................................A-19 Figure A-32 Mounting cabling troughs obliquely.............................................................................................A-20 Figure A-33 Cabling troughs mounted obliquely onto the cabling ladder........................................................A-20 Figure A-34 Cable-through racks mounted to the cabling rack without the cabling trough.............................A-21 Figure A-35 Cable-through racks mounted to the cabling rack with the cabling trough..................................A-22 Figure A-36 Mounting end covers, trough rims, and baffle rings.....................................................................A-22 Figure B-1 Assembling power cables..................................................................................................................B-3 Figure B-2 Stripping power cables......................................................................................................................B-4 Figure B-3 SS-325 parts......................................................................................................................................B-5 Figure B-4 Connecting core wires with the terminal crimping sleeve................................................................B-6 Figure B-5 Molding dies related to the power cables..........................................................................................B-6 Figure B-6 Crimping cables.................................................................................................................................B-7 Figure B-7 Shrinking the heat-shrinkable tubes..................................................................................................B-8 Figure B-8 Assembling the RJ45 connector........................................................................................................B-9 Figure B-9 Components of a shielded RJ45 connector.....................................................................................B-10 Figure B-10 Putting a network cable into a connector jacket............................................................................B-10 Figure B-11 Peeling the jacket of a twisted pair cable......................................................................................B-11 Figure B-12 Putting a cable into a metal shell...................................................................................................B-11 Figure B-13 Peeling the shielded layer of a twisted pair cable.........................................................................B-12 Figure B-14 Wire sequence of the crossover network cables............................................................................B-13 Figure B-15 Wire sequence of the straight through network cables..................................................................B-14 Figure B-16 Wire holder of a connector............................................................................................................B-14 Figure B-17 Aligning four pairs of cables on a wire holder..............................................................................B-15 xiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figures

Figure B-18 Cutting wires.................................................................................................................................B-15 Figure B-19 Inserting a connector holder..........................................................................................................B-15 Figure B-20 Press-Fitting a connector...............................................................................................................B-16 Figure B-21 Inserting the metal shell of a connector.........................................................................................B-17 Figure B-22 Assembling the RJ48 connectors of the twisted pair trunk cables................................................B-18 Figure B-23 Length of the stripped segment on the cable.................................................................................B-19 Figure B-24 Structure of the RJ48 optical connector........................................................................................B-19 Figure B-25 Shielded cables..............................................................................................................................B-20 Figure B-26 Trimmed core wires......................................................................................................................B-20 Figure B-27 Arrangement of the core wires......................................................................................................B-21 Figure B-28 Ready-made RJ45 connector ........................................................................................................B-21 Figure B-29 Procedure for assembling the SMB connector..............................................................................B-23 Figure B-30 Mounting heat-shrinkable tubes and crimping sleeves.................................................................B-24 Figure B-31 Stripping trunk signal cables.........................................................................................................B-24 Figure B-32 Welding pins.................................................................................................................................B-25 Figure B-33 Crimping the SMB connector onto a cable...................................................................................B-26 Figure B-34 Shrinking heat-shrinkable tubes....................................................................................................B-27 Figure C-1 Labels for power cables....................................................................................................................C-2 Figure C-2 Labels for signal cables.....................................................................................................................C-3 Figure C-3 Print warning.....................................................................................................................................C-4 Figure C-4 Writing direction...............................................................................................................................C-5 Figure C-5 Appearance of the affixed label on the power cable.........................................................................C-6 Figure C-6 Appearance of the affixed label on the signal cable.........................................................................C-6 Figure C-7 Affixing the label onto proper position of the cable.........................................................................C-7 Figure C-8 Folding up the label...........................................................................................................................C-7 Figure C-9 Labels for signal cables.....................................................................................................................C-8 Figure C-10 Example of the label on the alarm cable.........................................................................................C-9 Figure C-11 Example of the label on the network cable...................................................................................C-10 Figure C-12 Example of the label on the optical fiber between two devices....................................................C-12 Figure C-13 Example of the label on the optical fiber between the device and the ODF.................................C-13 Figure C-14 Example of the label on the trunk cable between two devices.....................................................C-14 Figure C-15 Example of the label on the trunk cable between the device and the DDF..................................C-15 Figure C-16 Example of the labels on the DC power cables.............................................................................C-17 Figure C-17 Example of the labels on the AC power cables.............................................................................C-18 Figure E-1 Partition in the equipment room........................................................................................................E-4

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xv

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Tables

Tables
Table 2-1 Measurement tools...............................................................................................................................2-2 Table 2-2 Punching tools......................................................................................................................................2-3 Table 2-3 Fastening tools.....................................................................................................................................2-3 Table 2-4 Small tools............................................................................................................................................2-4 Table 2-5 Dedicated tools.....................................................................................................................................2-4 Table 2-6 Meters...................................................................................................................................................2-6 Table 2-7 Auxiliary tools......................................................................................................................................2-6 Table 10-1 Relationships between components and power control switches in front-access cabinets..............10-4 Table 10-2 Relationships between components and power control switches in the H66-22 cabinet.................10-6 Table 10-3 Relationships between components and power control switches in the H66-22 cabinet.................10-8 Table 10-4 Relationships between power control switches and components.....................................................10-9 Table 10-5 Relationships between power control switches and components...................................................10-12 Table 11-1 Modes of the UAM frame..............................................................................................................11-17 Table 11-2 Description of E1 interfaces on the MOMD..................................................................................11-19 Table 11-3 Positions of E1 interfaces of the UAFM frame..............................................................................11-20 Table 11-4 Positions of E1 interfaces of the RSP10 frame..............................................................................11-20 Table 11-5 Dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB44 connectors..........................................................11-21 Table 11-6 Dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB78 connectors (from connectors X1 to X2)............11-22 Table 11-7 Dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB78 connectors (from connectors X1 to X3)............11-23 Table 11-8 Dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB44 connectors (from connectors X1 to X2)............11-24 Table 11-9 Dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB44 connectors (from connectors X1 to X3)............11-24 Table 11-10 Dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB78 connectors (from connectors X1 to X2)..........11-25 Table 11-11 Dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB78 connectors (from connectors X1 to X3)..........11-25 Table 11-12 Dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB78 connectors (from connectors X1 to X4)..........11-25 Table 11-13 Dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB78 connectors (from connectors X1 to X5)..........11-26 Table 11-14 Description of cascading between the UAFM main frame and the UAFS subframe..................11-29 Table 11-15 Description of HWC interfaces of the RSP10 frame...................................................................11-30 Table 11-16 Description of HW interfaces of the RSP14 frame......................................................................11-31 Table 11-17 Description of HW cables with two connectors...........................................................................11-32 Table 11-18 Pin assignment of service bearer network cables.........................................................................11-46 Table 16-1 Recommended configurations of the hardware and system for LMT software...............................16-3 Table A-1 Procedure for mounting cabling racks................................................................................................A-3 Table B-1 Tensile strength standard of ready-made cables.................................................................................B-9 Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvii

Tables

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide Table B-2 Pin assignment for the RJ48 connector of the 120-ohm twisted pair cable......................................B-21 Table C-1 Template of standard fonts.................................................................................................................C-5 Table C-2 Content of labels on the external cable of the alarm box...................................................................C-9 Table C-3 Content of labels on the network cable............................................................................................C-10 Table C-4 Content of labels on the optical fiber between two devices.............................................................C-11 Table C-5 Content of labels on the optical fiber between the device and the ODF..........................................C-12 Table C-6 Content of labels on the trunk cable between two devices...............................................................C-14 Table C-7 Content of labels on the trunk cable between the device and the DDF............................................C-15 Table C-8 Content of labels on the DC power cables.......................................................................................C-16 Table C-9 Content of labels on the AC power cables.......................................................................................C-18 Table D-1 Directory structure of the LMT files..................................................................................................D-2 Table D-2 BAM file directory.............................................................................................................................D-3 Table D-3 Description of the main version.........................................................................................................D-4 Table D-4 Description of board type...................................................................................................................D-5 Table D-5 Higher layer software of boards.........................................................................................................D-7 Table E-1 Construction requirements for the equipment room...........................................................................E-2 Table E-2 Requirements for temperature and humidity.......................................................................................E-4 Table E-3 Dust particle limit in the equipment room..........................................................................................E-5 Table E-4 Erosive gas density limits...................................................................................................................E-5 Table E-5 Electromagnetic range.........................................................................................................................E-6 Table E-6 Lightning protection grounding requirements....................................................................................E-7 Table E-7 Specifications of AC voltage and frequency.......................................................................................E-9 Table E-8 DC power supply specifications.......................................................................................................E-10

xviii

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

About This Document

About This Document

Purpose
This document describes the procedures for installing the cabinets, frames, cables, and peripherals. This document provides the installation guide, component installation and installation check for HUAWEI UMG8900 Universal Media Gateway (hereinafter referred to as UMG8900).

Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name HUAWEI UMG8900 Version V100R007

Intended Audience
The intended audiences of this document are:
l l l

Installation technician Commissioning engineer Field technician

Update History
Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document version contains all updates made to previous versions. Updates in Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Initial commercial release. Updates in Issue 01 (2007-11-28) Initial field trial release

Organization
This document provides the installation guide, component installation and installation check for HUAWEI UMG8900 Universal Media Gateway (hereinafter referred to as UMG8900).
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1

About This Document

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

1 Installation Procedure Based on normal installation sequence, device installation includes four major parts: hardware installation, software installation, data configuration, system commissioning. This document describes the basic procedures for hardware installation and software installation of the UMG8900. 2 Installation Preparations This describes the sequence of installation preparations in the installation procedures and the preparatory work. 3 Unpacking and Inspection The project supervisor should check the goods together with the customer when the goods are received. 4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESD-Preventive Floor This describes how to install the N66-22 and H66-22 cabinets on the ESD-preventive floor. 5 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESD-Preventive Floor This describes how to install the normalized N66-22 cabinets on the ESD-preventive floor. 6 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor This describes how to install the N66-22 and H66-22 cabinets on the cement floor. 7 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor This describes how to install the normalized N66-22 cabinets on the cement floor. 8 Connecting PGND cables and power cables for cabinets This describes how to connect the protection ground (PGND) cables and power cables for cabinets. 9 Installing Internal Components This describes how to install internal components of the cabinet. 10 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for Internal Components This describes how to connect the protection ground (PGND) cables and power cables for internal components. 11 Connecting Signal Cables This describes how to connect the signal cables of the UMG8900. 12 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinet Fittings This describes how to install N66-22 or H66-22 cabinet fittings. 13 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinet Fittings This describes how to install normalized N66-22 cabinet fittings. 14 Installing Peripherals This describes how to install peripherals including terminals, alarm boxes, and EAC-2 environment monitoring device.
2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

About This Document

15 Checking Installation This describes how to check the installation. 16 Installing LMT Software This describes the procedure for installing the LMT software, installation preparations, and steps for installing/uninstalling the software. 17 Loading Host Software This describes the loading procedure, loading steps, loading method, loading check, and exception handling. 18 Configuring Remote Maintenance System This describes the applications, configuring procedure, and checking method of remote maintenance system. 19 Loading OMU Software Manually This describes the applications, loading preparations, loading procedure, and loading steps. A Mounting Cabling Racks This describes how to mount the cabling racks. B Assembling Cable Connectors This describes how to assemble the cable connectors. C Introduction to Engineering Labels The engineering labels are used for site installation and future maintenance. The engineering labels are of two types based on power cables and signal cables. The signal cables of the UMG8900 include alarm external cables, network cables, optical fibers, trunk cables. The power cables include DC power cables and AC power cables. D Introduction to File System Directory This describes the functions of the file system directory. E Requirements for Device Running Environment This describes the requirements for device running environment, including location and construction of equipment room, temperature and humidity, cleanness, erosive gas, electromagnetism, ESD-prevention, lightning protection, and power.

Conventions
Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided,will result in death or serious injury.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

About This Document

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Symbol

Description Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided,could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.

General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Times New Roman Boldface Italic Courier New Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root. Book titles are in italics. Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.

Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface Italic [] { x | y | ... } [ x | y | ... ] { x | y | ... }* Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Command arguments are in italics. Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

About This Document

Convention [ x | y | ... ]*

Description Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface > Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder .

Keyboard Operations The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Format Key Key 1+Key 2 Key 1, Key 2 Description Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab. Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt +A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently. Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Action Click Double-click Drag Description Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer. Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer. Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

1 Installation Procedure

1
About This Chapter

Installation Procedure

Based on normal installation sequence, device installation includes four major parts: hardware installation, software installation, data configuration, system commissioning. This document describes the basic procedures for hardware installation and software installation of the UMG8900. 1.1 Hardware Installation Procedure The normal running of the UMG8900 is related to the quality of installation. Systematic and standard installation is required to reduce the unfavorable factors to the device running and to improve the reliability of device running over network. 1.2 Hardware Installation Steps This describes the hardware installation steps of the UMG8900. 1.3 Precautions This describes the precautions during hardware installation of the UMG8900.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-1

1 Installation Procedure

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

1.1 Hardware Installation Procedure


The normal running of the UMG8900 is related to the quality of installation. Systematic and standard installation is required to reduce the unfavorable factors to the device running and to improve the reliability of device running over network. Figure 1-1 shows the procedure for hardware installation of the UMG8900. Figure 1-1 Hardware installation procedure
Start

Prepare

Inspect Packages

Install cabinets

Install protection grounding cables and power cables for the cabinets

Install internal components

Install protection grounding cables and power cables for the internal components

Install signal cables

Install cabinet fittings

Install peripherals

Check the installation

End

1-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide


NOTE

1 Installation Procedure

l l

In the UMG8900, the internal components, including SSM frames, are set from the bottom up. The internal components in the cabinet are often installed from the bottom up. The internal components except the boards in SSM frame are installed before delivery. To install the upgrade/expansion devices, refer to Figure 1-1 and 9 Installing Internal Components of this document.

1.2 Hardware Installation Steps


This describes the hardware installation steps of the UMG8900. 1. Before installation, prepare the technical documents and installation tools, check whether the installation environment meets the requirement, and ensure that the construction engineers have necessary installation skills. For details, see 2 Installation Preparations. Inspection includes checking whether the package is intact and unpacking the goods for inspection. For details, see 3 Unpacking and Inspection. Cabinet installation on ESD-preventive floor includes removing package accessories, positioning supports, installing expansion bolts, installing supports, fixing cabinets on ESD-preventive floor, and testing insulation between expansion bolts and cabinets. For details, see 4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESD-Preventive Floor. Cabinet installation on cement floor includes removing package accessories, positioning supports, installing expansion bolts, fixing cabinets on cement floor, and testing insulation between expansion bolts and cabinets. For details, see 6 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor. Connection of protection ground (PGND) cables and power cables includes connecting PGND cables and power cables, connecting PGND cables and power cables between DC power distribution cabinets and cabinets, and connecting PGND cables between cabinets. For details, see 8 Connecting PGND cables and power cables for cabinets. Installation of internal components includes installing boards in the UA frames, configuring internal components, and installing boards in the SSM frames. For details, see 9 Installing Internal Components. Connection of PGND cables and power cables for internal components includes installing internal components, SSM frames, UA frames, low-density UA fan frames, and connecting PGND cables and power cables of the monitoring box. For details, see 10 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for Internal Components. Connection of signal cables includes connecting the monitoring cables, trunk cables, access signal cables of the UA frame, BITS clock cable, and external network cables. For details, see 11 Connecting Signal Cables. Installation of cabinet fittings includes installing fittings such as the ESD-preventive floor and cabinet doors. For details, see 12 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinet Fittings.

2. 3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10. Installation of peripherals includes installing local maintenance terminal (LMT) and alarm box. For details, see 14 Installing Peripherals. That is the end of hardware installation. 11. Before starting software installation, check the hardware installation. For the checklist and criterions, see 15 Checking Installation. Rectify improper installation items until they comply with the requirements.

1.3 Precautions
This describes the precautions during hardware installation of the UMG8900.
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1-3

1 Installation Procedure
l

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

This document helps you to install the hardware components and cables of the UMG8900. The construction engineers should refer to this document in a flexible way because the available information does not cover all site conditions and optional devices in actual installation. Ports that the UMG8900 provides are type 2 equipment defined in the Electromagnetic compatibility and Electrical Safety Generic Criteria for Network Telecommunications Equipment issue 3. Pay attention to the following before installing the UMG8900: Read the Site Survey Report to know the position and state of the device in the network. Familiarize the interface types of line transmission devices, length of cables, and accounting modes of access devices. Check whether the customer's order for the device is changed greatly.

1-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

2 Installation Preparations

2
About This Chapter

Installation Preparations

This describes the sequence of installation preparations in the installation procedures and the preparatory work. 2.1 Preparing Documents The construction technical documents related to the installation include the following. Read them carefully to get more information about the project. 2.2 Requirements for Construction Engineers During the installation, the customers must arrange the technical engineers to attend the installation training about the system networking, power supply, cable connection, and operation and maintenance. In this case, the client engineers can maintain the device. 2.3 Preparing Installation Tools In general, the construction party must prepare the following tools and meters. 2.4 Checking Environment Check the following items before installing the UMG8900.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-1

2 Installation Preparations

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

2.1 Preparing Documents


The construction technical documents related to the installation include the following. Read them carefully to get more information about the project.
l

The customer-commissioning party must complete documents such as network plan, equipment room design, construction diagram, and cable routing diagram. The copies of all these documents must be provided to Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. (hereinafter referred to as Huawei) before delivery. Huawei engineers fill in site survey report on site. Huawei makes engineering design document based on actual conditions of each office and delivers it. Package documentation refers to Hardware Description and Installation Guide. Huawei delivers other documents such as contracts and agreements, configuration table, packing list to customers with goods.

l l

l l

2.2 Requirements for Construction Engineers


During the installation, the customers must arrange the technical engineers to attend the installation training about the system networking, power supply, cable connection, and operation and maintenance. In this case, the client engineers can maintain the device. In addition, pay attention to the following two points when organizing the construction engineers.
l

The technical engineers of the cooperative party must master the installation and commissioning methods and obtain the qualification certificate after training. The technical engineers of the customer must master some installation and construction technique through training by Huawei before the installation.

The number of technical engineers depends on the project scheduling and installation conditions. Normally three to five are needed.

2.3 Preparing Installation Tools


In general, the construction party must prepare the following tools and meters. Table 2-1 Measurement tools Picture Name Long tape Description To measure a distance

Angle square

To measure a distance
Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

2-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

2 Installation Preparations

Picture

Name Spirit level

Description To measure the horizontal level

Table 2-2 Punching tools Picture Name Percussion drill Description To drill holes. The matched drill bits are of 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, and 16. To clean the floor

Vacuum cleaner

Table 2-3 Fastening tools Picture Name Crosshead screwdriver Description To fasten screws

Straight screwdriver

To fasten screws

Spanner

To fasten bolts

Torque spanner

To fasten expansion bolts

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-3

2 Installation Preparations

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Picture

Name Suite of sleeves

Description To level the cabinet

Table 2-4 Small tools Picture Name Diagonal pliers Description To cut cable ties

Table 2-5 Dedicated tools Picture Name Crimping pliers Description To crimp crystal connectors of network cables

Cold-pressed pliers

To crimp coldpressed terminals

2-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

2 Installation Preparations

Picture

Name Cable peeler

Description To peel cables

Wire punch down tool

To connect the trunk cable to the cabling rack

High-speed wire stripper for coaxial cables

To process the coaxial cable

Vertical tester

To test the vertical error

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-5

2 Installation Preparations

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Table 2-6 Meters Picture Name Cable tester Description To test network cables

Multimeter

To measure impedance and voltage, or check continuity

Table 2-7 Auxiliary tools Picture Name ESD-preventive wrist strap Description To be worn during installation

Cable tie Fiber bundling tape

To bind cables To bundle the optical fiber

2-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

2 Installation Preparations

Picture

Name Gloves

Description To be worn during installation

ESD-preventive gloves

To be worn during installation

Ladder

To be used for operations at heights

NOTE

The instruments must pass the measurement test.

2.4 Checking Environment


Check the following items before installing the UMG8900.
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2-7

2 Installation Preparations

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

2.4.1 Checking Building Conditions of Equipment Rooms 2.4.2 Checking Environment Conditions 2.4.3 Checking Power Supply Conditions 2.4.4 Checking Grounding Conditions 2.4.5 Checking the Lightning Protection System 2.4.6 Requirements for DDFs/ODFs 2.4.7 Optical Transmission Devices 2.4.8 Distribution Requirements for Terminals and Alarm Boxes

2.4.1 Checking Building Conditions of Equipment Rooms


Check the area, height, weight bearing capacity, and groove distribution of the equipment room. If any item does not meet the installation environment requirements, reconstructing is recommended. For details on the installation environment requirements, see E.2 Requirements for Equipment Room Construction.

2.4.2 Checking Environment Conditions


The check items include:
l

The illumination conditions must meet the requirements for device maintenance. There must be normal illumination, standby illumination, and emergency illumination systems. The air-conditioning and ventilation systems can ensure the temperature and humidity requirements. Effective ESD-preventive measures are taken. The equipment room is equipped with enough fire-fighting facilities. The equipment room meets the quakeproof requirements. The floor in the equipment room is solid enough to install and fasten the device. Safe lightning-proof measures are taken for the equipment room.

l l l

2.4.3 Checking Power Supply Conditions


The check items include:
l

The AC power supply facilities are complete, and the power meets the requirement. Besides the mains power supply, there must be standby power supply by diesel generator. The DC power distribution devices can provide stable power supply, and the output voltage is within the specified range. Enough available storage batteries ensure that the device is able to run in case of power supply failure. Lead-out terminals for AC safety ground are available for the purpose of easy connection.

For details on the power supply requirements, see E.9 Requirements for Power Supply.

2.4.4 Checking Grounding Conditions


2-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

2 Installation Preparations

Good grounding ensures the stable running of the device, and prevents the device from lightning and interference. Therefore, check the grounding conditions of the site, and take correct grounding measures.
NOTE

The earth resistance of the grounding system is recommended to be less than 10 ohms. The device grounding should comply with national and local electrical codes.

2.4.5 Checking the Lightning Protection System


The equipment building must have lightning arrester. The ground for lightning arrester of the equipment building and the protection ground of the equipment room share the same group of grounding bodies.

2.4.6 Requirements for DDFs/ODFs


In the networking, if the UMG8900 connects to E1 trunk cables, choose qualified digital distribution frame (DDF) according to the international standards; if the UMG8900 connects to external optical fibers, choose optical distribution frame (ODF) according to the international standards. According to the capacity of the project and future expansion, the capacity of the DDF/ODF must be figured out. For the convenience of soldering the connectors of trunk cables at the DDF side, see the contract checklist for the model of the trunk cables used in the UMG8900. You can also consult the engineering designer at the local office.

2.4.7 Optical Transmission Devices


If there is auxiliary transmission device, check the following items before the UMG8900 hardware installation:
l l l l l

The optical transmission device is installed and debugged. Optical fibers are laid. The fiber tails from connection box are marked. The connectivity of the optical fibers is checked. The cabling rack and distribution frame are installed.

2.4.8 Distribution Requirements for Terminals and Alarm Boxes


l l l l

The maintenance and monitoring room is clean, without sundries. The cabinet fittings are installed. The workstations are ESD-preventive computer workstations. The workstations are in the correct location, which meets the plan requirement of the equipment room. The workstations are arranged in order. To be specific, the workstations are in a line; adjacent workstations are close to each other; the table-boards are vertical. The terminals are connected to the uninterrupted power supply and kept away from electrical devices to avoid electromagnetic interference. The terminals and auxiliary devices with complete signs are available and their locations meet the design requirements.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2-9

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

3 Unpacking and Inspection

3
About This Chapter

Unpacking and Inspection

The project supervisor should check the goods together with the customer when the goods are received. 3.1 Inspecting Packages Check whether the package is intact before inspecting the goods. 3.2 Unpacking Unpacking involves unpacking wooden crates, cartons, and boards. 3.3 Inspection The project supervisor should check the goods together with the customer when the goods are received.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-1

3 Unpacking and Inspection

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

3.1 Inspecting Packages


Check whether the package is intact before inspecting the goods.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the total number of goods is the same as that in the packing list attached to the packing box. Step 2 Check whether the package is intact and whether the chassis is placed correctly. Step 3 Stop unpacking the cartons, and send feedback on the problems to local offices if any of the following cases occurs:
l l

The package is severely damaged or wet. The equipment is rusty or wet.

Step 4 If the cabinet is shaken violently, the outer package may not be damaged by vibration; however, the inside device may be damaged. In this case, check the vibration label on the cabinet. The vibration label is red in the case of vibration. The red vibration label is the evidence for claim. ----End

3.2 Unpacking
Unpacking involves unpacking wooden crates, cartons, and boards. 3.2.1 Unpacking Wooden Crates Wooden crate is used to package up heavy goods such as cabinets and batteries. 3.2.2 Unpacking Cartons Cartons are used to package up cables, circuit boards, and terminal devices. 3.2.3 Unpacking Boards The boards are delivered in antistatic bags. Therefore, when unpacking the board, take antistatic measures to avoid any damage.

3.2.1 Unpacking Wooden Crates


Wooden crate is used to package up heavy goods such as cabinets and batteries.

Prerequisite
A wooden crate is composed of the wooden board, angle steel, tongue, and foam corner protector. Before unpacking a wooden crate, move it to the equipment room or nearby (where there is enough space), to avoid damage to the cabinet when moving the crate. Fork truck is recommended to move the crate. Refer to Figure 3-1.

3-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

3 Unpacking and Inspection

Figure 3-1 Moving the wooden crate with a fork truck

CAUTION
When moving or lifting the cabinet, hold the rigid parts of the cabinet with both hands, such as brackets or major frames to avoid damage or injury. Do not hold the flexible parts such as cable brackets and cable fixing beam. Remove the lining boards of the cabinet on the installation site to avoid damage to signal cables and boards when moving or lifting the cabinet.

Procedure
Step 1 Place the wooden crate on the floor. Ensure that the side with the wooden rack faces downward. Step 2 Insert the spanner into the tongue holes in the cover. Then, turn the spanner to straighten the tongues. Refer to Figure 3-2.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-3

3 Unpacking and Inspection

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 3-2 Straightening tongues (1)


Wooden board Angle steel

Tongue

Spanner

Step 3 Alternatively, you can use straight screwdrivers to straighten the tongues. Refer to Figure 3-3 and Figure 3-4. Figure 3-3 Straightening tongues (2)

Figure 3-4 Straightening tongues (3)

3-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

3 Unpacking and Inspection

Step 4 Lift and remove the covers after all tongues are straightened. Refer to Figure 3-5. Figure 3-5 Lifting and removing covers

Get the carton out of the wooden crate if the carton is in the wooden crate. If the cabinet is in the wooden crate without any carton, perform the following steps: Step 5 Straighten the tongues on the surrounded wooden board. Then, remove the wooden board. Refer to Figure 3-6.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-5

3 Unpacking and Inspection

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 3-6 Removing surrounded wooden boards

Step 6 Make the cabinet upright. Ensure that the side marked with BOTTOM faces downward. Step 7 Remove the carton base with the wooden rack. Step 8 Remove the foam corner protectors. Step 9 Remove the package bags. ----End

3.2.2 Unpacking Cartons


Cartons are used to package up cables, circuit boards, and terminal devices.

Procedure
Step 1 Check the label on the carton to get information about the type and quantity of the components in the carton. Step 2 Cut the straps with cutters. Step 3 Cut the tapes along the seam of box cover with paper knife. Do not insert the knife too deep to avoid any scratch on internal devices. Step 4 Open the carton to take out the foam blocks. Step 5 Check the board labels to see if the quantity is the same as that marked on the carton label. If yes, take out the board boxes.
3-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

3 Unpacking and Inspection

Step 6 Check the boards inside the board boxes against the packing list. ----End

Example
Figure 3-7 shows the steps for unpacking the cartons. Figure 3-7 Unpacking cartons
1 4 5 4

2 3

1. Pressure-sensitive adhesive tape 5. Board label

2. Strap 6. Board box

3. Carton label 7. Antistatic bag

4. Foam block 8. Board

Do not discard carton with components left inside. Before unpacking next carton, ensure that the current carton is empty.

3.2.3 Unpacking Boards


The boards are delivered in antistatic bags. Therefore, when unpacking the board, take antistatic measures to avoid any damage.

Context

CAUTION
Electronic circuits and components are extremely sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Therefore, wear a securely grounded antistatic wrist strap, and only hold the edge of boards when checking the components.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-7

3 Unpacking and Inspection

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Note the effect of environment change on circuit boards. The drying agent in the antistatic bag is to keep dry inside. When boards are moved from a cold dry place to a hot damp place, wait at least 30 minutes before unpacking the boards. Otherwise, the condensed water on the surface may damage the boards.

Procedure
Step 1 Check that there is no evident damage on the board package. Step 2 Wear an antistatic wrist strap and ground it securely. Step 3 Open the package and check that the board is intact. ----End

3.3 Inspection
The project supervisor should check the goods together with the customer when the goods are received.

Procedure
Step 1 Open the case marked with the label indicating "Packing list inside", and take out the packing list to check the goods against the list. In case any item is wrong or missing, fill in the Goods Error Feedback Form. In case any good is damaged, fill in the Goods Replacement Application Form. and sign the Packing List page by page with the customer. Step 2 Ensure that all unpacked components are placed on the ESD-preventive surface, such as ESDpreventive polyethylene bags and EPE foam. Perform the installation according to the following description. In addition, ensure that all unpacked boards are stored with original packaging, and put them in a cool dry place without direct sunshine or strong electromagnetic radiation. ----End

3-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESD-Preventive Floor

About This Chapter


This describes how to install the N66-22 and H66-22 cabinets on the ESD-preventive floor.

Prerequisite
Make sure that the following preparations are completed before installing the cabinet.
l l

Ensure that the ESD-Preventive floor is clean. Room illumination meets the requirements for installation.

Context
Figure 4-1 shows the procedure for installing cabinets on the ESD-preventive floor.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-1

4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 4-1 Installation procedure


Start

Remove package accessories

Position supports

Install expansion bolts

Install supports

Install cabinets on the ESDpreventive floor

Test the insulation

Pass? Yes

No

No If the cabinets need to be attached?

Yes Attach the cabinets

End

Figure 4-2 shows the installed cabinet.

4-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

Figure 4-2 Cabinet after installation

After installing the cabinet, clean the installation site.


l l l

Sort out the tools and put the tools to the specific positions. Clear the waste to keep the room tidy and clean. Collect the materials left over and send them back to the customer after the project is completed.

Postrequisite
After installing the cabinet on the ESD-preventive floor, you can connect the protection ground (PGND) cables and power cables for the cabinet. 4.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions Read this part carefully before installing the cabinets. Familiarize the installation specifications and precautions to avoid reconstructing and damage or injury. 4.2 Removing Package Accessories This describes how to remove the package before installing the cabinets. The delivered cabinets are covered with wooden package. 4.3 Positioning Supports Positioning supports refers to determining the position to install the supports on the floor. Positioning supports is the basic work for hardware installation. Accurate positioning is the prerequisite to guarantee the quality of the overall installation. Inaccurate positioning causes inconvenience for subsequent installation. 4.4 Installing Expansion Bolts To fix the cabinet and the support on the floor, install the expansion bolts on the floor of the equipment room. 4.5 Installing Supports This describes how to fix and adjust the support. 4.6 Installing Cabinets on the ESD-Preventive Floor
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4-3

4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

This describes how to fix the cabinets on supports and level them. 4.7 Attaching the Cabinets This describes how to attach the cabinets. When installing two or more cabinets side by side, connect them by using connecting plates. The connecting plates for combined cabinets are located at the top of the cabinet and delivered with the cabinet.

4-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

4.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions


Read this part carefully before installing the cabinets. Familiarize the installation specifications and precautions to avoid reconstructing and damage or injury.

Installation Specifications
l

Each row of cabinets along the main walkway must be straight. The vertical error cannot exceed 3 mm [0.11 in.]. Each column of racks must be close and the rack surfaces are in the same line. Wear clean gloves when touching the surfaces of cabinets or frames.
NOTE

l l

The cabinets without the front, back doors and the side panels are called racks.

Precautions
l

Before installing cabinets, ensure that the related installation tasks performed above the cabinet (such as cabling rack installation and cable layout) are completed. Therefore, the dust and metal scraps do not drop into the cabinets from above during installation. This eliminates the hidden risks in the normal running of the equipment. During installation, keep the surface of the cabinet from being scratched.

4.2 Removing Package Accessories


This describes how to remove the package before installing the cabinets. The delivered cabinets are covered with wooden package.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the screws on the package accessories with a crosshead screwdriver. Step 2 Remove all the screws on the package board, and then remove the package board. Step 3 Remove the screws on the package accessories with a crosshead screwdriver. Step 4 Put away the removed package accessories in a cardboard box. ----End

Postrequisite
After removing the package accessories, you can position the supports.

4.3 Positioning Supports


Positioning supports refers to determining the position to install the supports on the floor. Positioning supports is the basic work for hardware installation. Accurate positioning is the prerequisite to guarantee the quality of the overall installation. Inaccurate positioning causes inconvenience for subsequent installation.
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4-5

4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Prerequisite
l

Make sure that the required material is available. Make sure that the line drawing template and floor plan are available. Make sure that the tools such as spirit level, panel lifter, ink fountain, marking pen, are available.

Context
The N66-22 or H66-22 cabinet is installed on the S600A supports.

CAUTION
Determine the installation position of the cabinets based on the construction engineering drawings. Keep sufficient space (not less than 800 mm, that is, 2.6 ft.) around the cabinets to facilitate the maintenance and operation.
l

The line drawing template is made from paper. Its shape is easy to be changed. Therefore, measure the template based on the construction plan before using this template. If the shape of the line drawing template is changed, determine the positions of the expansion screws with a spirit level. The half-circle gap on the template faces the front side of the cabinet.

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the positions of supports according to the construction engineering drawings.

CAUTION
l

The distance between the front sides of two rows of cabinets is not less than 1800 mm [5.9 ft.]. The side of the cabinet that is closest to the wall is at least 800 mm [2.6 ft.] away from the wall. For front-access H66-22 cabinets, the back sides of the cabinets that are closest to the wall are at least 50 mm [1.96 in.] away from the wall. The front sides are at least 800 mm [2.6 ft.] away from the wall. For rear-access N66-22 cabinets, the front sides and the back sides of the cabinets that are closest to the wall are at least 800 mm [2.6 ft.] away from the wall. The equipment room must have the path that is 1000 mm [3.3 ft.] wide.

Step 2 Move the ESD-preventive floor on installation site with a panel lifter. Step 3 Remove the supporting components of the ESD-preventive floor. Step 4 Clean the installation site. Step 5 Determine whether to draw lines with line drawing template.
4-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

If ... Draw lines with line drawing template Draw lines without using line drawing template Step 6 Use the line drawing template.

Then ... Go to Step 6. Go to Step 7.

CAUTION
l

The line drawing template is made from paper. Its shape is easy to be changed. Therefore, measure the template based on the construction engineering plan before using this template. If the shape of the line drawing template is changed, determine the positions of holes of expansion bolts with a spirit level. The half-circle gap on the template faces the front side of the cabinet. Determine the starting point of the front sides of the cabinets according to floor plan. Draw a baseline along the cabinet row based on the starting point. Place the line drawing template on the floor based on the cabinet layout. Figure 4-3 shows the method for installing the line drawing template. The half-circle gap on the template faces the front side of the cabinet. Figure 4-3 Line drawing template (for installation on the ESD-preventive floor-unit: mm)

1. 2.

460

600

354 600

3.

Mark the hole positions for four expansion bolts on the floor based on the template. Then, mark the hole positions of all expansion bolts.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4-7

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

4.

Go to Step 8.

Step 7 If the on-site conditions cannot meet the requirements for using the line drawing template, perform the following steps: 1. 2. Determine the baseline (parallel to the front side of the cabinet) based on the floor plan. Choose the proper cabinet model to determine the positions of mounting holes.
l

Draw the positions of supports and fixing holes for the N66-22 cabinets based on Figure 4-4 or Figure 4-5. Figure 4-4 Mounting holes of the supports for a single cabinet (unit: mm)

800 800

4 - 16

460

600

354 800 600 800

4-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

Figure 4-5 Mounting holes of supports for multiple cabinets in a row (unit: mm)

800

800

4 - 16

460

600

354 800 600

354 600

354 600 800

Draw the positions of supports and fixing holes for the H66-22 cabinets based on Figure 4-6, Figure 4-7, or Figure 4-8. Figure 4-6 Mounting holes of the supports for a single cabinet (unit: mm)

50 4 - 16 460 600

354 800 600 800 800

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-9

4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 4-7 Mounting holes of supports for multiple cabinets in a row (unit: mm)

50 4 - 16 460 600

354 800 600

354 600

354 600 800 800

Figure 4-8 Mounting holes of supports for back-to-back cabinets in two rows (unit: mm)

800 600 800 460 140 460 600 600 600

4N - 16

354 800 600

354 600

354 600 800

Step 8 Check the position marks carefully to ensure accuracy. ----End


4-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

Postrequisite
After positioning the supports, you can install expansion bolts.

4.4 Installing Expansion Bolts


To fix the cabinet and the support on the floor, install the expansion bolts on the floor of the equipment room.

Prerequisite
l l

Make sure that the spare part is available. The expansion bolts M12x30 are required. Make sure that the tool is available. The percussion drills (bit 14, bit 16), vacuum cleaners, glasses, dustproof coverings for electronic products, and rubber hammers are required.

Context

CAUTION
l

When using the percussion drill, ensure that your eyes are at least 50 cm [19.7 in.] away from the drill bit. Keep the drill bit vertical to the ground during drilling, and hold the drill handle tightly with two hands to keep it straight and stable; otherwise, vibrations may damage the floor or make a tilted hole. Remove the dust with a vacuum cleaner when drilling. Before the expansion tube is driven into the ground, the guiding rib on the expansion nut must be inserted into the guiding slot on the expansion tube. After the expansion tube is driven into the ground, the top of the tube must be flush with the ground.

l l

Procedure
Step 1 If the ground is too hard or smooth to settle the drill bit, punch a sample pit first for easy drilling. Refer to Figure 4-9.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-11

4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 4-9 Method for drilling a hole

Step 2 Drill holes for the expansion bolts by using the percussion drill with bit 16. The depth of the holes must be 52 mm [2.0 in.] to 60 mm [2.4 in.]. Make sure that all the holes are vertical and the depths of them are the same. Refer to Figure 4-10. Figure 4-10 Drilling a hole

Step 3 After drilling the holes, clean the dust inside and outside the holes.

4-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

Step 4 The depth of all the holes ranges from 52 mm [2.0 in.] to 60 mm [2.4 in.]; otherwise, adjust the depth with the percussion drill. Then remove the dust inside and outside the holes with a vacuum cleaner. Step 5 Measure the distance between the holes, and place the supports to check if the supports and holes match exactly. For the holes with big deviation, plan and drill new holes before installing expansion bolts. Step 6 Check the components of the expansion bolts. Figure 4-11 shows the appearance of the expansion bolt. Insert the guiding rib on the expansion nut into the guiding slot of the expansion tube, and then vertically put expansion bolts into the hole. Figure 4-11 Components of the expansion bolts
1 2 3

6 5

1. M12 bolt 5. Expansion nut

2. Spring washer 12 6. Guiding slot

3. Flat washer 12 7. Guiding rib

4. Expansion tube

Step 7 Use a claw hammer to strike the expansion tube into the hole completely. Refer to Figure 4-12. Note that the expansion bolts are flush with the floor.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-13

4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 4-12 Installation of the expansion tube and the expansion nut (1)

Step 8 Use a spanner to unscrew the expansion bolt, spring washer, and flat washer. Refer to Figure 4-13. Figure 4-13 Installation of the expansion tube and the expansion nut (2)

Step 9 Check whether the top of the expansion tube is flush with the floor. Refer to Figure 4-14.
4-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

Note if the expansion tube is not flush with the flooruse a claw hammer to strike the expansion tube into the hole completely. Figure 4-14 Installed expansion bolts

----End

4.5 Installing Supports


This describes how to fix and adjust the support.

Prerequisite
l l

Make sure that the support and guide rail are available. Make sure that the bolt M12x30, nut M12, bolt M12x60, spring washer 12, flat washer 12, and big flat washer are available. Make sure that the torque spanner, tape, and spanner are available.

Procedure
Step 1 Adjust the support. 1. 2. 3. Measure the height between the cement floor and the top of the ESD-preventive floor. Adjust the support to make the support reading be the same as the measured height. Fasten the height-locking bolts in the middle, and then fasten the height-locking bolts at two sides with a torque spanner. The torque spanner is set to 45 Nm. Refer to Figure 4-15.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-15

4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 4-15 Adjusting the support


7

1 2 3 4

1. Upper support

2. Lower support

3. Height mark of the ESDpreventive floor 6. Mounting hole to the floor

4. Height-locking bolt (middle) 5. Height-locking bolt (at two sides) 7. Connection hole to guide rail

Step 2 Install guide rails. 1. Assemble the support and the guide rail with the bolt M12x30, spring washer, and flat washer. Adjust the support to make the diagonal lines A and B of the two guide rails are equal in length. Refer to Figure 4-16.

4-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

Figure 4-16 Assembling supports and guide rails


1 2 B A

5 4

1. Guide rail 4. Spring washer 12

2. Support 5. Flat washer 12

3. M12x30 bolt

2.

Fasten all bolts with a spanner.

Step 3 Fix supports.

CAUTION
Install all the supports before installing a row of cabinets. 1. Align the support installation holes with the mapping expansion bolt holes. Align all supports by front side and keep the spacing between adjacent supports as 128 mm [5.0 in.] for convenience of combining cabinets. Refer to Figure 4-17. If the installation holes and the expansion bolt hole are not in the same line, readjust the installation holes.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-17

4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 4-17 Positions of supports

128 128

2. 3. 4.

Fit the spring washers and flat washers on bolts M12x30. Insert the bolts vertically into the expansion bolt holes through the support installation holes. Screw bolts M12x30 to 45 Nm with the torque spanner. Refer to Figure 4-18. Figure 4-18 Fixing supports
1

2 3 4

1. Spirit level 4. Big flat washer

2. M12x30 bolt 5. Leveling washer

3. Spring washer 12

4-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

Step 4 Level supports.

CAUTION
l

Positioning supports is the basic work for hardware installation. Accurate positioning is the prerequisite to guarantee the quality of the overall installation. Inaccurate positioning causes inconvenience for subsequent installation. Check the horizontal level of the supports after installing the supports for a row of cabinets. The washer for leveling the supports must be installed between the support and the floor. The horizontal deviation must be less than 5 mm [0.19 in.]. Check whether the guide rails in the front and at the back of the supports are horizontal by performing the following steps.
l l l

l l l

1.

Place the spirit level along the guide rails. Place the spirit level vertically on the guide rails. Place the spirit level in a cross manner.

Refer to Figure 4-18. 2. Check the horizontal level of the supports. If the horizontal deviation is greater than 5 mm [0.19 in.], loosen the expansion bolts with a torque spanner. Then, insert washers between the supports and the floor to keep the cabinet horizontal. The holder fixing components must be fixed under the guide rails. Install one holder fixing component under the front and back guide rail respectively. Refer to Figure 4-19.

Step 5 Install holder fixing components on the ESD-preventive floor. 1.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-19

4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 4-19 Installing the holder fixing components

1 2

3 5 1

1. M12x30 bolt

2. Spring washer 12

3. Flat washer 12

4. Fixing component for front floor holder 5. Fixing component for side floor holder

2.

Fasten all bolts with a spanner.

----End

Postrequisite
After installing the supports, fix the cabinet.

4.6 Installing Cabinets on the ESD-Preventive Floor


This describes how to fix the cabinets on supports and level them.

Prerequisite
l l

Make sure that the cabinets are available. Make sure that the insulating plate, M12 bolt, M12 nut, spring washer 12, and flat washer 12 are available.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

4-20

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide


l

4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

Make sure that the carrying cart, spirit level, torque spanner, and crosshead screwdriver are available.

Context

CAUTION
To ensure that the whole set of equipment is insulated from the ground before protection grounding cables are connected, the following requirements must be met: The insulating plates between each cabinet and the guide rail are installed. The insulation tubes for fixing holes on the lower enclosure frame of the cabinet are installed.

Procedure
Step 1 Fix cabinets. 1. 2. Determine the front side of the cabinet. Place the cabinet on the guide rails. Align the four fixing holes on the cabinet with the corresponding holes on the guide rails. Take off the plastic coverings on the fixing holes of the lower enclosure frame of the cabinet. Align the four fixing holes on the cabinet with the corresponding holes on the guide rails. Refer to Figure 4-20.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-21

4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 4-20 Disassembling plastic coverings

3.

Lift one side of the cabinet and place one insulating plate on each guide rail. Align the holes on insulating plate with the corresponding expansion bolt holes. Two insulating plates are used for each cabinet (one for the front and one for the back of the cabinet). Refer to Figure 4-21.

4-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

Figure 4-21 Fixing cabinets

1 2

3 4

5 6 7 8

1. M12 bolt 5. Insulating plate

2. Spring washer 12 6. Leveling washer

3. Big flat washer 7. Flat washer 12

4. Insulation covering 8. Nut 12

4. 5. 6.

Fix the spring washers on M12x45 bolts. The plain washer and insulation coverings are already installed in the cabinet. Insert the expansion bolt vertically into the connecting hole of the guide rail through the lower enclosure frame of the cabinet. Fix the flat washer and nut. Fasten the bolts to 45 Nm. Fasten the bolts alternately to reduce stress between the bolts and the cabinet.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4-23

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Step 2 Level cabinets.

CAUTION
l

Leveling cabinets is fundamental to ensuring the quality of the whole hardware installation. Inaccuracy causes inconvenience of subsequent installation. When a row of cabinets are installed, install the first cabinet and level it horizontally and vertically. Then, install other cabinets without leveling them. After installing all cabinets, combine and level them. In leveling cabinets, washers must be inserted between the insulating plate and the floor. Do not insert them between the insulating plate and cabinet. Otherwise, the insulation fails. The horizontal deviation must be less than 5 mm [0.19 in.], and the vertical deviation must be less than 3 mm [0.11 in.]. Place a spirit level on the door lintel on the top of the cabinet to check the horizontal level of the cabinet. Refer to Figure 4-22. If the horizontal deviation is greater than 5 mm [0.19 in.], loosen the expansion bolts with a torque spanner. Then, insert washers between the insulating plate and the support to keep the cabinet horizontal. Figure 4-22 Leveling cabinets (1)

1.

2.

Place a spirit level on the side panel of the cabinet to check the vertical level of the cabinet. Refer to Figure 4-23. If the vertical deviation is greater than 3 mm [0.11 in.], adjust the washers between the insulating plates and the floor to keep the cabinet vertical.

4-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

Figure 4-23 Leveling cabinets (2)

3.

Check whether the horizontal and vertical deviations are within the specified range with a spirit level. If not, adjust the washer. Then, fasten the expansion bolt to 45 Nm with a torque spanner. Set the multimeter to megohm range. Connect one probe of the multimeter to the expansion bolt and the other to the grounding bolt of a cabinet to measure the impedance between them. Refer to Figure 4-24.

Step 3 Test the insulation between expansion bolts and cabinets. 1. 2.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-25

4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 4-24 Testing the insulation

CAUTION
If the measured resistance is less than five mega ohms, remove all components, check if any insulation part is damaged or not installed. Ensure that all the insulation parts are properly installed. Fix the cabinet and measure the resistance again. 3. Insert the plastic covering to the mounting hole of the lower enclosure frame. Refer to Figure 4-25.

4-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

Figure 4-25 Installing plastic coverings

----End

4.7 Attaching the Cabinets


This describes how to attach the cabinets. When installing two or more cabinets side by side, connect them by using connecting plates. The connecting plates for combined cabinets are located at the top of the cabinet and delivered with the cabinet.

Context

CAUTION
l

When the cabinets are combined with a DC power distribution cabinet, install the side panels of the DC power distribution cabinet first, and then install other cabinets. Note that the side panels of the DC power distribution cabinet connected with other cabinets must be installed. When a row of cabinets are combined, the side panels of the cabinets in the middle are not installed and only the side panels of the cabinets on both ends are installed. Install the side panel first, and then lay out the cables for installation.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the connecting plates on the top of the cabinets are complete. Refer to Figure 4-26.
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4-27

4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 4-26 Connecting plates between cabinets

1. Connecting plate for combining cabinets

Step 2 Disassemble the connecting plates, and then reassemble them according to Figure 4-27. If multiple H66-22 cabinets are installed in back-to-back way, refer to Figure 4-28. Figure 4-27 Installing connecting plates for combined cabinets
1 3

4-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

Figure 4-28 Installing connecting plates for multiple H66-22 cabinets in back-to-back way
1 2

Step 3 Check whether the horizontal and vertical deviations of a row of cabinets are within the specified range with a spirit level. Check whether the cabinets in rows are placed in a close and neat way. If the deviation exceeds the specified range, adjust the cabinets again. ----End

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-29

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

5 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESD-Preventive Floor

About This Chapter


This describes how to install the normalized N66-22 cabinets on the ESD-preventive floor.

Prerequisite
Make sure that the following preparations are completed before installing the cabinet.
l l

Ensure that the ESD-Preventive floor is clean. Room illumination meets the requirements for installation.

Context
Figure 5-1 shows the procedure for installing cabinets on the ESD-preventive floor.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-1

5 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 5-1 Installation procedure


Start

Position cabinets

Position supports

Install supports

Install cabinets

Test the insulation

Pass? Yes If the cabinets need to be attached? Yes Combine cabinets

No

No

End

Figure 5-2 shows a single cabinet installed on an ESD-Preventive floor.

5-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

5 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

Figure 5-2 A single cabinet installed on an ESD-Preventive floor

Figure 5-3 shows several cabinets installed on an ESD-Preventive floor. Figure 5-3 Several cabinets installed on an ESD-Preventive floor

After installing the cabinet, clean the installation site.


l l l

Sort out the tools and put the tools to the specific positions. Clear the waste to keep the room tidy and clean. Collect the materials left over and send them back to the customer after the project is completed.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-3

5 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Postrequisite
After installing the cabinet on the ESD-preventive floor, you can connect the protection ground (PGND) cables and power cables for the cabinet. 5.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions Read this part carefully before installing the cabinets. Familiarize the installation specifications and precautions to avoid reconstructing and damage or injury. 5.2 Removing Package Accessories This describes how to remove the package before installing the cabinets. The delivered cabinets are covered with wooden package. 5.3 Positioning Supports Positioning supports refers to determining the position to install the supports on the floor. Positioning supports is the basic work for hardware installation. Accurate positioning is the prerequisite to guarantee the quality of the overall installation. Inaccurate positioning causes inconvenience for subsequent installation. 5.4 Installing Expansion Bolts To fix the cabinet and the support on the floor, install the expansion bolts on the floor of the equipment room. 5.5 Installing Supports This describes how to fix and adjust the support. 5.6 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESD-Preventive Floor This describes how to fix the normalized N66-22 cabinet on the N6X support, level the normalized N66-22 cabinet, and perform insulation tests. 5.7 Attaching the Cabinets This describes how to attach the cabinets. When installing two or more cabinets side by side, connect them by using connecting plates. The connecting plates for combined cabinets are located at the top of the cabinet and delivered with the cabinet.

5-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

5 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

5.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions


Read this part carefully before installing the cabinets. Familiarize the installation specifications and precautions to avoid reconstructing and damage or injury.

Installation Specifications
l

Each row of cabinets along the main walkway must be straight. The vertical error cannot exceed 3 mm [0.11 in.]. Each column of racks must be close and the rack surfaces are in the same line. Wear clean gloves when touching the surfaces of cabinets or frames.
NOTE

l l

The cabinets without the front, back doors and the side panels are called racks.

Precautions
l

Before installing cabinets, ensure that the related installation tasks performed above the cabinet (such as cabling rack installation and cable layout) are completed. Therefore, the dust and metal scraps do not drop into the cabinets from above during installation. This eliminates the hidden risks in the normal running of the equipment. During installation, keep the surface of the cabinet from being scratched.

5.2 Removing Package Accessories


This describes how to remove the package before installing the cabinets. The delivered cabinets are covered with wooden package.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the four wooden packing accessories from the right and left of the rack respectively. Refer to Figure 5-4.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-5

5 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 5-4 Removing the packing accessories

Step 2 Pull down the hook pin at the upper part of the front and rear doors and then remove the front and rear doors. Refer to Figure 5-5. Figure 5-5 Removing the cabinet doors

5-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

5 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

Remove and place the cabinet doors on the floor and keep them unlock; otherwise, the lower latch will slide downwards and may bend and snap because of the weight of the doors. Refer to Figure 5-6. Figure 5-6 Placing the cabinet doors

----End
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-7

5 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Postrequisite
After removing the package accessories, you can position the supports.

5.3 Positioning Supports


Positioning supports refers to determining the position to install the supports on the floor. Positioning supports is the basic work for hardware installation. Accurate positioning is the prerequisite to guarantee the quality of the overall installation. Inaccurate positioning causes inconvenience for subsequent installation.

Prerequisite
l

Make sure that the required material is available. Make sure that the line drawing template and floor plan are available. Make sure that the tools such as spirit level, panel lifter, ink fountain, marking pen, are available.

Context
The normalized N66-22 cabinet is installed on the N6X normalized supports.

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the positions of supports according to the construction engineering drawings.

CAUTION
The recommended distance between the back door of the front-access cabinet and the wall or the obstacle is not less than 100 mm [4 in.]. Step 2 Move the ESD-preventive floor on installation site with a panel lifter. Step 3 Remove the supporting components of the ESD-preventive floor. Step 4 Clean the installation site. Step 5 Determine whether to draw lines with line drawing template. If ... Draw lines with line drawing template Draw lines without using line drawing template Step 6 Draw the line with the line drawing template. Then ... Go to Step 6. Go to Step 7.

5-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

5 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

CAUTION
l

The line drawing template is made from paper. Its shape is easy to be changed. Therefore, measure the template based on the construction engineering plan before using this template. If the shape of the line drawing template is changed, determine the positions of holes of expansion bolts with a spirit level. The half-circle gap on the template faces the front side of the cabinet. Determine the starting point of the front sides of the cabinets according to floor plan. Draw a baseline along the cabinet row based on the starting point. Place the line drawing template on the floor based on the cabinet layout. Figure 5-7 shows line drawing template. Figure 5-7 Line drawing template for installation on the ESD-preventive floor (unit: mm)

1. 2.

504 600 Installation hole

448 600

3. 4.

Mark the hole positions for four expansion bolts on the floor based on the template. Lay out the templates side by side and ensure that there is 600 mm [23.6 in.] between the center lines of two adjacent templates when combining cabinets. Use a marker pen to mark installation holes on the cement floor. Refer to Figure 5-8. Figure 5-8 Installing the side-by-side line drawing template for installation on the ESDpreventive floor (unit: mm)

600

5.

Go to Step 8.

Step 7 If the on-site conditions cannot meet the requirements for using the line drawing template, perform the following steps:
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-9

5 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

1. 2.

Determine the baseline (parallel to the front side of the cabinet) based on the floor plan. Specify the holes for fixing the supports on the ground. Refer to Figure 5-9, Figure 5-10 or Figure 5-11. Figure 5-9 Mounting holes of supports for a single cabinet (unit: mm)

Contour Line of Cabinets 504 Installation hole 600

448 600

Figure 5-10 Mounting holes of supports for multiple cabinets in a row (unit: mm)

The wall or Obstacles 600 Contour Line of Cabinets 504 600 Installation hole 448 600 448 600 448 600 600

5-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

5 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

Figure 5-11 Mounting holes of supports for back-to-back cabinets in two rows (unit: mm)

Installation hole 600

504 600 600

504 600 Contour Line of Cabinets 448 448 600

600

Step 8 After marking the reference lines, check the hole positions with a ruler. ----End

Postrequisite
After positioning the supports, you can install expansion bolts.

5.4 Installing Expansion Bolts


To fix the cabinet and the support on the floor, install the expansion bolts on the floor of the equipment room.

Prerequisite
l l

Make sure that the spare part is available. The expansion bolts M12x60 are required. Make sure that the tool is available. The percussion drills (bit 16), vacuum cleaners, glasses, dustproof coverings for electronic products, and claw hammer are required.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-11

5 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Context

CAUTION
l

When using the percussion drill, ensure that your eyes are at least 50 cm [19.7 in.] away from the drill bit. Keep the drill bit vertical to the ground during drilling, and hold the drill handle tightly with two hands to keep it straight and stable; otherwise, vibrations may damage the floor or make a tilted hole. Remove the dust with a vacuum cleaner when drilling. Before the expansion tube is driven into the ground, the guiding rib on the expansion nut must be inserted into the guiding slot on the expansion tube. After the expansion tube is driven into the ground, the top of the tube must be flush with the ground.

l l

Procedure
Step 1 If the floor surface is too hard or too smooth to settle the drill bit, use the chisel to punch a pit before drilling. Refer to Figure 5-12. Figure 5-12 Settling the drill bit

Step 2 Drill holes for the expansion bolts by using the percussion drill with bit 16. The depth of the holes must be 52 mm [2.0 in.] to 60 mm [2.4 in.]. Make sure that all the holes are vertical and the depths of them are the same. Clean the holes with a vacuum cleaner when drilling. Refer to Figure 5-13.

5-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

5 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

Figure 5-13 Drilling holes

90 52 mm-60 mm

Step 3 After drilling the holes, clean the dust inside and outside the holes. Step 4 The depth of all the holes ranges from 52 mm [2.0 in.] to 60 mm [2.4 in.]; otherwise, adjust the depth with the percussion drill. Then remove the dust inside and outside the holes with a vacuum cleaner. Step 5 Measure the distance between the holes, and place the supports to check if the supports and holes match exactly. For the holes with big deviation, plan and drill new holes before installing expansion bolts. Step 6 Check the components of the expansion bolts. Figure 5-14 shows the appearance of the expansion bolt. Insert the guiding rib on the expansion nut into the guiding slot of the expansion tube, and then fasten the expansion bolt clockwise slightly until the guiding rib cannot fall out of the guiding slot. Then vertically put expansion bolts into the hole.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-13

5 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 5-14 Components of the expansion bolts


1 2 3

6 5

1. M12x60 bolt 5. Expansion nut

2. Spring washer 12 6. Guiding slot

3. Flat washer 12 7. Guiding rib

4. Expansion tube

Step 7 Use a claw hammer to strike the expansion tube into the hole completely. Refer to Figure 5-15. Note that the expansion bolts are flush with the floor. Figure 5-15 Installing the expansion tube

Step 8 Fasten the expansion bolt clockwise slightly until the nut cannot fall out of the bolt. Refer to 1 in Figure 5-16. Turn the bolt counterclockwise, remove it and take off the spring washer and flat washer. Refer to 2 in Figure 5-16.
5-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

5 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

Figure 5-16 Unscrewing the bolt and accessories

Step 9 Check whether the top of the expansion tube is flush with the floor. Refer to Figure 5-17. Note if the expansion tube is not flush with the flooruse a claw hammer to strike the expansion tube into the hole completely. Figure 5-17 Installed expansion bolts

----End

5.5 Installing Supports


This describes how to fix and adjust the support.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-15

5 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Prerequisite
l l

Make sure that the support and guide rail, are available. Make sure that the bolt M12x30, nut M12, bolt M12x60, spring washer 12, flat washer 12, and big flat washer are available. Make sure that the torque spanner, tape, and spanner are available.

Context
When the normalized N66-22 cabinet is installed on the ESD-preventive floor, the N6X normalized supports must be used.

Procedure
Step 1 Tighten the six M8x20 assembly screws. Refer to Figure 5-18. Figure 5-18 Tightening the assembly screws

2 3

1. M8x20 combination screw

2. Height-locking bolt (side)

3. Height-locking bolt (middle)

Step 2 Adjust the height of the support. 1. 2.


5-16

Measure the height between the cement floor and the top of the ESD-preventive floor. Adjust the support to make the support reading be the same as the measured height.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

5 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

3.

Fasten the height-locking bolts in the middle, and then fasten the height-locking bolts at two sides with a torque spanner. The torque spanner is set to 45 Nm. Figure 5-18 shows the height-locking bolt. Place the slide rails on the support. Align the installation holes of the slide rail with the holes of the support. Assemble the support with the slide rail by using M12x30 bolts, spring washers, and flat washers. Refer to Figure 5-19. Adjust the support location and ensure that the diagonal lines of the two slide rails are equal in length. The deviation should be less than 2 mm. Use a combination spanner to screw all bolts. Figure 5-19 Installing slide rails
2 3 4 5

Step 3 Install guide rails. 1. 2. 3. 4.

1. Support 4. Spring washer

2. Slide rail 5. Flat washer

3. M12x30 bolt

Step 4 Level and fix the supports of a single cabinet. 1. Align the installation holes of the support with the holes on the floor. Fix the spring washer and flat washer on the M12x60 bolt. Refer to Figure 5-20.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-17

5 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 5-20 Level and fix the supports of a single cabinet


2

1 9 3 4 5 6

7 8

1. Support 4. Spring washer 7. Expansion tube

2. Slide rail 5. Flat washer 8. Expansion nut

3. M12x60 bolt 6. Leveling washer 9. Spirit level

2. 3.

Insert the bolt into the expansion bolt hole vertically through the installation hole of the support, and then adjust the support. Place the spirit level along the guide rails, vertically on the guide rails, and in a cross manner on the guide rails. Check the horizontal level of the supports. If the support is not horizontal, put pads under the support. Screw the four expansion bolts to 45 Nm with a torque spanner. Adjust supports before fixing them. Ensure that the front ends of the supports are in the same line. Put the insulation plates on the two adjacent slide rails. Align the semicircular gaps of the insulation plates with the holes of the two slide rails respectively and install the M12x35 bolts to fix the insulation plates. Follow the same steps to adjust the space between the supports by using the insulation plates. Figure 5-21 shows the appearance of the insulation plate. Figure 5-22 shows the positions of supports.

4. 1. 2.

Step 5 Level and fix the side-by-side supports.

5-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

5 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

Figure 5-21 Appearance of the insulation plate

1. Locating hole for supports of combined cabinets

2. Installation hole

Figure 5-22 Positions of supports

1. M12x35 bolt

2. Insulation plate

3. 4.

Check if the support is horizontal by using the spirit level. If the support is not horizontal, put pads under the support. Fix the supports with height-locking bolts. Then, remove the bolts and insulation boards. Keep them well because they are used when you fix cabinets.

----End

Postrequisite
After installing the supports, fix the cabinet.

5.6 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor


This describes how to fix the normalized N66-22 cabinet on the N6X support, level the normalized N66-22 cabinet, and perform insulation tests.
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-19

5 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Prerequisite
l l

Make sure that the cabinets are available. Make sure that the insulating plate, M12 bolt, M12 nut, spring washer 12, and flat washer 12 are available. Make sure that the carrying cart, spirit level, torque spanner, socket spanner, and crosshead screwdriver are available.

Context

CAUTION
To ensure that the whole set of equipment is insulated from the ground before protection grounding cables are connected, the following requirements must be met: The insulating plates between each cabinet and the guide rail are installed. The insulation tubes for fixing holes on the lower enclosure frame of the cabinet are installed.

Procedure
Step 1 Fix cabinets. 1. Push the lock of the air filter. Lift up the air filter slightly and take it out of the slide rail from the bottom of the cabinet. Refer to Figure 5-23. Figure 5-23 Removing the Air Filter

5-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

5 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

2. 3.

Place the cabinet on the slide rails and align the installation holes of the cabinet with the holes of the slide rails. Fit the spring washer, flat washer, and insulation tube on the four M12x35 bolts. Insert them into the installation holes and tighten the bolts a bit, but do not fasten them. Refer to Figure 5-24. Figure 5-24 Placing the cabinet

1 2 3 4

1. Bolt 4. Insulation tube

2. Spring washer 5. Insulation plate

3. Flat washer

4.

Lift one side of the cabinet and put two insulation plates under each cabinet. Align the holes of the insulation plate with the holes of the slide rail.

Step 2 Level cabinets. 1. Place spirit levels at the bottom of the cabinet and in the front of the side columns to check whether the cabinet is horizontal. If not, adjust the adjusting anchor by using a socket spanner. Refer to Figure 5-25.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-21

5 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 5-25 Leveling the cabinet

1. M1235 bolt

2. Adjusting anchor

3. Spirit level

2.

When the cabinet is horizontal, fasten the four M12x35 bolts to 45 Nm with a torque spanner. Fasten the bolts alternately to reduce stress between the bolts and the cabinet. Set the multimeter to read mega ohms. Connect one probe of the multimeter to the expansion bolt and the other to the grounding bolt of a cabinet to measure the impedance between them. Refer to Figure 5-26.

Step 3 Test the insulation between expansion bolts and cabinets. 1. 2.

5-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

5 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

Figure 5-26 Testing the insulation of the cabinet

CAUTION
If the measured resistance is less than five mega ohms, remove all components, check if any insulation part is damaged or not installed. Ensure that all the insulation parts are properly installed. Fix the cabinet and measure the resistance again. 3. Put the air filter back along the slide rail at the bottom of the cabinet, and then press down the air filter to the lock. Refer to Figure 5-27.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-23

5 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 5-27 Restoring the Air Filter

----End

5.7 Attaching the Cabinets


This describes how to attach the cabinets. When installing two or more cabinets side by side, connect them by using connecting plates. The connecting plates for combined cabinets are located at the top of the cabinet and delivered with the cabinet.

Context

CAUTION
l

When a row of cabinets are combined, the side panels of the cabinets in the middle are not installed and only the side panels of the cabinets on both ends are installed. Both the gap between cabinets and the vertical shift should be less than 3 mm. The rear access cabinet can not be combined back to back.

l l

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the connecting plates on the top of the cabinets are complete.
5-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

5 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESDPreventive Floor

Step 2 Remove the connecting plates on the lintels of the front and rear doors and install them again as shown in Figure 5-28. Figure 5-28 Installing the connecting plates

Step 3 Use the spirit level to check and ensure that the bottom line of the cabinet is horizontal and the front line of the column is vertical. Place spirit levels at the bottom of the cabinets of a row and in the front of the side columns to check whether the horizontal and vertical errors are within the normal range (equal to or less than 3 mm) and whether supports in a row are well placed. If not, adjust the cabinets properly. Refer to Figure 5-29. Figure 5-29 Leveling the combined cabinets

----End

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-25

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

6 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

About This Chapter


This describes how to install the N66-22 and H66-22 cabinets on the cement floor.

Prerequisite
Before the installation, ensure that the following preparations are completed.
l l

The cement floor in the equipment room is clean. Room illumination meets the requirements for installation.

Context
Figure 6-1 shows the procedure for installing cabinets on the cement floor.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-1

6 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 6-1 Installation procedure


Start Removing package accessories Locating cabinets

Installing expansion bolts

Fixing cabinets on the cement floor

Testing the insulation

Pass? Yes

No

If the cabinets need to be attached?

No

Yes Attach the cabinets

End

Figure 6-2 shows the installed cabinet.

6-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

6 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

Figure 6-2 Installed cabinets

After installing the cabinet, clean the installation site.


l l l

Sort out the tools and put the tools to the specific positions. Clear the waste to keep the room tidy and clean. Collect the materials left over and send them back to the customer after the project is completed.

Postrequisite
After installing the cabinet on the cement floor, proceed with 8 Connecting PGND cables and power cables for cabinets. 6.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions Read this part carefully before installing the cabinets. Familiarizing with the installation specifications and precautions can avoid reconstructing and damage to devices and injury to human bodies. 6.2 Removing Package Accessories This describes how to remove the package before installing the cabinets. The delivered cabinets are covered with wooden package. 6.3 Positioning Cabinets Positioning cabinets refers to determining the position to install the cabinets on the floor. Positioning cabinets is fundamental in ensuring the quality of the whole hardware installation. Inaccuracy causes inconvenience in subsequent installation. 6.4 Installing Expansion Bolts To fix the cabinet and the support on the floor, install the expansion bolts on the floor of the equipment room. 6.5 Fixing Cabinets on the Cement Floor This describes how to fix the cabinets on the cement floor and level them. 6.6 Attaching the Cabinets
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-3

6 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

This describes how to attach the cabinets. When installing two or more cabinets side by side, connect them by using connecting plates. The connecting plates for combined cabinets are located at the top of the cabinet and delivered with the cabinet.

6-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

6 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

6.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions


Read this part carefully before installing the cabinets. Familiarizing with the installation specifications and precautions can avoid reconstructing and damage to devices and injury to human bodies.

Installation Specifications
l

Each row of racks along the main walkway must be straight. The vertical error cannot exceed 3 mm [0.1 in.]. Each column of racks must be close and the rack surfaces are in the same line. Wear gloves when touching the surfaces of cabinets or frames.
NOTE

l l

The cabinets without the front, back and the side panels are called racks.

Precautions
l

Before installing cabinets, ensure that the related installation tasks performed above the cabinet (such as cabling rack installation and cable layout) are completed. Therefore, the dust and metal scraps do not drop into the cabinet from above during installation. This eliminates the hidden risks in the normal running of the equipment. During installation, keep the surface of the cabinet from being scratched.

6.2 Removing Package Accessories


This describes how to remove the package before installing the cabinets. The delivered cabinets are covered with wooden package.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the screws on the package accessories with a crosshead screwdriver. Step 2 Remove all the screws on the package board, and then remove the package board. Step 3 Remove the screws on the package accessories with a crosshead screwdriver. Step 4 Put away the removed package accessories in a cardboard box. ----End

Postrequisite
After removing the package accessories, you can position the supports.

6.3 Positioning Cabinets


Positioning cabinets refers to determining the position to install the cabinets on the floor. Positioning cabinets is fundamental in ensuring the quality of the whole hardware installation. Inaccuracy causes inconvenience in subsequent installation.
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-5

6 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Prerequisite
l l

Make sure that line drawing template and floor plan are available. Make sure that the tools such as spirit level, ink fountain, and marking pen, are available.

Context

CAUTION
Determine the installation position for the cabinets based on the construction plan. Keep at least 800-mm [3.1 in.] space in the front and back of a cabinet for convenient maintenance and operation.

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the positions of cabinets according to the construction engineering drawings.

CAUTION
l

The distance between the front sides of two rows of cabinets is not less than 1800 mm [5.9 ft.]. The side of the cabinet that is closest to the wall is at least 800 mm [2.6 ft.] away from the wall. For a front-access H66-22 cabinet, the back sides of the cabinets that are closest to the wall are at least 50 mm [1.9 in.] away from the wall. The front sides are at least 800 mm [2.6 ft.] away from the wall. For rear-access N66-22 cabinets, the front sides and the back sides of the cabinets that are closest to the wall are at least 800 mm [2.6 ft.] away from the wall. The equipment room must have the path that is 1000 mm [3.3 ft.] wide.

Step 2 Determine whether to draw lines with the line drawing template. If ... Draw lines with line drawing template Draw lines without using line drawing template Step 3 Use the line drawing template. Then ... Go to Step 3. Go to Step 4.

6-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

6 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

CAUTION
l

The line drawing template is made from paper. Its shape is easy to be changed. Therefore, measure the template according to the construction plan before using this template. If the shape of the line drawing template is changed, locate the positions of the expansion bolts with a spirit level. The half-circle gap on the template faces the front side of the cabinet. Determine the starting point of the front sides of the cabinets according to floor plan. Draw a baseline along the cabinet row based on the starting point. Place the line drawing template on the floor according to the cabinet layout. Refer to Figure 6-3. Figure 6-3 Line drawing template (unit: mm)

1. 2.

460

600

380 600

3.

Mark the hole positions for four expansion bolts on the floor based on the template. Then, mark the hole positions of all expansion bolts. Figure 6-4 shows the positions of all expansion bolts.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-7

6 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 6-4 Picture of line drawing template

4.

Go to Step 5.

Step 4 If the on-site conditions cannot meet the requirements for using the line drawing template, perform the following steps: 1. 2. Determine the baseline (parallel to the front side of the cabinet) based on the floor plan. Choose the proper cabinet model.
l

Draw the positions of supports and fixing holes for the N66-22 cabinets based on Figure 6-5 or Figure 6-6. Figure 6-5 Hole positions for installing a single cabinet (unit: mm)

800 800

4 - 16

460

600

380 800 600 800

6-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

6 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

Figure 6-6 Hole positions for installing cabinets in a row (unit: mm)

800 800

4 - 16

460 600

380 800 600

380 600

380 600 800

Draw the positions of supports and fixing holes for the H66-22 cabinets based on Figure 6-7, Figure 6-8, or Figure 6-9. Figure 6-7 Hole positions for installing a single cabinet (unit: mm)

800 800

4 - 16

460

600

380 800 600 800

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-9

6 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 6-8 Hole positions for installing cabinets in a row (unit: mm)

50 4 - 16 460 600

380 800 600

380 600

380 600 800 800

Figure 6-9 Hole positions for installing back-to-back cabinets in a row (unit: mm)

800

800 460 600 140 460 600

4 - 16

380 800 600

380 600

380 600 800

Step 5 Check the position marks carefully to ensure accuracy. ----End

Postrequisite
After positioning the cabinets, you can install expansion bolts.
6-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

6 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

6.4 Installing Expansion Bolts


To fix the cabinet and the support on the floor, install the expansion bolts on the floor of the equipment room.

Prerequisite
l l

Make sure that the spare part is available. The expansion bolts M12x30 are required. Make sure that the tool is available. The percussion drills (bit 14, bit 16), vacuum cleaners, glasses, dustproof coverings for electronic products, and rubber hammers are required.

Context

CAUTION
l

When using the percussion drill, ensure that your eyes are at least 50 cm [19.7 in.] away from the drill bit. Keep the drill bit vertical to the ground during drilling, and hold the drill handle tightly with two hands to keep it straight and stable; otherwise, vibrations may damage the floor or make a tilted hole. Remove the dust with a vacuum cleaner when drilling. Before the expansion tube is driven into the ground, the guiding rib on the expansion nut must be inserted into the guiding slot on the expansion tube. After the expansion tube is driven into the ground, the top of the tube must be flush with the ground.

l l

Procedure
Step 1 If the ground is too hard or smooth to settle the drill bit, punch a sample pit first for easy drilling. Refer to Figure 6-10.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-11

6 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 6-10 Method for drilling a hole

Step 2 Drill holes for the expansion bolts by using the percussion drill with bit 16. The depth of the holes must be 52 mm [2.0 in.] to 60 mm [2.4 in.]. Make sure that all the holes are vertical and the depths of them are the same. Refer to Figure 6-11. Figure 6-11 Drilling a hole

Step 3 After drilling the holes, clean the dust inside and outside the holes.

6-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

6 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

Step 4 The depth of all the holes ranges from 52 mm [2.0 in.] to 60 mm [2.4 in.]; otherwise, adjust the depth with the percussion drill. Then remove the dust inside and outside the holes with a vacuum cleaner. Step 5 Measure the distance between the holes, and place the supports to check if the supports and holes match exactly. For the holes with big deviation, plan and drill new holes before installing expansion bolts. Step 6 Check the components of the expansion bolts. Figure 6-12 shows the appearance of the expansion bolt. Insert the guiding rib on the expansion nut into the guiding slot of the expansion tube, and then vertically put expansion bolts into the hole. Figure 6-12 Components of the expansion bolts
1 2 3

6 5

1. M12 bolt 5. Expansion nut

2. Spring washer 12 6. Guiding slot

3. Flat washer 12 7. Guiding rib

4. Expansion tube

Step 7 Use a claw hammer to strike the expansion tube into the hole completely. Refer to Figure 6-13. Note that the expansion bolts are flush with the floor.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-13

6 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 6-13 Installation of the expansion tube and the expansion nut (1)

Step 8 Use a spanner to unscrew the expansion bolt, spring washer, and flat washer. Refer to Figure 6-14. Figure 6-14 Installation of the expansion tube and the expansion nut (2)

Step 9 Check whether the top of the expansion tube is flush with the floor. Refer to Figure 6-15.
6-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

6 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

Note if the expansion tube is not flush with the flooruse a claw hammer to strike the expansion tube into the hole completely. Figure 6-15 Installed expansion bolts

----End

6.5 Fixing Cabinets on the Cement Floor


This describes how to fix the cabinets on the cement floor and level them.

Prerequisite
l l

Make sure that the cabinets are available. Make sure that the insulating plate, M12 bolt, M12 nut, spring washer 12, and flat washer 12 are available. Make sure that the carrying cart, spirit level, torque spanner, and crosshead screwdriver are available.

Context

CAUTION
To ensure that the whole set of equipment is insulated from the ground before protection grounding cables are connected, the following requirements must be met: The insulating plates between each cabinet and the guide rail are installed. The insulation tubes for fixing holes on the lower enclosure frame of the cabinet are installed.

Procedure
Step 1 Fix cabinets. 1. 2. Determine the front side of the cabinet. Place the cabinet on the guide rails. Align the four amounting holes at the bottom of the cabinet with the holes of the guide rail. Take off the plastic coverings on the amounting holes of the lower enclosure frame of the cabinet. Refer to Figure 6-16.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-15

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

6 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 6-16 Disassembling plastic coverings

3.

Lift one side of the cabinet and lay out one insulating plate. Align the amounting holes of the insulating plate with the holes of corresponding expansion bolts. Two insulating plates are used for each cabinet (one for the front and the other one for the back of the cabinet). Refer to Figure 6-17.

6-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

6 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

Figure 6-17 Fixing cabinets on the cement floor

1 2 3 4

5 6

1. M12x60 bolt 4. Insulation covering

2. Spring washer 12 5. Insulating plate

3. Plain washer 6. Leveling washer

4. 5. 6.

Fix the spring washers on M12x45 bolts. The big plain washers and insulation coverings are already installed in the cabinet. Insert the expansion bolts vertically into the expansion bolt holes through the lower enclosure frame of the cabinet. Fasten the bolts to 45 Nm. Fasten the bolts alternately to reduce stress between the bolts and cabinets.

Step 2 Level cabinets.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-17

6 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

CAUTION
l

Leveling cabinets is fundamental in ensuring the quality of the whole hardware installation. Inaccuracy causes inconvenience in subsequent installation. When a row of cabinets are installed, install the first cabinet and level it horizontally and vertically. Then install other cabinets without leveling them. After all cabinets are installed, combine and level them. The washers must be inserted between the insulating plate and the floor. Do not insert them between the insulating plate and cabinet. Otherwise, the insulation fails. The horizontal deviation of the supports must be less than 5 mm [0.19 in.], and the vertical deviation must be less than 3 mm [0.11 in.]. Place a spirit level on the door lintel on the top of the cabinet to check the horizontal level of the cabinet. Refer to Figure 6-18. If the horizontal deviation is greater than 5 mm [0.19 in.], loosen the expansion bolts with a torque spanner. Then, insert washers between the insulating plate and the supports to keep the cabinet horizontal. Figure 6-18 Leveling cabinets (1)

1.

2.

Place a spirit level on the side panel of the cabinet to check the vertical level of the cabinet. Refer to Figure 6-19. If the vertical deviation is greater than 3 mm [0.11 in.], adjust the washers between the insulating plates and the floor to keep the cabinet vertical.

6-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

6 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

Figure 6-19 Leveling cabinets (2)

3.

Check whether the horizontal and vertical deviations are within the specified range with a spirit level. If not, adjust the washer. Then, fasten the expansion bolts to 45 Nm with a torque spanner. Set the multimeter to megohm range. Connect one probe of the multimeter to the expansion bolt and the other to the grounding bolt of a cabinet to measure the impedance between them. Refer to Figure 6-20.

Step 3 Test the insulation between expansion bolts and cabinets. 1. 2.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-19

6 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 6-20 Testing the insulation

CAUTION
If the measured resistance is less than five mega ohms, remove all components, check if any insulation part is damaged or not installed. Ensure that all the insulation parts are properly installed. Fix the cabinet and measure the resistance again. 3. Insert the plastic covering to the mounting hole of the lower enclosure frame. Refer to Figure 6-21.

6-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

6 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

Figure 6-21 Installing plastic coverings

----End

Postrequisite
The installation of cabinet on the cement floor is completed. After installing the cabinet, proceed with 8 Connecting PGND cables and power cables for cabinets.

6.6 Attaching the Cabinets


This describes how to attach the cabinets. When installing two or more cabinets side by side, connect them by using connecting plates. The connecting plates for combined cabinets are located at the top of the cabinet and delivered with the cabinet.

Context

CAUTION
l

When the cabinets are combined with a DC power distribution cabinet, install the side panels of the DC power distribution cabinet first, and then install other cabinets. Note that the side panels of the DC power distribution cabinet connected with other cabinets must be installed. When a row of cabinets are combined, the side panels of the cabinets in the middle are not installed and only the side panels of the cabinets on both ends are installed. Install the side panel first, and then lay out the cables for installation.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-21

6 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the connecting plates on the top of the cabinets are complete. Refer to Figure 6-22. Figure 6-22 Connecting plates between cabinets

1. Connecting plate for combining cabinets

Step 2 Disassemble the connecting plates, and then reassemble them according to Figure 6-23. If multiple H66-22 cabinets are installed in back-to-back way, refer to Figure 6-24.

6-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

6 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

Figure 6-23 Installing connecting plates for combined cabinets


1 3

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-23

6 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 6-24 Installing connecting plates for multiple H66-22 cabinets in back-to-back way
1 2

Step 3 Check whether the horizontal and vertical deviations of a row of cabinets are within the specified range with a spirit level. Check whether the cabinets in rows are placed in a close and neat way. If the deviation exceeds the specified range, adjust the cabinets again. ----End

6-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

7 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

About This Chapter


This describes how to install the normalized N66-22 cabinets on the cement floor.

Prerequisite
Before the installation, ensure that the following preparations are completed.
l l

The cement floor in the equipment room is clean. Room illumination meets the requirements for installation.

Context
Figure 7-1 shows the procedure for installing normalized N66-22 cabinets on the cement floor.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-1

7 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 7-1 Installation procedure


Start

Position cabinets

Install cabinets

Test the insulation

Pass? Yes If the cabinets need to be attached? Yes Combine cabinets

No

No

End

Figure 7-2 shows a single cabinet installed on a concrete floor.

7-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

7 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

Figure 7-2 A single cabinet installed on a concrete floor

Figure 7-3 shows several cabinets installed on a concrete floor.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-3

7 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 7-3 Several cabinets installed on a concrete floor

After installing the cabinet, clean the installation site.


l l l

Sort out the tools and put the tools to the specific positions. Clear the waste to keep the room tidy and clean. Collect the materials left over and send them back to the customer after the project is completed.

Postrequisite
After installing the cabinet on the cement floor, proceed with 8 Connecting PGND cables and power cables for cabinets. 7.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions Read this part carefully before installing the cabinets. Familiarizing with the installation specifications and precautions can avoid reconstructing and damage to devices and injury to human bodies. 7.2 Removing the Grounding Cables and Cabinet Doors The front and back doors are delivered with the cabinet. Before installing the cabinet, remove the front and back doors for future use. 7.3 Installing Expansion Bolts To fix the cabinet and the support on the floor, install the expansion bolts on the floor of the equipment room. 7.4 Attaching the Cabinets
7-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

7 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

This describes how to attach the cabinets. When installing two or more cabinets side by side, connect them by using connecting plates. The connecting plates for combined cabinets are located at the top of the cabinet and delivered with the cabinet.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-5

7 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

7.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions


Read this part carefully before installing the cabinets. Familiarizing with the installation specifications and precautions can avoid reconstructing and damage to devices and injury to human bodies.

Installation Specifications
l

Each row of racks along the main walkway must be straight. The vertical error cannot exceed 3 mm [0.1 in.]. Each column of racks must be close and the rack surfaces are in the same line. Wear gloves when touching the surfaces of cabinets or frames.
NOTE

l l

The cabinets without the front, back and the side panels are called racks.

Precautions
l

Before installing cabinets, ensure that the related installation tasks performed above the cabinet (such as cabling rack installation and cable layout) are completed. Therefore, the dust and metal scraps do not drop into the cabinet from above during installation. This eliminates the hidden risks in the normal running of the equipment. During installation, keep the surface of the cabinet from being scratched.

7.2 Removing the Grounding Cables and Cabinet Doors


The front and back doors are delivered with the cabinet. Before installing the cabinet, remove the front and back doors for future use.

Context

CAUTION
l l

When cabinets are installed back to back, the rear doors are not to be removed. For the coming use, put away the front door, rear door, and side panels of the cabinet and bolts.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the grounding cables from the front door, rear door and side panel. One end of the grounding cable is connected with the cabinet door. Refer to Figure 7-4.

7-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

7 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

Figure 7-4 Removing the grounding cables

Step 2 Pull down the hook pin at the upper part of the door panel and remove the front door. Refer to Figure 7-5. Figure 7-5 Removing the doors of the rear access cabinet

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-7

7 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

NOTE

Follow the same steps to remove the rear door.

Step 3 Unscrew the eight M5x10 screws of the rear door. Refer to Figure 7-6. Figure 7-6 Removing the doors of the front access cabinet

Step 4 Unscrew the eight M6x12 screws on the side panel. Refer to Figure 7-7.

7-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

7 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

Figure 7-7 Removing the side panels

----End

Postrequisite
After removing the grounding cables and doors, you can position the supports.

7.3 Installing Expansion Bolts


To fix the cabinet and the support on the floor, install the expansion bolts on the floor of the equipment room.

Prerequisite
l l

Make sure that the spare part is available. The expansion bolts M12x60 are required. Make sure that the tool is available. The percussion drills (bit 16), vacuum cleaners, glasses, dustproof coverings for electronic products, and claw hammer are required.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-9

7 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Context

CAUTION
l

When using the percussion drill, ensure that your eyes are at least 50 cm [19.7 in.] away from the drill bit. Keep the drill bit vertical to the ground during drilling, and hold the drill handle tightly with two hands to keep it straight and stable; otherwise, vibrations may damage the floor or make a tilted hole. Remove the dust with a vacuum cleaner when drilling. Before the expansion tube is driven into the ground, the guiding rib on the expansion nut must be inserted into the guiding slot on the expansion tube. After the expansion tube is driven into the ground, the top of the tube must be flush with the ground.

l l

Procedure
Step 1 If the floor surface is too hard or too smooth to settle the drill bit, use the chisel to punch a pit before drilling. Refer to Figure 7-8. Figure 7-8 Settling the drill bit

Step 2 Drill holes for the expansion bolts by using the percussion drill with bit 16. The depth of the holes must be 52 mm [2.0 in.] to 60 mm [2.4 in.]. Make sure that all the holes are vertical and the depths of them are the same. Clean the holes with a vacuum cleaner when drilling. Refer to Figure 7-9.

7-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

7 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

Figure 7-9 Drilling holes

90 52 mm-60 mm

Step 3 After drilling the holes, clean the dust inside and outside the holes. Step 4 The depth of all the holes ranges from 52 mm [2.0 in.] to 60 mm [2.4 in.]; otherwise, adjust the depth with the percussion drill. Then remove the dust inside and outside the holes with a vacuum cleaner. Step 5 Measure the distance between the holes, and place the supports to check if the supports and holes match exactly. For the holes with big deviation, plan and drill new holes before installing expansion bolts. Step 6 Check the components of the expansion bolts. Figure 7-10 shows the appearance of the expansion bolt. Insert the guiding rib on the expansion nut into the guiding slot of the expansion tube, and then fasten the expansion bolt clockwise slightly until the guiding rib cannot fall out of the guiding slot. Then vertically put expansion bolts into the hole.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-11

7 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 7-10 Components of the expansion bolts


1 2 3

6 5

1. M12x60 bolt 5. Expansion nut

2. Spring washer 12 6. Guiding slot

3. Flat washer 12 7. Guiding rib

4. Expansion tube

Step 7 Use a claw hammer to strike the expansion tube into the hole completely. Refer to Figure 7-11. Note that the expansion bolts are flush with the floor. Figure 7-11 Installing the expansion tube

Step 8 Fasten the expansion bolt clockwise slightly until the nut cannot fall out of the bolt. Refer to 1 in Figure 7-12. Turn the bolt counterclockwise, remove it and take off the spring washer and flat washer. Refer to 2 in Figure 7-12.
7-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

7 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

Figure 7-12 Unscrewing the bolt and accessories

Step 9 Check whether the top of the expansion tube is flush with the floor. Refer to Figure 7-13. Note if the expansion tube is not flush with the flooruse a claw hammer to strike the expansion tube into the hole completely. Figure 7-13 Installed expansion bolts

----End

7.4 Attaching the Cabinets


This describes how to attach the cabinets. When installing two or more cabinets side by side, connect them by using connecting plates. The connecting plates for combined cabinets are located at the top of the cabinet and delivered with the cabinet.
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-13

7 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Context

CAUTION
l

When a row of cabinets are combined, the side panels of the cabinets in the middle are not installed and only the side panels of the cabinets on both ends are installed. Both the gap between cabinets and the vertical shift should be less than 3 mm. The rear access cabinet can not be combined back to back.

l l

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the connecting plates on the top of the cabinets are complete. Step 2 Remove the connecting plates on the lintels of the front and rear doors and install them again as shown in Figure 7-14. Figure 7-14 Installing the connecting plates

Step 3 Use the spirit level to check and ensure that the bottom line of the cabinet is horizontal and the front line of the column is vertical. Place spirit levels at the bottom of the cabinets of a row and in the front of the side columns to check whether the horizontal and vertical errors are within the normal range (equal to or less than 3 mm) and whether supports in a row are well placed. If not, adjust the cabinets properly. Refer to Figure 7-15.

7-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

7 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

Figure 7-15 Leveling the combined cabinets

----End

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-15

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

8 Connecting PGND cables and power cables for cabinets

Connecting PGND cables and power cables for cabinets

About This Chapter


This describes how to connect the protection ground (PGND) cables and power cables for cabinets.

Prerequisite
Before the installation, ensure that the following preparations are completed.
l l l

The cabinets are installed and checked. The routing diagram and cable mode comply with the engineering design. Tools required during installation are available.

Context
Figure 8-1 shows the procedure for connecting PGND cables and power cables. Figure 8-1 Connection procedure
Start

Connecting PGND cables and power cables between cabinets and DC power distribution cabinets

Connecting interconnected PGND cables between cabinets

End

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-1

8 Connecting PGND cables and power cables for cabinets

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Postrequisite
After connecting the PGND cables and power cables, proceed with 9 Installing Internal Components. 8.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions Read this part carefully before connecting the power cables and PGND cables for the cabinets. Familiarizing with the installation specifications and precautions can avoid reconstructing and damage to devices and injury to human bodies. 8.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables This describes the connection relationship of the power cables and protection ground (PGND) cables between the UMG8900 and the power distribution frame (PDF), and the connection relationship of the PGND cables between the cabinets. 8.3 Cabling Mode of Power Cables This describes the cabling mode of the power cables and the protection ground (PGND) cables between the UMG8900 and the power distribution frame (PDF). 8.4 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables Between Cabinets and DC Power Distribution Cabinets This describes how to connect the protection ground (PGND) cables, RTN cables, and 48 V power cables between the cabinets and DC power distribution cabinets. 8.5 Connecting Interconnected PGND Cables Between Cabinets This describes how to connect the protection ground (PGND) cables between or in the UMG8900 cabinets.

8-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

8 Connecting PGND cables and power cables for cabinets

8.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions


Read this part carefully before connecting the power cables and PGND cables for the cabinets. Familiarizing with the installation specifications and precautions can avoid reconstructing and damage to devices and injury to human bodies.

Installation Specifications
l l

Place the power cables and PGND cables away from other cables. Bind them separately. Ensure that the power cables and PGND cables are placed straightly and curved smoothly if necessary. Arrange the cables with different colors and bind them every 200 mm [7.9 in.]. After laying out the power cables and protection ground (PGND) cables, cut the rubber cover to match the size of the remaining space of the cabling hole. The PGND bar of the DC power distribution cabinet must be properly connected with the nearest PGND bar offered by the customer through the PGND bus cable. Before connecting power cables and PGND cables, measure the distance between the PGND bar and the DC power distribution cabinet, and that between the DC power distribution cabinet and connecting terminals of the PDF in the cabinet. Ensure that the cables are long enough to avoid shortage in actual wiring. If a cable is not long enough, replace it with a new one. Do not splice cables by making connectors or soldering. Before installation, mark or stick labels on both ends of each power cable and PGND cable to identify the device that the cable is connected to, and to ensure correct connection. Stick the labels 30 mm [1.2 in.] from the ends of the cables.

Precautions
l l l l

Ensure that all switches are off when installing the power cables and PGND cables. Replace broken power cables and PGND cables with new ones. Ensure that the power cables and the PGND cables do not have any connector. Cut the redundant parts of the PGND cables and the power cables. Do not twist them. It is not recommended to cut the redundant part of the power cable connecting to the lightening protection box. You can twist it if necessary. Do not expose the copper at the wiring terminals and lugs of the power cables and PGND cables in the air. Mount the wiring terminals properly. Perform insulation processing on all tools before power-on operation.

8.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables


This describes the connection relationship of the power cables and protection ground (PGND) cables between the UMG8900 and the power distribution frame (PDF), and the connection relationship of the PGND cables between the cabinets. Figure 8-2 shows the connection of power cables and PGND cables between the DC power distribution cabinet and the cabinets of the UMG8900.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-3

8 Connecting PGND cables and power cables for cabinets

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 8-2 Cable distribution in the DC power distribution cabinets and the cabinets of the UMG8900

2
-48V1 -48V2 -48V2 -48V1 BGND PGND -48V2 -48V1 BGND PGND -48V2 -48V1 BGND PGND

GND GND PGND

1. Connecting to DC distributor 3. Cabinets of the UMG8900

2. DC power distribution cabinet 4. PGND bar in the equipment room

8.3 Cabling Mode of Power Cables


This describes the cabling mode of the power cables and the protection ground (PGND) cables between the UMG8900 and the power distribution frame (PDF).

Cabling Mode on the UMG8900 Side


l

Overhead cabling mode Connect PGND cables, 48 V DC power cables and RTN working grounding cables (marked with BGND for earlier devices) to the terminals of the PDF through the cablethrough hole on the top of the cabinet.

Underfloor cabling mode In underfloor cabling mode, the power cables and the PGND cables are led into the cabinet through the cabling-through hole on the side of the side panel at the bottom of the cabinet. The cables are placed along the cabling troughs on the side columns. Then, the cables are led into the cabling-through hole on the top of the cabinet. After that, the arrangement of cables is the same as that in overhead cabling mode.

Cabling Mode on the Power Distribution Cabinet Side


l

Overhead cabling mode on the power distribution cabinet side Refer to Figure 8-3.

8-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

8 Connecting PGND cables and power cables for cabinets

Figure 8-3 Overhead cabling mode on the power distribution cabinet side

Underfloor cabling mode on the power distribution cabinet side Refer to Figure 8-4.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-5

8 Connecting PGND cables and power cables for cabinets

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 8-4 Underfloor cabling mode on the power distribution cabinet side

9 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 11 12 13

14 7 15

1. BGND output terminal block 4. BGND lead-in terminal block (underfloor cabling mode)

2. 48 V1 lead-in terminal block 3. 48 V 1 output terminal block 5. 48 V1 lead-in terminal block 6. 48 V 2 output terminal block

7. PGND output connecting terminal 8. PGND lead-in terminal block 9. 48 V 1 output terminal block 10. BGND output terminal block 13. BGND lead-in terminal block (underfloor cabling mode) 11. 48 V2 output terminal block 12. 48 V1 lead-in terminal block 14. 48 V2 lead-in terminal block 15. PGND output terminal

8-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

8 Connecting PGND cables and power cables for cabinets

8.4 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables Between Cabinets and DC Power Distribution Cabinets
This describes how to connect the protection ground (PGND) cables, RTN cables, and 48 V power cables between the cabinets and DC power distribution cabinets.

Prerequisite
l l l l

The switches of all power distribution boxes are set to OFF. Make sure that the PGND cables and power cables are available. Make sure that the cable ties and paraffin hemp ropes are available. Make sure that the diagonal pliers, hand hacksaw, wire clipper, spanner, and crosshead screwdriver are available.

Context
Fix the OT terminal at the DC distribution cabinet side. To fix the OT terminal firmly and to ensure secure contact, insert flat washers and spring washers. Refer to Figure 8-5. Figure 8-5 Connections of the OT terminals
1

4 3

1. Cable 4. Spring washer

2. Heat-shrinkable tube 5. Flat washer

3. Nut 6. Connection bolt

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-7

8 Connecting PGND cables and power cables for cabinets

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

When the DC power distribution cabinet is unavailable, the installation is as follows:


l

The power cables leading from the 48 V1 and 48 V2 wiring terminals are connected to the 48 V DC negative total line banks of the DC distributor and DC power. The power cables leading from the RTN (used to be BGND) wiring terminals are connected to the 48 V DC positive total line banks of the DC distributor and DC power. The PGND cables in the cabinets are laid in the same way as that when the DC power distribution cabinet is available.

CAUTION
l

If the cable is not long enough, replace it with a new one. Do not splice cables by connectors or soldering. Do not expose the naked wires and the OT terminal handles after the heat-shrinkable tube is fixed. Ensure that the air-breaker is off before connecting the power cable. When the underfloor cabling mode is used, lay out the cables at the side of the UMG8900.

l l

Procedure
Step 1 Measure the distance between the DC power distribution cabinet and the wiring terminals of the power distribution frame (PDF) of the cabinet. Reserve cables with proper length. Step 2 For details on assembling the OT terminal, see B.1 Assembling Power Cable Connectors. Step 3 Determine the position of the DC output wiring terminals in the DC power distribution cabinet. Figure 8-6 shows the wiring terminals in the power distribution cabinet. For details on the connection relationship, see the User Manual delivered with the power distribution cabinet.

8-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

8 Connecting PGND cables and power cables for cabinets

Figure 8-6 Wiring terminals in the power distribution cabinet

Right view

Rear view
1 5

Left view

6 7 2 9 5 9 6 5 3 7

1. GND lead-in wiring terminal 2. 48 V1 power lead-in wiring terminal 4. PGND lead-in wiring terminal 5. 48 V1 output wiring terminal 7. GND output wiring terminal 8. PGND output terminal

3. 48 V 2 power lead-in wiring terminal 6. 48 V2 output wiring terminal 9. GND lead-in wiring terminal for underfloor cabling

Step 4 Determine the cabling mode in the DC power distribution cabinet. Figure 8-7 and Figure 8-8 show the overhead cabling mode.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-9

8 Connecting PGND cables and power cables for cabinets

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 8-7 Overhead cabling of the DC power distribution cabinet (1)


3

1 6

1. 48 V2 power lead-in wiring terminal 4. PGND lead-in wiring terminal

2. 48 V2 power lead-in wiring terminal 5. 48 V1 power lead-in wiring terminal

3. BGND lead-in wiring terminal 6. 48 V1 power lead-in wiring terminal

8-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

8 Connecting PGND cables and power cables for cabinets

Figure 8-8 Overhead cabling of the DC power distribution cabinet (2)

-48 V output terminal block

Step 5 Determine the cabling modes of the PGND cables and power cables at the side of the UMG8900. Step 6 Determine the positions of PGND cables in the DC power distribution cabinet. Lead out the PGND cables from the protection grounding bar. Refer to Figure 8-9. Note that the PGND cables cannot be crossed. It is recommended to place the cables from the bottom up to facilitate capacity expansion.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-11

8 Connecting PGND cables and power cables for cabinets

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 8-9 Terminal positions of the PGND cables

Step 7 Connect the PGND cables(yellowish green) to the PGND terminals on the power distribution box of the UMG8900 cabinet. Fasten the bolts. Step 8 Determine the position of the wiring terminal of the RTN (black). Connect the cord end terminals of the RTN to the wiring terminals marked with RTN1 and RTN2 in the PDF. Then fasten the screw. Step 9 Connect the other end of the RTN cable to the output wiring terminal marked with GND in the DC power distribution cabinet. Fasten the screws. Refer to Figure 8-10.

8-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

8 Connecting PGND cables and power cables for cabinets

Figure 8-10 RTN connections (at the power distribution cabinet side)

Step 10 Determine the positions of wiring terminals of 48 V power cable (blue). Connect the terminals of the power cable to the wiring terminals marked with 48 V1 and 48 V2 in the PDF. Fasten the screws. Step 11 Determine the positions of terminals. Connect the other end of the power cables to the output wiring terminal of 48 V1 and 48 V2 powers in the DC power distribution cabinet. Fasten the screws. Figure 8-11 shows the appearance after installation. Figure 8-11 48 V terminals at the power distribution cabinet side

Step 12 After the power cables and PGND cables are laid, cut the rubber cover to cover the remaining space of the cable-through hole at the UMG8900 cabinet side. Step 13 Separate cables of different colors. Bind the cables every 200 mm [7.9 in.]. Step 14 Check whether the cables are connected properly with the multimeter.
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-13

8 Connecting PGND cables and power cables for cabinets

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Step 15 The labels must be attached 30 mm [1.2 in.] from the ends. Step 16 Check the installation. The cabling of the power cables and PGND cables must be straight, even, and not crossed. The bend radius must be smooth. ----End

Postrequisite
After connecting the PGND cables and power cables between the cabinets and the DC power distribution cabinets, you can connect the interconnected grounding cables between cabinets.

8.5 Connecting Interconnected PGND Cables Between Cabinets


This describes how to connect the protection ground (PGND) cables between or in the UMG8900 cabinets.

Prerequisite
l l l

The output switches of PDF-related output terminals are set to off. Make sure that the PGND cables are available. Make sure that the crosshead screwdrivers are available.

Context
When connecting the interconnected grounding cables between cabinets, pay attention to the following:
l

The core diameter of the interconnected cables must be 10 AMG and 300 mm [11.8 in.] long. Fix the interconnected grounding cable between the cabinets before placing the signal cables. You do not need to fix the side panels of the combined cabinets. Therefore, use the old PGND cable connecting to the side panel as the grounding cable for the combined cabinets.

Cascading the equipotential grounding cables. Refer to Figure 8-12.

8-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

8 Connecting PGND cables and power cables for cabinets

Figure 8-12 Cascading the equipotential grounding cables

Postrequisite
The connections of PGND cables and power cables are completed. After connecting the PGND cables and power cables, proceed with 9 Installing Internal Components.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-15

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

9 Installing Internal Components

9
About This Chapter
Prerequisite
l l l l

Installing Internal Components

This describes how to install internal components of the cabinet.

Before the installation, ensure that following preparations are completed. The cabinet is installed. The power cables and the PGND cables of the cabinets are connected. The engineers must wear the ESD-preventive wrist strap during installation. All the internal components are available.

Postrequisite
After installing the cabinet, clean the installation site.
l l

Sort out the tools and put the tools to specific positions. Clear the waste to keep the room tidy and clean.

9.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions This describes the installation specifications and precautions. 9.2 Installing SSM Frames This describes how to install the SSM frames. 9.3 Installing Boards in SSM Frames This describes how to install the boards. 9.4 Installing Boards in the UA Frames This describes how to install the boards in the user access (UA) frames.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-1

9 Installing Internal Components

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

9.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions


This describes the installation specifications and precautions.

Installation Specifications
l

The positions of the components must comply with the requirements of the engineering design documents. Filler panels must be installed at the unoccupied places of the cabinets. Earth the device correctly according to the requirements. Always wear an ESD wrist strap during the operation. Tighten the wrist strap around your wrist so that the metal tab makes good contact with your skin. Then attach the ground core of the wrist strap to the designated grounding point. Refer to Figure 9-1. Figure 9-1 Wearing an ESD-preventive wrist strap correctly

l l l l

Check the wrist strap. Its resistance must be within 0.75 megohm to 10 megohms. If the validity period (often two years) of the wrist strap expires or the resistance fails to meet requirements, replace the wrist strap. Do not touch boards with your clothing to avoid static electricity beyond the protection scope of the wrist strap.

Precautions
l

When installing internal components, place each component with care into corresponding guide rails in the cabinet. Then, insert it slightly into the cabinet. When fixing internal components and filler panels, put the bolts into the installation holes on the mount angles of each component. Then, fix the component on the mount angles at
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

9-2

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

9 Installing Internal Components

both sides of the cabinet. If there are more than two bolts for a component, first fix the four bolts at the four corners in diagonal direction, and then fasten other bolts in sequence.
l

The filler panel is fixed on the mount angles at both sides of the cabinet by lockers. To pull out the filler panel, press down the lockers, and then loose them. Make sure that the mount angles are in correct order during installation. Keep even space between components, between filler panels, and between components and filler panels.

9.2 Installing SSM Frames


This describes how to install the SSM frames.

Context
When the SSM-4 frames and the media gateway controller (MGC) are installed in one cabinet, note the following:
l

The SSM-4 frame must be installed apart from the MGC. Otherwise, the SSM-4 frame may affect the ventilation of the MGC. When installing the SSM-4 frame, close the folded rack-mounting ear. Insert the SSM-4 frame until it comes to the outside of the columns. Then, open the folded rack-mounting ear to fix the SSM-4 frame to the mount bar inside the cabinet.

Procedure
Step 1 Lift the SSM frame on corresponding guide rails and slowly push it into the cabinet. Step 2 Fix the mount angles at two sides with four panel screws respectively to the mount bars at two sides of the cabinet. Refer to Figure 9-2.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-3

9 Installing Internal Components

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 9-2 Installing SSM frames

Step 3 Put the screws in each mounting hole of the frame with screwdriver and fasten them slightly. Step 4 Fasten the four screws in diagonal order. Step 5 Repeat steps 1 to 4 to install all frames. ----End

9.3 Installing Boards in SSM Frames


This describes how to install the boards.
9-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

9 Installing Internal Components

Context

CAUTION
Open the ejectors before pulling out the board. When a board is powered on, pull out the board after the blue hot-pluggable indicator OFFLINE turns on to avoid possible damage to the device. After the OFFLINE indicator turns on, pull out the board, and insert it. Then, power on the device. Do not insert the board forcedly when the ejector levers are not in correct contact with the frame beam. Otherwise, you might damage the ejector levers.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an antistatic wrist strap. Connect the grounding end of the antistatic wrist strap to the electrostatic discharge (ESD) jack on the rack. Take out the new board from the antistatic box or bag. Check and ensure that the board is intact. When removing the board, do not touch the printed board or surface of components. Step 2 Set the DIP switches and jumpers on the board. Step 3 Loosen the installation screws counter-clockwise on the board to be installed with a screwdriver. Step 4 Hold the ejector levers with your hands. Hold down the red locking key on the upper ejector lever and the red tact switch on the lower ejector lever with your thumbs. Then, the ejector levers are ejected from the locking key. Step 5 Hold the upper ejector lever with one hand, and hold the board with the other hand. Do not touch the printed board. Insert the board along the guide rails of the slot into the frame. Ensure that the board is not inserted conversely. Refer to 1 in Figure 9-3. Step 6 When feeling the inward clasping force from the ejector levers after the board is inserted into the frame completely, clasp the ejector levers inward quickly. Refer to 2 in Figure 9-3. Ensure that the hooks on the ejector levers are hitched over the square holes in the mount angle, and the board is connected to the backplane properly. Step 7 Fasten the screws clockwise at the top and bottom of the panel. Refer to 3 in Figure 9-3. Step 8 Repeat steps 1 to 7 to install all the boards. Refer to Figure 9-3.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-5

9 Installing Internal Components

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 9-3 Installing boards

----End

Postrequisite
The installation of the internal components is completed. After installing the internal components, proceed with 10 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for Internal Components.

9.4 Installing Boards in the UA Frames


This describes how to install the boards in the user access (UA) frames.

Context
Figure 9-4 shows the appearance of the boards in the UA frames.

9-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

9 Installing Internal Components

Figure 9-4 Panels

1. Locking key

2. Ejector lever

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the filler panel with a screwdriver. Step 2 Put on an ESD-preventive wrist strap, and take the board to be installed out of the antistatic bag. Step 3 Set the DIP switches and jumpers on the board. Step 4 Hold the ejector levels on the panel and then make them move outwards as shown in (2) in Figure 9-4. Then, insert the board smoothly along the slot guide rail until the locating pin on the front panel touches the pin locating hole on the rack. Step 5 Press the ejector levers inwards as shown in (1) in Figure 9-4. Insert the board into the rack by the pressing force until the inner sides of the ejector levers contact the fore end of the rack. Then, push the ejector levers a little harder. The board will be completely inserted into the rack when you hear a "tick" sound. Step 6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to install all boards. ----End

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-7

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

10 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for Internal Components

10
Prerequisite

Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for Internal Components

About This Chapter


This describes how to connect the protection ground (PGND) cables and power cables for internal components.

Make the following preparations before connecting the cables:


l l l

Internal components of the cabinet are installed. Tools required during installation are available. Air breakers of each power distribution frame (PDF) are off.

Context
Clean equipment room
l l

Sort out the tools and put the tools to specific positions. Clear the waste to keep the room tidy and clean.

10.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions Conform to the following specifications when installing power cables and protection ground (PGND) cables for internal components 10.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables of Internal Components in Front-Access Cabinets 10.3 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables of Internal Components in Rear-Access Cabinets 10.4 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for the SSM Frames 10.5 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for the UA Frames This describes how to connect the protection ground (PGND) cable and power cable from the power distribution frame (PDF) to the UA frame.
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-1

10 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for Internal Components

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

10.6 Connecting the PGND Cables and Power Cables of Low-Density UA Fan Frame This describes how to connect the protection ground (PGND) cables and power cables of lowdensity UA fan frame. 10.7 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for Monitoring Boxes This describes how to connect the cables from the power distribution frame (PDF) to the environment monitoring box in the cabinet. 10.8 Connecting AC Power Cables This describes how to connect the AC power cable. When the UMG8900 is placed on the table, the AC power cable is needed.

10-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

10 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for Internal Components

10.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions


Conform to the following specifications when installing power cables and protection ground (PGND) cables for internal components

Installation Specifications
l

Internal power cables of the N68-22 cabinet are connected to the wiring terminals of power distribution frames (PDFs) before delivery. After installing the internal components, connect the other ends of the power cables to the components. The PGND cables must be yellow or yellow and green plastic insulation copper core wires that are the same as those of power supply cables.

Precautions
l

Before installation, mark or label both ends of each power cable and PGND cable to identify the devices that the cables are connected to. Therefore, correct cable connections are guaranteed. For details on how to mark cables and paste labels, see C Introduction to Engineering Labels. Only trained professionals can perform hot-line operations on devices with 48 V power terminals such as PDFs and service frames. Installation engineers must wear ESD-preventive wrist straps during the installation.

10.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables of Internal Components in Front-Access Cabinets
Connections of Power Cables Between Components and Front-Access PDFs in TGOnly Application
NOTE

Internal power cables of the H66-22 cabinet are connected to the wiring terminals of power distribution frames (PDFs) before delivery. After installing the internal components, connect the other ends of the power cables to the components. The PDF provides two channels of power supply for SSM frames, and one channel of power supply to UA frames.

Connecting power cables of internal components refers to connecting the power cables between PDFs and SSM frames, and those between UA frames and environment monitoring boxes. Two input power cables are available between the PDFs and the SSM frames, and one input power cable is available between the PDF and the environment monitoring box. Figure 10-1 shows the connection of power cables of internal components in the H66-22 cabinet in TG-only application.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-3

10 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for Internal Components

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 10-1 Connections of power cables between components and front-access PDFs in TGonly application

ESC- ESC+

1-

1+ ESC SSM3

2-

2+

3-

3+

SSM2

SSM1

-48V Cable RTN Cable

The three power switches (SW1 to SW3) on the front panel of the PDF control corresponding SSM frames. Refer to Table 10-1. Table 10-1 Relationships between components and power control switches in front-access cabinets Frame Name SSM frame 1 SSM frame 2 SSM frame 3
10-4

Power Control Switch SW2, SW3 SW1, SW3 SW1, SW2


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Remarks The frame is powered on when the corresponding power switches are on.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

10 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for Internal Components

Connections of Power Cables Between Components and Front-Access PDFs in Low-Density AG Application
Figure 10-2 shows the connections of power cables of internal components in the H66-22 cabinet in low-density AG application. Figure 10-2 Connections of power cables between components and front-access PDFs in lowdensity AG application

ESC UAFM
POWER

UAFS(1)
POWER

UAFS(2)
POWER

SSM

-48V Cable RTN Cable

The three power switches (SW1 to SW3) on the front panel of the PDF control corresponding SSM frames. Refer to Table 10-2.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-5

10 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for Internal Components

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Table 10-2 Relationships between components and power control switches in the H66-22 cabinet Frame Name UAFS(1) and UAFS(2) UAFM SSM frame Power Control Switch SW2 SW1 SW1, SW2 Remarks The frame is powered on when the corresponding power switches are on.

Connections of Power Cables Between Components and Front-Access PDFs in High-Density AG Application
Two HABD frames, one HABF frame, and one SSM-4 frame are configured in the H66-22 cabinet in high-density AG application. Figure 10-3 shows the connections of power cables of components.

10-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

10 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for Internal Components

Figure 10-3 Connections of power cables between components and front-access PDFs in highdensity AG application
To: HABF To: HABD(1) To: ESC To: SSM left power supply To: SSM tight power supply To: HABD(2)

ESC(-) ESC(+) 1-

1+

2-

2+

3-

3+

ESC HABD (1)


PWRIO(-48V)

HABF
PWRIO(-48V)

PWRIO(-48V)

HABD(2)

SSM

-48V Cable RTN Cable

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-7

10 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for Internal Components

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

The three power switches (SW1 to SW3) on the front panel of the PDF control corresponding SSM frames. Refer to Table 10-3. Table 10-3 Relationships between components and power control switches in the H66-22 cabinet Frame Name HABD (1) HABF HABD (2) SSM frame Power Control Switch SW1 SW1 SW2 SW2, SW3 Remarks The frame is powered on when the corresponding power switches are on.

10.3 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables of Internal Components in Rear-Access Cabinets
Connections of Power Cables Between Components and Rear-Access PDFs
Figure 10-4 shows the connections of power cables of internal components in the N66-22 cabinet in low-density application.

10-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

10 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for Internal Components

Figure 10-4 Connections of power cables between components and rear-access PDFs

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5

FAN1 HGB

JF1

JD1 JD2

JF1

HIB(1)

JD1 JD2

FAN2 HIB(2)

JF1

JD1 JD2

JF1

HIB(3)

JD1 JD2

JF1

HIB(4)

JD1 JD2

SSM

ESC Ground

JP3

Ground
-48V Cable RTN Cable

Five power switches (SW1 to SW5) on the front panel of the PDF control corresponding SSM frames. Refer to Table 10-4. Table 10-4 Relationships between power control switches and components Frame Name SSM frame RSP14 (3) and RSP14 (4) RSP14 (1) and RSP14 (2) Power Control Switch SW4, SW5 SW3 SW2 Remarks The frame is powered on when the corresponding power switches are on.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-9

10 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for Internal Components

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Frame Name RSP10 and environment monitoring box Fan 1 Fan 2

Power Control Switch SW1 SW5 SW4

Remarks

Connections of Power Cables Between Components and Rear-Access PDFs in High-Density Application
Figure 10-5 shows the connections of power cables of internal components in the N66-22 cabinet in high-density application.

10-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

10 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for Internal Components

Figure 10-5 Connections of power cables between components and rear-access PDFs in highdensity application

PDF
PGND -48V1 BGND -48V2 BGND -48V3 BGND-48V4 BGND

ESC

JP3

power1

JP1 HABA (1)

power2

JP2

power1

JP1 HABA (2)

power2

JP2

SSM

-48V Cable RTN Cable

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-11

10 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for Internal Components

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Two power switches (SW1 to SW2) on the front panel of the PDF control corresponding SSM frames. Refer to Table 10-5. Table 10-5 Relationships between power control switches and components Frame Name SSM frame HABA (1) HABA (1) Environment monitoring box Power Control Switch SW1, SW2 SW1 SW2 SW1 Remarks The frame is powered on when the corresponding power switches are on.

10.4 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for the SSM Frames
Context

CAUTION
l

The connecting holes are on the terminal bar on the top of the power distribution frame (PDF). Connect the cables according to the connection diagram. Pay attention to the marks at two ends, one end is RTN and the other end is 48 V. Wrong connection causes damage to the device. The power of the device is high. Therefore, all the power cables must be fastened. The OT terminals of unused power cables must be covered with insulation coverings, and then bound to the cabinet. The unavailability of insulation coverings causes severe shortcircuit accidents.

l l

Procedure
l Connect the power cable between the PDF and the SSM frame. 1. 2. The PDF on the top of the cabinet is off. Connect the power cable from the PDF to the SSM frame based on the cable connection diagram in 10.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables of Internal Components in Front-Access Cabinets and 10.3 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables of Internal Components in Rear-Access Cabinets. Connect the blue power cable (cord end terminal) to 48 V wire post of the PDF and the black RTN cable to the RTN wire post at the back of the PDF. Insert the type-D 3PIN connector to the power input interface of the power module in the SSM frame. Insert the connector into the socket slowly and straightly. Do not insert it forcibly. In such case, pull the connector out and check if it is inserted in a wrong direction or its pins are distorted.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

3.

10-12

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

10 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for Internal Components

4. 5. l

Check whether the connection is correct, and then check whether the captive screws and nuts are tightened. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to connect all power cables for the SSM frame. Bind the cables after checks. Connect one end of the UL1015 10AWG yellowish green PGND cable to the grounding point of the SSM frame. Connect the other end of the PGND cable to the grounding bars at two side of the cabinet. Figure 10-6 shows the cable connection. Figure 10-6 Connections of the PGND cables in the SSM frames
Cabinet grounding bar Cabinet grounding bar

Connect the PGND cables of the SSM frame. 1. 2.

SSM frame

Service frame grounding point


-48V RTN MONITOR ALARM FAN_48V -48V RTN

----End

10.5 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for the UA Frames
This describes how to connect the protection ground (PGND) cable and power cable from the power distribution frame (PDF) to the UA frame.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-13

10 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for Internal Components

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Context

CAUTION
l

The connecting holes are on the terminal bar on the top of the PDF. Connect the cables according to the connection diagram. Pay attention to the marks at two ends, one end is RTN and the other end is 48 V. Wrong connection causes damage to the device. The power of the device is large. Therefore, all the power cables must be fastened. The OT terminals of unused power cables must be covered with insulation coverings, and then bound to the cabinet. The unavailability of insulation coverings causes severe shortcircuit accidents.

l l

Procedure
l Connect the power cable from the PDF to low-density UA frame in front-access cabinet. 1. 2. The PDF on the top of the cabinet is off. Connect the power cable from the PDF to the UA frame based on the cable connection diagram in 10.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables of Internal Components in Front-Access Cabinets. Connect the blue power cable (cord end terminal) to 48 V wire post of the PDF and the black RTN cable to the RTN wire post at the back of the PDF. Insert the other end of the cable to the power interface of the filtering board in the UA frame. Insert the connector into the socket slowly and straightly. Do not insert it forcibly. If the connector cannot be inserted smoothly, pull it out and check whether it is inserted in wrong direction or whether its pins are distorted. Check whether the connection is correct, and then check whether the captive screws and nuts are tightened. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to connect all power cables for the UA frame. Bind the cables after checks.

3.

4. 5. l

Connect the power cable from the PDF to high-density UA frame in the front-access cabinet. 1. 2. The PDF on the top of the cabinet is off. Connect the power cable from the PDF to the UA frame based on the cable connection diagram in 10.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables of Internal Components in Front-Access Cabinets. Connect the blue power cable (cord end terminal) to 48 V wire post of the PDF and the black RTN cable to the RTN wire post (cord end terminal) at the back of the PDF. Insert the other end of the cable to the PWRIO-1(+5V) input interface of the fan box in frame HABD 1. Insert the connector into the socket slowly and straightly. Do not insert it forcibly. If the connector cannot be inserted smoothly, pull it out and check whether it is inserted in wrong direction or whether its pins are distorted. Check whether the connection is correct, and then check whether the captive screws and nuts are tightened. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to connect all power cables for frame HABF and HABD 2. Bind the cables after checks.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

3.

4. 5.

10-14

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

10 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for Internal Components

Connect the power cable from the PDF and low-density UA frame in rear-access cabinet. 1. The PDF on the top of the cabinet is off. 2. Connect the power cable from the PDF to the UA frame based on the cable connection diagram in 10.3 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables of Internal Components in Rear-Access Cabinets. Connect the blue power cable (cord end terminal) to 48 V wire post of the PDF. 3. Connect the black RTN cable (OT terminal) to the grounding bars at two sides of the cabinet. 4. Insert the two big 4PIN connectors respectively to power input interfaces JD1 and JD2 in the UA frame. Insert the connector into the socket slowly and straightly. Do not insert them forcibly. If the connector cannot be inserted smoothly, pull it out and check whether it is inserted in wrong direction or whether its pins are distorted. 5. Check whether the connection is correct, and then check whether the captive screws and nuts are tightened. 6. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to connect all power cables for the UA frame. Bind the cables after checks. Connect the power cable from the PDF to high-density UA frame in rear-access cabinet. 1. The PDF on the top of the cabinet is off. 2. Connect the power cable from the PDF to frame HABA 1 based on the cable connection diagram in 10.3 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables of Internal Components in Rear-Access Cabinets. Connect the blue power cable (cord end terminal) to 48 V wire post of the PDF and the black RTN cable (cord end terminal) to the RTN wire post at the back of the PDF. 3. Insert the other end of the cable to power input interface JP1 of frame HABA 1. Insert the connector into the socket slowly and straightly. Do not insert it forcibly. If the connector cannot be inserted smoothly, pull it out and check whether it is inserted in wrong direction or whether its pins are distorted. 4. Check whether the connection is correct, and then check whether the captive screws and nuts are tightened. 5. Repeat the preceding steps to connect the second power cable of frame HABA 1 and two power cables of frame HABD 2. Bind the cables after checks. Connect the PGND cable for low-density UA frame in the rear-access cabinet. 1. Connect one end of the yellowish green PGND cable to the grounding point of the environment monitoring box. 2. Connect the other end of the yellowish green PGND cable to the grounding bars at two side of the cabinet. Figure 10-7 shows the cable connection. Figure 10-7 Connections of the PGND cables of the UA frames in the rear-access cabinet

HGB/HIB

JL1

Ground

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-15

10 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for Internal Components

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

----End

10.6 Connecting the PGND Cables and Power Cables of Low-Density UA Fan Frame
This describes how to connect the protection ground (PGND) cables and power cables of lowdensity UA fan frame.

Context

CAUTION
l

The connecting holes are on the terminal bar on the top of the power distribution frame (PDF). Connect the cables according to the connection diagram. Pay attention to the marks at two ends, one end is RTN and the other end is 48 V. Wrong connection causes damage to the device.The power of the device is high. Therefore, all the power cables must be fastened.

Procedure
Step 1 The PDF on the top of the cabinet is off. Step 2 Connect the power cable from the PDF to the fan frame based on the cable connection diagram in 10.3 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables of Internal Components in RearAccess Cabinets. Connect the blue power cable (cord end terminal) to 48 V wire post of the PDF. Step 3 Insert the two big 2PIN connectors respectively to power input interfaces of the fan frame. Insert the connector into the socket slowly and straightly. Do not insert them forcibly. If the connector cannot be inserted smoothly, pull it out and check whether it is inserted in wrong direction or whether its pins are distorted. Step 4 Check whether the connection is correct, and then check whether the captive screws and nuts are tightened. Step 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to connect all power cables for the fan frame. Bind the cables after checks. ----End

10.7 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for Monitoring Boxes
This describes how to connect the cables from the power distribution frame (PDF) to the environment monitoring box in the cabinet.
10-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

10 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for Internal Components

Context

CAUTION
l

The connecting holes are on the terminal bar on the top of the PDF. Connect the cables according to the connection diagram. Pay attention to the marks at two ends, one end is RTN and the other end is 48 V. Wrong connection causes damage to the device.
NOTE

For low-density and high-density configurations in front-access cabinet, the methods for connecting the power cables are similar.

Procedure
l Connect the power cable from the PDF to the environment monitoring box in front-access cabinet. 1. 2. The PDF on the top of the cabinet is off. Connect the power cable from the PDF to environment monitoring box based on the cable connection diagram in 10.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables of Internal Components in Front-Access Cabinets. Connect the blue power cable (cord end terminal) to 48 V wire post of the PDF and the black RTN cable (cord end terminal) to the RTN wire post at the back of the PDF. Insert the 4PIN connector to into the power socket of the panel on environment monitoring box slowly and straightly. Do not insert it forcibly. If the connector cannot be inserted smoothly, pull it out and check whether it is inserted in wrong direction or whether its pins are distorted.

3.

Connect the power cable from the PDF to environment monitoring box in rear-access cabinet. 1. 2. The PDF on the top of the cabinet is off. Connect the power cable from the PDF to environment monitoring box based on the cable connection diagram in 10.3 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables of Internal Components in Rear-Access Cabinets. Connect the blue power cable (cord end terminal) to 48 V wire post of the PDF and the black RTN cable (cord end terminal)to the RTN wire post at the back of the PDF. Connect the black RTN cable (OT terminal) to the grounding bars at two sides of the cabinet. Insert the other end of the cable into the JP3 interface of environment monitoring box. Insert the connector into the socket slowly and straightly. Do not insert it forcibly. If the connector cannot be inserted smoothly, pull it out and check whether it is inserted in wrong direction or whether its pins are distorted. Check whether the connection is correct, and then check whether the captive screws and nuts are tightened. Repeat the preceding steps to connect all power cables for the environment monitoring box. Bind the cables after checks.

3. 4.

5. 6. l
Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Connect the PGND cable for environment monitoring box in rear-access cabinet.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-17

10 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for Internal Components

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

1. 2.

Connect one end of the yellow PGND cable to the grounding point of the environment monitoring box. Connect the other end of the yellow PGND cable to the grounding bars at two side of the cabinet. Figure 10-8 shows the cable connection. Figure 10-8 Connections of PGND cables of the environment monitoring box in the rear-access cabinet

ESC

JP1

NOTE

l l

For low-density and high-density configurations in rear-access cabinet, the methods for connecting the PGND cables are similar. The protection ground (PGND) cable of the environment monitoring box is not required for frontaccess cabinets.

----End

10.8 Connecting AC Power Cables


This describes how to connect the AC power cable. When the UMG8900 is placed on the table, the AC power cable is needed.

Context
Figure 10-9 shows the position of the AC power supply module in the SSM-4 frame.

10-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

10 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for Internal Components

Figure 10-9 Position of the AC power supply module


1

1. Frame lintel

2. Fan box

3. Power supply module

Figure 10-10 shows the appearance of the AC power supply module. Figure 10-10 Appearance of the AC power supply module
1 2

1. Mount bar

2. Indicator

3. AC power connector

4. Power switch

NOTE

Due to the different standards of each country or area, the electrical specifications of the AC power cable and socket are different. Install the AC power cable based on the actual condition.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the cable to the AC power connector. Step 2 Then, connect the other end to the socket of the AC power supply. ----End
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-19

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

11 Connecting Signal Cables

11
About This Chapter
Prerequisite
l l l l l l

Connecting Signal Cables

This describes how to connect the signal cables of the UMG8900.

Make sure that the following preparations are completed before connecting the signal cables. The cabinet is installed. The components in the cabinet are installed. The power cables and PGND cables are connected. The signal cables to be connected are available. The output switches in the PDF are off. Make the tools available. The tools include the crosshead screwdriver, straight screwdriver, diagonal pliers, cable peeler, crimping pliers, high-speed wire stripper for coaxial cables, extraction tool, cable tester, multimeter, fiber bundling tape, cable tie, antistatic gloves, antistatic wrist strap, ladder, and vacuum cleaner.

Context
Figure 11-1 shows the procedure for connecting the signal cables.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-1

11 Connecting Signal Cables

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 11-1 Connection Procedure


Start

Connect monitoring cables

Connect trunk cables

Connecting singal cables for service access of UA frames

Connect clock cables

Connecting service bearer network cables Connecting service bearer optical fibers

End

Postrequisite
After connecting the signal cables, proceed with 12 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinet Fittings. 11.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions This describes the installation specifications including wiring and binding principles that must be followed when you connect signal cables. The disorder connections of signal cables may degrade the signal quality and shorten the service life of cables. 11.2 Connecting Signal Cables This describes how to connect the signal cables. 11.3 Connecting Monitoring Cables This describes how to connect the monitoring cables. 11.4 Connecting Trunk Cables The trunk cables are used for the trunk connection of the TDM signals. The trunk cable includes the E1/T1 trunk cables between the SSM frame and the UA frame, tailor-made internal trunk cables between the SSM-4 frame and the UA frame, internal HW trunk cables in the UA frame, E3/T3 trunk cables. 11.5 Connecting Signal Cables of Access Service in the UA Frame 11.6 Connecting BITS Clock Cables This describes how to connect the BITS clock cable that is used to access the synchronous clock signals provided by external BITS.
11-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

11 Connecting Signal Cables

11.7 Connecting Service Bearer Network Cables This describes how to connect the service bearer network cables that connect the UMG8900 and the local maintenance terminal (LMT), media gateway controller (MGC), or another UMG8900. 11.8 Connecting Service Bearer Optical Fibers This describes how to connect the service bearer optical fibers that connect the UMG8900 and the external optical distribution frame (ODF), the external optical interface, or the transmission device.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-3

11 Connecting Signal Cables

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

11.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions


This describes the installation specifications including wiring and binding principles that must be followed when you connect signal cables. The disorder connections of signal cables may degrade the signal quality and shorten the service life of cables.

Upward and Downward Cabling modes


There is one rectangle cabling hole at each of the four corners on the top of cabinet and the four corners at the bottom of the cabinet. The rectangle cabling hole is used for laying signal cable in or out the cabinets. Refer to Figure 11-2 and Figure 11-3. Figure 11-2 Cabling holes at the top and bottom of the N68-22 cabinet

11-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

11 Connecting Signal Cables

Figure 11-3 Cabling holes at the top and bottom of the N68E-22 cabinet

The cables of the UMG8900 are laid from the back of the cabinet. Lead the cables into the cabinet through the cabling holes, and then lay them along the side columns of the cabinet to the corresponding SSM frames. After that, lay the cables to the corresponding interface boards along the cabling trough. Arrange the cables in order, bind them, and fix them in the wire bushing. Cabling holes are equipped with rodent-proof nets. Before you lead the cables, remove these nets. After you lead all the cables through the cabling holes, bind them together. Then, place the rodent-proof nets back onto the cabling holes. Draw the cabling area on the rodent-proof nets, and cut it out with a pair of scissors. Install the rodent-proof nets again to make sure there is no gap around the cables. Based on the actual conditions of the equipment room, cables can be laid along the lower enclosure frame or in overhead cabling mode and underfloor cabling mode.
l

Overhead cabling mode Lead the cables in or out the cabling holes of the two sides on the top of the cabinet. Lay the cables along the side columns at two sides of the cabinet in the downward way to connect to related devices. Refer to Figure 11-4. Overhead cabling mode is recommended in the equipment rooms with cement floors.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-5

11 Connecting Signal Cables

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 11-4 Overhead cabling mode

Lay the cables outside the cabinet along cabling troughs and cabling racks. When the distance between the cabling rack and the top of the cabinet is longer than 0.8 m [2.6 ft.], the downward cable ladder must be fixed. Refer to Figure 11-5. Figure 11-5 Downward cable ladder

11-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

11 Connecting Signal Cables

Bind the cables in bundle or in square on the cabling rack without any crossover. The cables must be straight and tight. Refer to Figure 11-6. Figure 11-6 Layout of cables on the cabling rack

Underfloor cabling mode Lead the cable in or out the cabling holes of the two sides at the bottom of the cabinet. Lay the cables along the side columns at two sides of the cabinet in the upward way to connect to related devices. Refer to Figure 11-7. Underfloor cabling mode is recommended in the equipment rooms with ESD-preventive floor. When the underfloor cabling mode is applied, ensure that the height of the piled cables on the ESD-preventive floor cannot exceed the 3/4 height of the space under the ESDpreventive floor.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-7

11 Connecting Signal Cables

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 11-7 Underfloor cabling mode

Cabling along the lower enclosure frame The clock cables and cascading cables are recommended to be laid along the lower enclosure frame. When combined cabinets are installed, the clock cables and the cascading cables must be connected to the neighbor cabinet through the lower enclosure frame of the cabinet. Refer to Figure 11-8.

11-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

11 Connecting Signal Cables

Figure 11-8 Cabling along the lower enclosure frame

Arrangement Principles
Conform to the following specifications when laying cables:
l

Before being connected, each cable must be marked or have engineering labels at both ends to ensure correct connections. For details, see C Introduction to Engineering Labels. The signal cables must be intact. Do not use the broken signal cable. When cables are laid vertically, they must be bound and placed along the side columns of the cabinet. When cables are laid horizontally, they must be bound and placed along the cabling trough. When power cables and signal cables are laid in groove, it is prohibited to bind them together. At least 30 mm [1.2 in.] between them must be ensured.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-9

l l

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

11 Connecting Signal Cables


l

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Do not put the signal cables on the heat dissipation net. Otherwise, the heat dissipation of the cabinet and the service life of the cable are affected. When laying the signal cable outside the cabinet, you must use the corrugated plastic protection tube. Bind, fix, and polish two ends of the protection tubes. The signal cables must be laid vertically or horizontally without any crossover. (The signal cable can be crossed within one meter outside the cabinet). In addition, the signal cables cannot be folded. Ensure that the bending radians of the signal cables are the same and leave proper length of cable at the bend radius. The rodent-proof nets are on the cable-through holes of the cabinet. Cut the rodent-proof nets when inserting the signal cables. Make sure that the holes on rodent-proof nets are of proper size. Connectors must be secure and in good contact.

Binding Principles
Conform to the following specifications when bundling cables:
l

Bind the cables in an equal, tidy, and nice way and ensure the proper tightness. The cable ties face the same direction. Bind the cables outside the cabinet every 200 mm [7.9 in.] with a cable tie. Bind the cables inside the cabinet less than 200 mm [7.9 in.] with a cable tie. When fixing cables on the wire bushing, you must put cable ties inside the wire bushing. Otherwise, the side panels of the cabinet cannot be well installed. Refer to Figure 11-9. Figure 11-9 Cable ties inside the wire bushing

Trim cable ties to avoid sharpness. Figure 11-10 and Figure 11-11 show the trimming method.

11-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

11 Connecting Signal Cables

Figure 11-10 Method for trimming the cable tie

Figure 11-11 Trimmed cable tie

Bind cables such as power cables, signal cables, and grounding cables separately. When cables are laid inside cabinet, power cables and grounding cables must be bound along the inside cabling trough. Signal cables must be bound along the outside cabling trough.

Cable Bending Principles


Conform to the following specifications when bending cables:
l l

The cables cannot be over-bended at the bend radius to prevent the damage to the core wire. When the cable is bended, the radius of curvature is longer than two times of the cable diameter. The radius of curvature is longer than four to six times of the cable diameter around the exit of the connection component. Do not fix a cable tie at the bend radius. Leave the cable with proper length at the bend radius. Refer to Figure 11-12.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-11

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

11 Connecting Signal Cables

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 11-12 Fixing the cable tie on the signal cable

No cable tie at the turve Cable ties

Precautions
Pay attention to the following when connecting signal cables:
l

Do not wear conductive accessories such as the watch, bracelet, bangle, or ring during installation. Wear the ESD-preventive wrist strap to prevent the damage to the sensitive components caused by the body static. In addition, the other end of the ESD-preventive wrist strap is well grounded. Before connecting the cables, check if the cables and cable labels are consistent with the actual conditions. When connecting the optical fibers, do not stare at or get close to the egress of the optical fibers. The unused connector of the optical fiber must be covered with the protection tube to avoid the pollution. The ways that the cables are laid in or out the cabinet are the same.

11.2 Connecting Signal Cables


This describes how to connect the signal cables. 11.2.1 Connections of Monitoring Cables This describes the monitoring cables that are connected inside the cabinet. The methods for connecting the monitoring cables vary with the applications. 11.2.2 Connections of UAM Cables This describes the user access module (UAM) cables including the trunk cables between the UAM and the service switching module (SSM), and the HW cables between the main frame and the subframe. 11.2.3 Connections of Internal Cables in UA Frames This describes the test and alarm cables that must be connected in the UA frame to realize the function of test and alarm report. The LVDS cables must be connected when HABD and HABF high-density UA frames are installed in the H66-22 cabinet.
11-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

11 Connecting Signal Cables

11.2.1 Connections of Monitoring Cables


This describes the monitoring cables that are connected inside the cabinet. The methods for connecting the monitoring cables vary with the applications.

Front-Access Cabinets in TG-Only Application


The front-access cabinet is H66-22 cabinet. Figure 11-13 shows the connections of monitoring cables in TG-only application. Figure 11-13 Connections of monitoring cables for environment monitoring boxes in frontaccess cabinets in TG-only application
Power Distribution Frame Monitor Port

1
BGND SIO2 JTM1 JTD6 JTD5 -48V DC

JTD4 JTD3 JTD2 JTD1

ESC ALARM BOX

2
MIU
COM1 COM0 FE15 FE14 FE13 FE12 FE11 FE10 ALM ESC

3
MIU
FE05 FE04 FE03 FE02 FE01 FE00

1. Monitoring cable for PDF 3. Straight through network cable

2. Access control monitoring cable 4. MMIU in the SSM frame on the top of the cabinet

Front-Access Cabinets in Low-Density AG Application


The front-access cabinet is H66-22 cabinet. Figure 11-14 shows the connections of monitoring cables in AG application.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-13

11 Connecting Signal Cables

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 11-14 Connections of monitoring cables for environment monitoring boxes in frontaccess cabinets in low-density AG application
Power Distribution Frame Monitor Port 1
JTD4 JTD3 JTD2 JTD1 JTM1 JTD8 JTD7 JTD6 JTD5 JTD9 BGND SIO2 -48V DC RSP/PV8

ESC ALARM BOX

2 3

3 UAFM cabling area 3 FAN

ESC0

ESC1

UAFS(1) cabling area FAN

UAFS(2) cabling area FAN

1. Monitoring cable for PDF 3. Monitoring cable for fan box

2. Access control monitoring cable 4. Straight through network cable

Front-Access Cabinets in High-Density AG Application


The front-access cabinet is H66-22 cabinet in which high-density UA frames such as the HABD and HABF are configured. Figure 11-15 shows the connections of monitoring cables. Figure 11-15 Connections of monitoring cables for environment monitoring boxes in frontaccess cabinets in high-density AG application
Power Distribution Frame Monitor Port 1
JTD4 JTD3JTD2 JTD1 JTM1 JTD8 JTD7JTD6 JTD5 JTD9 BGND SIO2 -48V DC RSP/PV8

ESC Alarm Box

1. Monitoring cable for PDF

2. Access control monitoring cable

11-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

11 Connecting Signal Cables

In addition, the test box and alarm cable are required between the environment monitoring box and the high-density UA frames such as the HABD and HABF. For details on connections, see 11.2.3 Connections of Internal Cables in UA Frames.

Rear-Access Cabinets in Low-Density AG Application


The rear-access cabinet N66-22 is configured in narrowband AG-only configuration. Figure 11-16 shows the connections of monitoring cables in AG application. Figure 11-16 Connections of monitoring cables for environment monitoring boxes in rearaccess cabinets in low-density AG application
2 Fan box 1 (1) H303DFC

RSP10

JC2 JC3

Fan box

(2) 3

H303DFC

3 JC1 JC3

H301ESIB
JAK1 JAB1 JTM1

JTD4 JTD3JTD2 JTD1 JTD8 JTD7JTD6 JTD5 JTD12JTD11JTD10JTD9

1. Access control alarm cable of the alarm box in cabinet 3. Monitoring cable for fan box

2. Access control communication cable between cabinets 4. Straight through network cable

Rear-Access Cabinets in High-Density AG Application


The HABA high-density UA frame is configured in N66-22 rear-access cabinet in high-density AG application. Figure 11-17 shows the connections of monitoring cables.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-15

11 Connecting Signal Cables

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 11-17 Connections of monitoring cables for environment monitoring boxes in rearaccess cabinets in high-density AG application
Front access control Environment monitoring box JTD4 JTD3JTD2 JTD1
JTM1 JTD8 JTD7JTD6 JTD5 JC3

Rear access control

2 5

JC1

3
JD2
PWR-ALM

JD3 JD1 JD0


TEST N-ESC

FAN-ALM

HABA (1)

3
JD2
PWR-ALM

JD3 JD1 JD0


TEST
N-ESC

FAN-ALM

HABA (2)

1. Monitoring cable of the ESC 3. Monitoring cable for fan box 5. Access control communication cable between cabinets

2. Access control alarm cable of the alarm box in cabinet 4. Straight through network cable

11.2.2 Connections of UAM Cables


This describes the user access module (UAM) cables including the trunk cables between the UAM and the service switching module (SSM), and the HW cables between the main frame and the subframe. The UMG8900 can serve as a local exchange in the traditional PSTN upgrading and expansion or as a large capacity AG in the NGN. The UMG8900 consists of two modules, SSM and UAM. Refer to Figure 11-18.
11-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

11 Connecting Signal Cables

Figure 11-18 UMG8900 structure


MGC MGW SSM TDM Connection Main frame Direct frame
......

RSA frame

Sub frame

UAM

RSA sub frame

POTS/ISDN/ XDSL/DDN User

Table 11-1 lists the modes of the UAM frames. Table 11-1 Modes of the UAM frame Mode Main frame Description It is directly connected to the SSM and can be connected to the subframe. The UA frame in which the main control board is the RSU8 or RSU4 can serve as the main frame. The frames that can be configured as the main frames include the UAFM, UAM, HABA_UP, HABD, HABL, RSP_10, or RSP_12 frames. Subframe It is directly connected to the main frame and cannot be connected to the subframe. The main control board of the subframe of the low-density UA frame is the RSP. No main control board is configured in the subframe of the high-density UA frame. The frames that can be configured as the subframes include the UAFS, UAS, HABA_UP, HABA_DOWN, HABB_UP, HABB_DOWN, HABE, HABF, RSP_10, RSP_12, RSP_14, RSP_15, or RSP_19 frames. Direct frame It is directly connected to the SSM frame and cannot be connected to the subframe. The UA frame in which the main control board is the RSP or RSA (The main control board of the RSB and the RSB_HK is the RSA) can serve as the direct frame. The frames that can be configured as the direct frames include the UAFM, UAFS, UAM, UAS, RSP_10, RSP_12, RSP_14, RSP_15, RSP_19, RSP_60A, RSP_160B, RSB, or RSB_HK.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-17

11 Connecting Signal Cables

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Mode RSA frame

Description It is directly connected to the SSM and can be connected to the RSA subframe. The UAM frame in which the main control board is the RSA can serve as the RSA frame. Only the RSA_22 and the RSA_26 frames can be configured as the RSA main frame.

RSA subframe

It is directly connected to the RSA main frame and cannot be connected to the subframe. The UAM frame in which the main control board is the DRV can serve as the RSA subframe. Only the USR16 and the USR19 frames can be configured as the RSA subframe.

The SSM and the UAM are usually connected in the following three ways:
l

The SSM and the UAM are directly connected with each other through cables. If SSM frames and UA frames are in the same cabinet, the SSM and UAM can be directly connected with each other through internal cables. If the UA frame is a rear-access frame, connect the internal trunk cable to E1 interface on the MOMD in the front of the cabinet, and then lead the cable to the back of the cabinet to connect the interface on the backplane of the rear-access UA frame.

The SSM and the UAM are connected with each other through the digital distribution frame (DDF). If the DDF is available in the equipment room, the E1/T1 cables of the SSM and the UAM can be connected to the DDF through the jumper on the DDF.

The SSM and the UAM are connected with each other through the SDH transmission equipment. If the UAM is located at the remote end, the SSM and the UAM can be connected to their corresponding transmission devices through E1/T1 cables. The transmission devices at both ends are connected through the transmission network.

E1 Connections of SSM Frames


The SSM frame is connected to the UA frame through the E1 interface on the MOMD. Each MOMD can provide 24 E1 interfaces. Figure 11-19 shows the E1 interfaces on the MOMD. Figure 11-19 E1 interfaces on the MOMD.
OMD OMD
OFFLINE

RUN ALM ACT

E1/T1_8-23

E1/T1_0-7

OMC FE1

FE0

2M_ 2M_ IN OUT

Table 11-2 lists the description of E1 interfaces on the MOMD.

11-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

11 Connecting Signal Cables

Table 11-2 Description of E1 interfaces on the MOMD. Silkscreen E1/T1_0-7 E1/T1_8-23 E1 Interface No. 07 823 E1 Timeslot No. 0255 256767

Each MOMD can provide 24 E1 interfaces. By default, the system reserves 1024 E1 timeslots for each MOMD.
l

When timeslots 0 to 1023 are occupied, you can calculate the timeslot No. through E1 interface No. in the following way: Suppose the E1 interface No. is n, the start timeslot No. is n x 32 and the end timeslot No. is n x 32 + 31. Suppose the SSM frame is connected to the UA frame through E1 interfaces that are numbered n to m (n<m), the corresponding timeslot Nos. of these interfaces are n x 32 to m x 32 + 31.

When timeslots 1024 to 2047 are occupied, you can calculate the timeslot No. through E1 interface No. in the following way: Suppose the E1 interface No. is n, the start timeslot No. is n x 32 + 1024 and the end timeslot No. is n x 32 + 31 + 1024. Suppose the SSM frame is connected to the UA frame through E1 interfaces that are numbered n to m (n<m), the corresponding timeslot Nos. of these interfaces are n x 32 + 1024 to m x 32 + 31 + 1024.

These formulas are useful when you configure TDM terminations with ADD TDMIU.

E1 Connections of UA Frames
l

E1 interfaces of the UAFM frames Figure 11-20 shows the E1 interfaces of the UAFM frames. Figure 11-20 E1 interfaces of the UAFM frame

PV8 E1

PV4 E1

Table 11-3 lists the meaning of E1 interfaces in Figure 11-20.


Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-19

11 Connecting Signal Cables

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Table 11-3 Positions of E1 interfaces of the UAFM frame Interface Silkscreen PV4 E1 PV8 Slot Slot 5 Slot 6 E1 Interface No. 14 14 Remarks The first four E1 interfaces of two PV8 boards or E1 interfaces of two PV4 boards The last four E1 interfaces of two PV8 boards

PV8 E1

Slot 5 Slot 6

58 58

E1 interfaces of the RSP10 frames E1 interfaces of the RSP10 frame are on the backplane. Refer to Figure 11-21. Figure 11-21 E1 interfaces of the RSP10 frame
PV8R PV8L

A B

C D

Table 11-4 lists the meaning of E1 interfaces in Figure 11-21. Table 11-4 Positions of E1 interfaces of the RSP10 frame Label Name A B C D
11-20

PV8 Slot Slot 10 Slot 10 Slot 9 Slot 9

E1 Interface No. 1, 5, 2, 6 3, 7, 4, 8 1, 5, 2, 6 3, 7, 4, 8

Pins 1724 25-32 1724 2532


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

11 Connecting Signal Cables

E1 Connections from SSM Frames to UA Frames


To prevent the most of the UAM from losing communication due to the fault on the MOMD, the E1 interfaces on one MOMD must be connected to two main control boards in a UA frame. If the SSM frames are connected through DDF, check the instructions to DDF connections, and then find out the connections between the E1 cables from the UA frame and interfaces on the MOMD. This part does not describe it in detail. This describes the method for determining the E1 interface No. between the SSM and the UA frames when they are connected through dedicated internal cables.
l

Connecting the UAFM frame. The SSM frame is connected to the UAFM frame through E1 interfaces on the MOMD. The MOMD provides the E1 cables with two types of connectors, that is, DB44 and DB78 connectors. Figure 11-22 shows the dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB44 connectors. Figure 11-22 8 E1 Cables of Low-Density Frames in Front-Access Cabinets
Pos 1

Pos 44 Pos 50

W X1

X2

Pos 1

Table 11-5 lists the dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB44 connectors. Table 11-5 Dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB44 connectors No. of FOMD E1 Interface Connected to X1 0 1 2 3 4 5
Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

No. of PV4 E1 Interface Connected to X2 1 2 3 4 1 2

No. of PV8 E1 Interface Connected to X2 5 6 7 8 5 6

PV8 Slot That Provides E1 Interfaces Slot 5

Slot 6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-21

11 Connecting Signal Cables

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

No. of FOMD E1 Interface Connected to X1 6 7

No. of PV4 E1 Interface Connected to X2 3 4

No. of PV8 E1 Interface Connected to X2 7 8

PV8 Slot That Provides E1 Interfaces

Figure 11-23 shows the dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB78 connectors. Figure 11-23 16 E1 Cables of Low-Density Frames in Front-Access Cabinets
Pos 50

X1

W1 X2 W2 Pos 1 Pos 50

Pos 1

Pos 78

X3

Pos 1

Table 11-6 lists the dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB78 connectors (from connectors X1 to X2). Table 11-6 Dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB78 connectors (from connectors X1 to X2) No. of FOMD E1 Interface Connected to X1 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 No. of PV4 E1 Interface Connected to X2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 No. of PV8 E1 Interface Connected to X2 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 Slot 6 PV8 Slot That Provides E1 Interfaces Slot 5

Table 11-7 lists the dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB78 connectors (from connectors X1 to X3).
11-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

11 Connecting Signal Cables

Table 11-7 Dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB78 connectors (from connectors X1 to X3) No. of FOMD E1 Interface Connected to X1 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 No. of PV4 E1 Interface Connected to X2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 No. of PV8 E1 Interface Connected to X2 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 Slot 6 PV8 Slot That Provides E1 Interfaces Slot 5

Connecting the RSP10 frame The SSM frame is connected to the UAFM frame through E1 interfaces on the MOMD. The MOMD provides the E1 cables with two types of connectors, that is, DB44 and DB78 connectors. Figure 11-24 shows the dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB44 connectors. Figure 11-24 8 E1 cables of low-density frames in rear-access cabinets
Pos1

Pos44

W1 X1 X2 W2 X3

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

abc d

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

abc d

Table 11-8 lists the dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB44 connectors (from connectors X1 to X2).

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-23

11 Connecting Signal Cables

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Table 11-8 Dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB44 connectors (from connectors X1 to X2) No. of FOMD E1 Interface Connected to X1 0 4 1 5 No. of E1 Interface for Upper Header Pins 17 24 Connected to X2 1 5 2 6 No. of E1 Interface for Upper Header Pins 25 32 Connected to X2 3 7 4 8

Table 11-9 lists the dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB44 connectors (from connectors X1 to X3). Table 11-9 Dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB44 connectors (from connectors X1 to X3) No. of FOMD E1 Interface Connected to X1 2 6 3 7 No. of E1 Interface for Upper Header Pins 17 24 Connected to X3 1 5 2 6 No. of E1 Interface for Upper Header Pins 25 32 Connected to X3 3 7 4 8

Figure 11-25 shows the dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB78 connectors. Figure 11-25 16 E1 cables of low-density frames in rear-access cabinets
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

X5

abcd

X1

W2 W1 X3

X4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

abc d

Pos 1 X2

Pos 78

11-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

11 Connecting Signal Cables

Table 11-10 lists the dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB78 connectors (from connectors X1 to X2). Table 11-10 Dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB78 connectors (from connectors X1 to X2) No. of MOMD E1 Interface Connected to X1 8 12 9 13 No. of E1 Interface for Upper Header Pins 17 24 Connected to X2 1 5 2 6 No. of E1 Interface for Upper Header Pins 17 24 Connected to X2 3 7 4 8

Table 11-11 lists the dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB78 connectors (from connectors X1 to X3). Table 11-11 Dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB78 connectors (from connectors X1 to X3) No. of MOMD E1 Interface Connected to X1 10 14 11 15 No. of E1 Interface for Upper Header Pins 17 24 Connected to X3 1 5 2 6 No. of E1 Interface for Upper Header Pins 17 24 Connected to X3 3 7 4 8

Table 11-12 lists the dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB78 connectors (from connectors X1 to X4). Table 11-12 Dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB78 connectors (from connectors X1 to X4) No. of MOMD E1 Interface Connected to X1 16 20 17 21 No. of E1 Interface for Upper Header Pins 17 24 Connected to X4 1 5 2 6 No. of E1 Interface for Upper Header Pins 17 24 Connected to X4 3 7 4 8

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-25

11 Connecting Signal Cables

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Table 11-13 lists the dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB78 connectors (from connectors X1 to X5). Table 11-13 Dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB78 connectors (from connectors X1 to X5) No. of MOMD E1 Interface Connected to X1 18 22 19 23
l

No. of E1 Interface for Upper Header Pins 17 24 Connected to X5 1 5 2 6

No. of E1 Interface for Upper Header Pins 17 24 Connected to X5 3 7 4 8

Connecting to the HABD frame The tailor-made internal trunk cable that connects the SSM-4 and the HABD frames are of two types. All these two cables are twisted pair cables with characteristic impedance as 120 ohms. They are used to transmit the 16E1 signal.

The cable provides 16E1 interfaces. The DB68 interface at one end is connected to the E1 transfer interface of the E1TF in the HADB frame. Two DB44 interfaces at the other end are connected to the 8E1 interface of the two FOMDs in the SSM-4 frame. The cable provides 16E1 interfaces. The DB68 interface at one end is connected to the E1 transfer interface of the E1TF in the HADB frame. The DB78 interface at the other end is connected to the 16E1 interface of the FOMD in the SSM-4 frame.

Figure 11-26 shows the connections of the trunk cables between the SSM-4 frame and the HABD frame in standard configuration.

11-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

11 Connecting Signal Cables

Figure 11-26 Connecting trunk cables between the SSM-4 frame and HABD frame
16E1 (DB44-DB68) 16E1 (DB78-DB68)

HABD(1)

HABD(1)

HABD(1)

E1TF HABF

E1TF HABF

E1TF HABF

HABD(2)

HABD(2)

HABD(2)

SSM-4 OMD H66-22 H66-22

16E1 H66-22

Connecting to the HABA frame The tailor-made internal trunk cable that connects the SSM-4 and the HABA frames are of 8E1 and 16E1. All these two cables are twisted pair cables with characteristic impedance as 120 ohms.

The cable provides 8E1 interfaces. The DB44 interface at one end is connected to the 8E1 interface (DB44) of the FOMD in the SSM frame. The DB44 interface at the other end is connected to the E1 transfer interface of the HWCB in the HABA frame. The cable provides 16E1 interfaces. The DB78 interface at one end is connected to the 16E1 interface (DB78) of the FOMD in the SSM frame. Two DB44 interfaces at the other end are connected to the E1 transfer interface of the HWCB in two HABA main frames.

Figure 11-27 shows the connections of trunk cables between the SSM-4 frame and HABA frame in standard configuration.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-27

11 Connecting Signal Cables

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 11-27 Connecting trunk cables between the SSM-4 frame and HABA frame

8E1 16E1

HWCB

HWCB

HWCB

HABA

HABA

HABA

HABA SSM-4
OMD

HABA 8E1 N66-22

HABA

N66-22

N66-22

Connecting HW Cables Between UAM Main Frames and UAM Subframes


The main frame of the UAM connects to the subframe with HW cables.
l

Cascading the UAFM frame with the UAFS frame Figure 11-28 shows the cascading between the UAFM frame and the UAFS frame.

11-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

11 Connecting Signal Cables

Figure 11-28 Cascading between the UAFM main frame and UAFS subframe
1#HWC 8HW-1

HW

UAFS1

UAFS3

HWCAHWCA

UAFM

HW

UAFS2

1#HWC 8HW-2

UAFS4

Table 11-14 lists the description of cascading between the UAFM main frame and the UAFS subframe. Table 11-14 Description of cascading between the UAFM main frame and the UAFS subframe Subframe No. UAFS1 UAFS2 UAFS3 UAFS4 Cascaded HWCA Location (Front View) At the left side At the left side At the right side At the right side HW Nos. for the RSP Board in Slot 3 1619 2427 3235 4043 HW Nos. for the RSP Board in Slot 4 2023 2831 3639 3639

Cascading the RSP10 frame with the RSP14 frame Figure 11-29 shows the cascading between the RSP10 frame and the RSP14 frame.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

HW

HW

11-29

11 Connecting Signal Cables

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 11-29 Cascading between the RSP10 main frame and RSP14 subframe
HWC A B C D E F G H HGB

RSPR RSPL

HIB

a b

c d

The HGB is the backplane of the RSP10 frame. The HGB provides HWC interfaces to cascade the subframe. Table 11-15 lists the HWC interfaces of the RSP10 frame. Table 11-15 Description of HWC interfaces of the RSP10 frame Interface ID A B C D HW No. 1619 2023 2427 2831 Pins 18 916 1724 2532

11-30

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

11 Connecting Signal Cables

Interface ID E F G H

HW No. 3235 3639 4043 4447

Pins 2532 4148 4956 5764

The HIB is the backplane of the RSP14 frame. The HIB provides HW interfaces to cascade the main frame. Table 11-16 lists the HW interfaces of the RSP14 frame. Table 11-16 Description of HW interfaces of the RSP14 frame Interface ID a b c d Slot No. for the RSP Board 10 10 9 9 No. in the RSP Board 14 58 14 58 Pins 1724 2532 1724 2532

At present, there is another kind of HW cable that provides two connectors to connect with subframes. Refer to Figure 11-30. Figure 11-30 HW cable with two connectors
RIGHT RSP(DOWN)(17~24)/ (25~32)

HWC

LEFT RSP(DOWN)(17~24)/ (25~32)

Refer to Table 11-17.


Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-31

11 Connecting Signal Cables

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Table 11-17 Description of HW cables with two connectors ID LEFT RSP(DOWN)(1724)/(2532) RIGHT RSP(DOWN)(1724)/(25 32) Location RSPL RSPR HW No. The first two HW Nos. of the HWC interface The last two HW Nos. of the HWC interface

If the connector labeled "HWC" connects to pins 1 to 8 of the HWC interface of the RSP10 frame, HW Nos. 16 and 17 are allocated for the RSP board in slot 9, and HW Nos. 18 and 19 are allocated for the RSP board in slot 10.
l

Cascading the high-density main frame HABD with the extended frame HABF in the frontaccess cabinet Figure 11-31 shows the connections of the HW cables between high-density UA frames in the front-access cabinet H66-22. Figure 11-31 Connections of the HW cables between high-density UA frames in the frontaccess cabinet
HWCF HW cable

HABD(1) HWTF (1)

HABF (1)

HWTF

HABD(2) (1)

(1): Cabling-out area for subscriber cables

Cascading high-density main frame HABA with HABA in the rear-access cabinet Figure 11-32 shows the connections of the HW cables between high-density UA frames in the rear-access cabinet N66-22.

11-32

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

11 Connecting Signal Cables

Figure 11-32 Connections of the HW cables between high-density UA frames in the rearaccess cabinet
HW Cable

HWCB HABA HW

HABA HW HWCB

11.2.3 Connections of Internal Cables in UA Frames


This describes the test and alarm cables that must be connected in the UA frame to realize the function of test and alarm report. The LVDS cables must be connected when HABD and HABF high-density UA frames are installed in the H66-22 cabinet.

Connecting Test and Alarm Cables in Low-Density and Front-Access Cabinets


Figure 11-33 shows the connections of the test and alarm cables when three front-access UA frames are installed in the H66-22 cabinet.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-33

11 Connecting Signal Cables

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 11-33 Connections of test and alarm cables between three front-access UA frames

UAFM cabling area

TEST&ERROR

TEST&ERROR TEST&ERROR

UAFS cabling area

TEST&ERROR TEST&ERROR

UAFS cabling area

Figure 11-34 shows the connections of the test and alarm cables when two front-access UA frames are installed in the H66-22 cabinet.

11-34

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

11 Connecting Signal Cables

Figure 11-34 Connections of test and alarm cables between two front-access UA frames
TEST&ERROR

UAFS cabling area

TEST&ERROR TEST&ERROR

TEST&ERROR

UAFS cabling area

Connecting Test and Alarm Cables in High-Density and Front-Access Cabinets


Figure 11-35 shows the connections of the test and alarm cables when HABD and HABF highdensity UA frames are installed in the H66-22 cabinet.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-35

11 Connecting Signal Cables

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 11-35 Connections of test and alarm cables between high-density and front-access cabinets
HWCF RSP/PV8 SIO2 JTD8JTD7 JTD9 ESC HABD(1) HWTF (1)

HABF (1)

HABD(2) HWTF (1)

(1): Cabling-out area for subscriber cables

Connecting Test and Alarm Cables Between Rear-Access Cabinets


Figure 11-36 shows the connections of the test and alarm cables when five rear-access UA frames are installed in the N66-22 cabinet.

11-36

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

11 Connecting Signal Cables

Figure 11-36 Connections of test and alarm cables for rear-access UA cabinets
JB3 JA2 JA1 JA5 JA4 JT1

RSP10

JB4 JT2

RSP14

JA2 JA1 JA5 JA4 JT2 JT1

JA2 JA1

RSP14

JA5 JT2 JA4 JT1

RSP14

JA2 JA1 JA5 JA4 JT2 JT1

JA2 JA1

RSP14

JA5 JT2 JA4 JT1

Alarm cable Test cable

NOTE

The test and alarm cables are not required in rear-access and high-density cabinets.

Connecting LVDS Cables


Figure 11-37 shows the connections of the LVDS cables when high-density UA frames such as the HABD and HABF are installed in the H66-22 cabinet.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-37

11 Connecting Signal Cables

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 11-37 Connections of LVDS cables


H L A F 0 H L A F 1 H L A F 2 H L A F 3

HABD(1) (1)

HABF (1) H L E F 0 H L E F 1 H L E F 2 H L E F 3

HABD(2) (1)

(1): Cabling-out area for subscriber cables

11.3 Connecting Monitoring Cables


This describes how to connect the monitoring cables.

Context
The monitoring cables can be connected in the following applications:
l l l l l

Front-Access Cabinet in TG-Only Application Front-Access Cabinet in Low-Density AG Application Front-Access Cabinet in High-Density AG Application Rear-Access Cabinet in Low-Density AG Application Rear-Access Cabinet in High-Density AG Application

The monitoring cables are connected before delivery. Check the connections according to 11.2.1 Connections of Monitoring Cables.

11.4 Connecting Trunk Cables


The trunk cables are used for the trunk connection of the TDM signals. The trunk cable includes the E1/T1 trunk cables between the SSM frame and the UA frame, tailor-made internal trunk cables between the SSM-4 frame and the UA frame, internal HW trunk cables in the UA frame, E3/T3 trunk cables. 11.4.1 Connecting E1/T1 Cables in the SSM Frame This describes how to connect the E1/T1 cables in the SSM frame. 11.4.2 Connecting E1/T1 Cables in the UA Frame This describes how to connect the E1/T1 cables in the UA frame.
11-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

11 Connecting Signal Cables

11.4.3 Connecting Tailor-Made Internal Trunk Cables Between the SSM-4 Frame and the UA Frame 11.4.4 Connecting Internal HW Trunk Cables in the UA Frame 11.4.5 Connecting E3/T3 Trunk Cables This describes how to connect the E3/T3 trunk cables.

11.4.1 Connecting E1/T1 Cables in the SSM Frame


This describes how to connect the E1/T1 cables in the SSM frame.

Context
The internal E1/T1 trunk cables are the 75-ohm/120-ohm E1 trunk cable and 100-ohm T1 trunk cable. These cables use the DB44 or DB78 connector. The DB44 connector provides 8 E1/T1 signals and the DB78 connector provides 16 E1/T1 signals. Connect one end of the E1/T1 trunk cable to the MOMD board of the UMG8900 (UG01MOMD), and connect the other end to the cable distribution frame. The E1/T1 cable connected to the MOMD board is taken as an example to describe the connections of trunk cables. Refer to Figure 11-38. Figure 11-38 Connections of E1/T1 trunk cables
1

1. E1/T1 cable of the DB78 connector

OMD

OMD

OFFLINE

RUN ALM ACT

E1/T1_8-23

E1/T1_0-7

OMC FE1

FE0

2M_ 2M_ IN OUT

2. E1/T1 cable of the DB44 connector

Procedure
Step 1 Insert the DB78 connector of trunk cables to the 16E1 interface on the MOMD board. Insert the DB44 connector of trunk cables to the 8E1 interface on the MOMD. Step 2 Place the trunk cables outside the cabinet to the digital distribution frame (DDF) along the cabling rack or cabling trough. If the trunk cable is 75-ohm coaxial cable, make the SMB connector on spot and connect the cable to the DDF. If the trunk cable is the 120-ohm twisted pair cable, use the wire punch down tool to fix the twisted pair cable to the DDF.
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-39

11 Connecting Signal Cables

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

The length of the cables to be laid is decided during the site survey. The proper redundancy is required. If the cable is not long enough, you must replace it with the proper cable. In some special cases, you can use the dedicated coaxial cable connector to splice cables. Soldering is prohibited. ----End

11.4.2 Connecting E1/T1 Cables in the UA Frame


This describes how to connect the E1/T1 cables in the UA frame.

Context
Figure 11-39 shows the connections of E1/T1 cables in the UAFM frame. Figure 11-39 Connections of E1/T1 cables in the UAFM frame
W1-Left PV8/PV4 (58)E1 W2-Right PV8/PV4 (58)E1

W1

W2

PV8 E1

PV4 E1

W2

W1

W2-Right PV8/PV4 (14)E1

W1-Left PV8/PV4 (14)E1

11-40

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

11 Connecting Signal Cables

11.4.3 Connecting Tailor-Made Internal Trunk Cables Between the SSM-4 Frame and the UA Frame
Context
The UMG8900 provides the tailor-made internal trunk cable that connects the SSM-4 and the UA frames.

Procedure
l Connect the trunk cables between the SSM-4 frame and the low-density UA frame (UAFM) in front-access cabinet. 1. 2. 3. l Insert the DB44 or DB78 connector at one end of the trunk cable to the E1 interface on the MOMD. Place the trunk cables to the related frames along the vertical cabling troughs on the columns at two sides. Insert the D-50PIN-male connector of the trunk cable to the E1 interface of the UAFM frame.

Connect the trunk cables between the SSM-4 frame and the low-density UA frame (RSP10) in rear-access cabinet. 1. 2. 3. Insert the DB44 or DB78 connector at one end of the trunk cable to the E1 interface on the MOMD. Place the trunk cables to the related frames along the vertical cabling troughs on the columns at two sides. Insert the 4x8PIN female connector of the trunk cable to the E1 interface of the RSP10 frame.

Connect the trunk cables between the SSM-4 frame and the high-density UA frame (HABD) in front-access cabinet. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Insert the two DB44 connectors of the 16E1 cable of the first type respectively to the 8E1 interfaces of two MOMD in the SSM-4 frame. Place the trunk cables to frame HABD (1) on the top of the cabinet along the vertical cabling troughs on the columns at two sides. Insert the DB68 interface of the 16E1 cable of the first type to the E1 transfer interface on the E1TF in frame HADB (1). Insert the DB78 interface of the 16E1 cable of the second type to the 16E1 interface on the MOMD in the SSM-4 frame. Place the trunk cables to frame HABD (1) on the top of the cabinet along the vertical cabling troughs on the columns at two sides. Insert the DB68 interface of the 16E1 cable of the second type to the E1 transfer interface on the E1TF in frame HADB (1). Repeat Step 4 to Step 6 to connect the trunk cable between the SSM-4 frame and the HABD frame of adjacent cabinets.

Connect the trunk cables between the SSM-4 frame and the high-density UA frame (HABA) in rear-access cabinet. 1. Insert the DB78 interface of the 16E1 cable to the 16E1 interface on the MOMD in the SSM-4 frame.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-41

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

11 Connecting Signal Cables

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

2. 3.

Place the trunk cables along the vertical cabling troughs on the columns at two sides. Insert two D44 connectors at the other end of the 16E1 cable respectively to the E1 transfer interface on the HWCB of two HABA main frames in the current cabinet and the adjacent cabinet. Insert the DB44 interface of the 8E1 cable to the 8E1 interface on the MOMD in the SSM-4 frame. Place the trunk cables along the vertical cabling troughs on the columns at two sides. Insert the DB44 interface at the other end of the 8E1 cable to the E1 transfer interface on the HWCB of the HABA main frame in the third cabinet.

4. 5. 6. ----End

11.4.4 Connecting Internal HW Trunk Cables in the UA Frame


Context
For details on connecting the internal HW trunk cables in the UA frame, see 11.2.2 Connections of UAM Cables.

11.4.5 Connecting E3/T3 Trunk Cables


This describes how to connect the E3/T3 trunk cables.

Context
One end of the E3/T3 internal trunk cables of the UMG8900 has the SMB female connector, and the other end has no connector. The SMB connector is inserted at the E3/T3 receiving and transmitting ends on the MOMD (UG02MOMD). The idle end is connected to the related transmission device through the cable distribution frame. Make the proper connector at the idle end based on the type of the cable distribution frame in the equipment room. The E3/T3 cable connected to the UG02 MOMD is taken as an example to describe the connections of trunk cables. Refer to Figure 11-40. Figure 11-40 Connections of E3/T3 trunk cables
1

2
OMD
T AC

3
OMD RUN ALM ACT

1. Connection to cable distribution frame

OFFLINE

OMC FE1

FE0

2M_ 2M_ IN OUT

NK LI

RX

TX

2. Signal receiving end

3. Signal transmitting end

11-42

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

11 Connecting Signal Cables

Procedure
Step 1 Insert the SMB connector of the E3/T3 cable to the E3/T3 receiving and transmitting ends on the MOMD. Step 2 Place the trunk cables outside the cabinet to the digital distribution frame (DDF) along the cabling rack or cabling trough. Make the proper connector based on the type of the cable distribution frame in the equipment room. The length of the cables to be laid is decided during the site survey. The proper redundancy is required. If the cable is not long enough, you must replace it with the proper cable. In some special cases, you can use the dedicated coaxial cable connector to splice cables. Soldering is prohibited. ----End

11.5 Connecting Signal Cables of Access Service in the UA Frame


11.5.1 Connecting POTS Subscriber Cables 11.5.2 Connecting ATI Subscriber Cables 11.5.3 Connecting SDL Subscriber Cables and Trunk Cables 11.5.4 Connecting HSL Subscriber Cables

11.5.1 Connecting POTS Subscriber Cables


Context
Comply with the following rules when arranging cables:
l l l l l

Place the cables in order and keep the sheath intact. Ensure the necessary redundancy on the cable length. Route different types of cables separately. Ensure the cables comply with the planned scale, path, cross sectional area and position. Consider maintenance and expansion in the future.

11.5.2 Connecting ATI Subscriber Cables


Context
Comply with the following rules when arranging cables:
l

Place the cables in order and keep the sheath intact.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-43

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

11 Connecting Signal Cables


l l l l

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Ensure the necessary redundancy on the cable length. Route different types of cables separately. Ensure the cables comply with the planned scale, path, cross sectional area and position. Consider maintenance and expansion in the future.

11.5.3 Connecting SDL Subscriber Cables and Trunk Cables


Context
The 32port SDL subscriber cable is equipped with a DB68 connector at one end, and the other end is connected to the cable distribution frame. Connect the subscriber cable as follows:
l

Connect the 3 x 8-PIN connector at the line card side to pin rows 18 or 916 of the upper HEADER and pin rows 1724 or 2532 of the lower HEADER on the corresponding backplane. Connect the other end (bare wire) to the DDF.

11.5.4 Connecting HSL Subscriber Cables


Context
The HSL subscriber cable is equipped with a DB64 connector at one end, and the other end is connected to the cable distribution frame. Connect the subscriber cable as follows:
l

Connect the 3 x 8-PIN connector at the line card side to pin rows 2532 of the lower HEADER on the corresponding backplane. Connect the other end (bare wire) to the DDF.

11.6 Connecting BITS Clock Cables


This describes how to connect the BITS clock cable that is used to access the synchronous clock signals provided by external BITS.

Context
One end of the BITS clock cable is connected to the MOMD of the UMG8900. The other end is connected to the digital distribution frame (DDF). The clock signals between the external clock device and the UMG8900 must be transferred through the DDF. Figure 11-41 shows the connections of BITS clock cables.

11-44

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

11 Connecting Signal Cables

Figure 11-41 Connections of BITS clock cables


1

2
OMD
OFFLINE

3
OMD

RUN ALM ACT

E1/T1_8-23

E1/T1_0-7

OMC FE1

FE0

2M_ 2M_ IN OUT

1. Connection to DDF

2. 2 Mbit/s clock cable (input)

3. 2 Mbit/s clock cable (output)

Procedure
Step 1 Insert the connector of the BITS clock cable to the 2M_IN interface of the MOMD. Step 2 Put the cables in the cabling trough, and then distribute them to the left and right sides. After that, place the cables through the cable-through holes on the top of the cabinets along the vertical cabling troughs on the columns at two sides. Step 3 Place the signal cables outside the cabinet to the DDF along the cabling rack or the cabling trough. Step 4 Make the connector to connect the other end of the BITS clock cable to the DDF according to the project planning. Step 5 Arrange the signal cables in order, bind them, and fix them in the cabling trough and wire bushing. Step 6 Check that the cables are connected correctly and the labels are intact. ----End

11.7 Connecting Service Bearer Network Cables


This describes how to connect the service bearer network cables that connect the UMG8900 and the local maintenance terminal (LMT), media gateway controller (MGC), or another UMG8900.

Context
The service bearer network cables include the network cables that are used to carry and control data (maintenance, signaling, and H.248). When the UMG8900 is directly connected to the PC, router, or MGC, use crossover network cables. When they are connected through the hub or Ethernet switch, use straight-through network cables. When laying the service bearer network cables, note the following:
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-45

11 Connecting Signal Cables


l

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Before laying the service bearer network cable, measure the cable length to choose a proper cable. When the service bearer network cables are laid in underfloor cabling mode, leave proper length of the cable at the bending area at the bottom of the cabinet. You cannot stretch the cables tight when they are laid outside. When the service bearer network cables are laid in overhead cabling mode, place the external network cables along two sides of the cabinet, and then distribute them to the frames one by one. Note that the cables cannot be placed into the cabinet from other positions or directions. When the service bearer network cables are in overhead cabling mode, leave proper length of the cable at the bending area at the bottom of the cabinet. When the cabling ladder is used, place the cables at the side of the cabling ladder. When the distance between the cabling ladder and the cabling trough on the top of the cabinet is less than 0.8 m [2.6 ft.], place the cables in the cabling trough on the top of the cabinet through the cabling ladder. When the distance between the cabling ladder and the cabling trough on the top of the cabinet is more than 0.8 m [2.6 ft.], fix the cables on the downward cabling ladder to avoid damage caused by the excessive force.

Table 11-18 lists the pin assignment of service bearer network cables in different centralized forwarding modes. Table 11-18 Pin assignment of service bearer network cables Centralized Forwarding Mode Convergence Position 1 Position 2 Remarks

FE0 bearer interface on the MOMD.

Related devices such as the PC, router, or MGC

For all control data (maintenance, signaling, and H. 248) and bearer data For maintenance data, signaling, and H.248 For bearer data Foe maintenance data For bearer data For other control data (signaling and H.248)

Dichotomy

OMC interface on the MOMD FE0 bearer interface on the MOMD

Trisection

OMC interface on the MOMD FE1 bearer interface on the MOMD FE0 control interface on the MVPD

See the construction file for the pin assignment.

11-46

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

11 Connecting Signal Cables

Procedure
Step 1 Make the connector and check that it is good. Step 2 Insert the RJ45 connector of the service bearer cable to FE interfaces or OMC interfaces on the MOMD. Step 3 Put the network cables in the cabling trough, and then distribute them to the left and right sides. After that, place the network cables through the cable-through holes on the top of the cabinets along the vertical cabling troughs on the columns at two sides. Step 4 Place the network cables outside the cabinet to the related device along the cabling rack or the cabling trough. Step 5 Connect the other end of the network cables to the DDF or related device according to the project planning. Step 6 Arrange the network cables in order, bind them, and fix them in the cabling trough and wire bushing. Note the following:
l l l l

The bending radians of the network cables are the same. The labels and cable ties face the same direction. Do not fold the network cables and leave proper length of the cables at the bending area. Bind the cables with straps in an equal way and leave proper length of the cables at the bending area.

Step 7 Check that the cables are connected correctly and the labels are intact. ----End

11.8 Connecting Service Bearer Optical Fibers


This describes how to connect the service bearer optical fibers that connect the UMG8900 and the external optical distribution frame (ODF), the external optical interface, or the transmission device.

Context
When the UMG8900 is interconnected with the peer device and the connection is achieved through the jumper, make sure that the interface type on the UMG8900 side is the LC/PC and the interface type of the other end is the same as that of the interconnected device. Choose a fiber connector based on the optical interface type of the peer device that is connected to the network interface module of the UMG8900. The single-mode optical interface (yellow) can only use the single-mode fiber and the multi-mode optical interface can only use the multimode fiber. Before connecting optical fibers, make sure that the connector type and fiber type are applicable to the type of the adopted optical interface. When using the optical fiber, note the following:
l

Make sure that the tail fiber is not pressed or stretched for a long time (such as hanging heavy things). Note the tightness when binding the tail fibers with the strap.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-47

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

11 Connecting Signal Cables


l

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Fix the flange and fiber attenuator in the planned positions and make sure that the fixing is proper to facilitate daily maintenance and capacity expansion in the future. Make sure that the connections of the optical connector and optical interface are reliable. The unused connector of the optical fiber must be covered with the protection tube to avoid the pollution. When the optical fiber is laid, you must use the corrugated plastic protection tube or other protection tubes to prevent the damage to the fiber. In addition, polish the ends of the protection tubes. Make sure that there is no burr and sharp thing around the optical fiber. Twist the redundant tail fiber in a roll with fiber tray. Note that the roll cannot be too small and the number of circles must be minimal. The radius of the roll is not less than 20 times of outer diameter of the optical fiber. For examples, the minimal curvature radius of 2 mm [0.08 in.] single-core indoor fiber cannot be less than 40 mm [1.6 in.]. The minimal curvature radius of 3 mm [0.1 in.] single-core indoor fiber cannot be less than 60 mm [2.4 in.].

l l

l l

CAUTION
The service bearer optical fibers are external optical fibers of the UMG8900. You need to connect the service bearer optical fibers from the UMG8900 to the peer end such as the ODF, external optical interface, or transmission device. Then, coil the tail fibers at the peer end. The external optical fibers are laid from the optical module interfaces on the subboards of the MOMD of the UMG8900. The fibers are connected to the external ODF, external optical interface, or transmission device. See the construction file for the pin assignment.

CAUTION
l

When the optical fiber is laid, you must use the corrugated plastic protection tube or other protection tubes to prevent the damage to the fiber. When connecting the optical fibers, do not stare at or get close to the outlet of the optical fibers. The unused connector of the optical fiber must be covered with the protection tube to avoid the pollution.

Procedure
Step 1 Insert the LC/PC connectors of the service bearer optical fiber to interfaces on the optical module of the MOMD subboard. Step 2 Put the optical fibers in the cabling trough, and then distribute them to the left and right sides. After that, place the optical fiber through the cable-through holes on the top of the cabinets along the vertical cabling troughs on the columns at two sides. Coil and hang the redundant tail fibers at the ODF, external optical interface, or transmission device.
11-48 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

11 Connecting Signal Cables

Step 3 Place the optical cables outside the cabinet to the ODF or related device along the cabling rack or the cabling trough. When the optical fiber is laid outside the cabinet, you must use the corrugated plastic protection tube and polish the ends of the protection tube. Step 4 Connect the other end of the optical cables to the ODF or related device according to the project planning. You can also twist the redundant tail fibers on the ODF. Step 5 Arrange the optical fibers in order, bind them, and fix them in the cabling trough and wire bushing. Do not bind the fibers with the plastic strap. Bind them with the special fiber strap. The optical fibers from different boards must be bound separately. Bind the fibers in the cabinet with special plastic strap to protect the fibers. Step 6 Check that the cables are connected correctly and the labels are intact. ----End

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-49

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

12 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinet Fittings

12

Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinet Fittings

About This Chapter


This describes how to install N66-22 or H66-22 cabinet fittings. 12.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions Read this part carefully before installing the cabinet to avoid the reconstruction and damage to devices and injury to human bodies. 12.2 Introduction to Fittings of Cabinet Doors This describes the fittings of cabinet doors. 12.3 Installing Door Lintels The door lintels may be installed before delivery. Therefore, this part is optional. 12.4 Installing Cabinet Side Panels This describes how to install cabinet side panels. 12.5 Installing Front and Back Doors This describes how to install front and back doors. 12.6 Connecting PGND Cables for Cabinet Doors This describes how to connect the protection ground (PGND) cables for cabinet doors. 12.7 Recovering the ESD-Preventive Floor After installing the cabinet on the ESD-preventive floor, install the floor holder to support the antistatic floor around the cabinet, and then recover the antistatic floor around the cabinet.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12-1

12 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinet Fittings

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

12.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions


Read this part carefully before installing the cabinet to avoid the reconstruction and damage to devices and injury to human bodies.

Installation Specifications
l l

Make sure that the cabinet doors can be opened and closed easily after they are installed. Grounding cables and grounding terminals of the cabinet door are securely connected.

Precautions
l l

Transport and install the cabinet doors with care to avoid damage. Wear antistatic gloves and antistatic wrist strap during installation.

12.2 Introduction to Fittings of Cabinet Doors


This describes the fittings of cabinet doors. Figure 12-1 shows the fittings of cabinet doors, including side panels, front door, and back door. Figure 12-1 Fittings of cabinet door

3
2. Right door 3. Side panels

1. Left door

NOTE

The opening handle is located on the right door.

12-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

12 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinet Fittings

12.3 Installing Door Lintels


The door lintels may be installed before delivery. Therefore, this part is optional.

Context
An N66-22 cabinet has four door lintels. They are installed on the upper and lower enclosure frames at the front and back of the cabinet. An H66-22 cabinet has two door lintels. They are installed on the upper and lower enclosure frames at the front of the cabinet.

Procedure
Step 1 Align the door lintels with the mount brackets on the upper and lower enclosure frames, and put the hooks of the door lintels into the slots of the mount brackets. Refer to Figure 12-2. Figure 12-2 Installing door lintels
1 5

2 3

1. M3 countersunk screw

2. Door lintel

3. Support

4. Door lintel hook

5. Mount bracket slot

Step 2 Use four M3 countersunk screws to fasten the door lintels. Figure 12-3 shows the cabinet with door lintels.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12-3

12 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinet Fittings

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 12-3 Cabinets with top covers

1. M3 countersunk screw

----End

12.4 Installing Cabinet Side Panels


This describes how to install cabinet side panels.

Context
Side panels must be installed at both ends of a row of cabinets. Side panels include left and right panels.

Procedure
Step 1 Loosen the clamping pole on the flat column. Step 2 Make the slot of a side panel onto the clamping pole downward. Then buckle the side panel into the open slot of the mount bracket. Step 3 Align the installation holes and fasten the two M6 countersunk screws. ----End

12.5 Installing Front and Back Doors


This describes how to install front and back doors.

12-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

12 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinet Fittings

Context

CAUTION
Before installing the front and back doors, complete the installation of all kinds of frames, internal components, and circuit boards, as well as the connection of cables. The front and back doors can be installed after all other hardware devices are installed completely. The front door and back door of the cabinet are double-swing doors. Figure 12-4 shows the installation of the front and back doors. Figure 12-4 Installing the front and back doors
2

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12-5

12 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinet Fittings

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Align the lower pin on the door with the pin hole on the lower enclosure frame, and install the doors, as shown in (1) in Figure 12-4. Figure 12-5 shows the front and back doors after being installed on the cabinet. Figure 12-5 Installing the bottom of front and back doors

Step 2 Pull down the shuffle pin on the top of the door. Then, align the hole of the shuffle pin with the pin hole on the upper enclosure frame. Release the shuffle pin to let the shuffle pin return to the original position through spring. Thus, the door panel is installed on the cabinet, as shown in (2) in Figure 12-4. Figure 12-6 shows the shuffle pin. Figure 12-6 Shuffle pins

Step 3 Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 to install the doors of all cabinets.

12-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide


NOTE

12 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinet Fittings

l l

The shuffle pins are installed on the door panels before delivery. After the front and back doors and side panels are installed, connect PGND cables at the positions of lower pins to ensure reliable grounding for the cabinet. For more details, see 12.6 Connecting PGND Cables for Cabinet Doors. After the front and back doors are installed, stick the product brand in the concave on the upper part of the front door.

Step 4 After the front and back doors are installed, check if the doors can be opened and closed smoothly. Opening the lock, refer to Figure 12-7. Figure 12-7 Opening the lock

Closing the lock, refer to Figure 12-8. Figure 12-8 Closing the lock

----End

12.6 Connecting PGND Cables for Cabinet Doors


This describes how to connect the protection ground (PGND) cables for cabinet doors.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect PGND cables around the lower pins of the side panels and doors. Connect the grounding points on the door panels and the grounding bolt on the cabinet base. Fasten the bolt. Refer to Figure 12-9 to Figure 12-14.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12-7

12 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinet Fittings

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 12-9 Cabinet door before the PGND cable is connected

Figure 12-10 Loosening the PGND bolt of the door

12-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

12 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinet Fittings

Figure 12-11 Connecting the PGND cable of the door

Figure 12-12 Installing the washer

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12-9

12 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinet Fittings

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 12-13 Fastening the bolt

Figure 12-14 Cabinet door with the PGND cable connected

Step 2 Contact the door panel and grounding bolt on the cabinet base with the black pencil and red pencil of the multimeter. Check whether the PGND cable is in good contact. Refer to Figure 12-15.

12-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

12 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinet Fittings

Figure 12-15 Testing the Insulation

----End

12.7 Recovering the ESD-Preventive Floor


After installing the cabinet on the ESD-preventive floor, install the floor holder to support the antistatic floor around the cabinet, and then recover the antistatic floor around the cabinet.

Prerequisite
l l l

Make sure that the floor holder components and M12x30 bolt are available. Make sure that spring washers 12 and flat washers 12 are available. Make sure that the spanner is available.

Context
The holder (in the floor holder-slide rail assemblies) is used to support antistatic floor around the cabinet.

Procedure
Step 1 The floor holder (in the floor holder-guide rail assemblies) is used to support antistatic floor around the cabinet. The holder includes front floor holder, back floor holder, and side floor holder. Front and back floor holders are fixed on the holder fixing components, and side floor holders are fixed on the supports at both ends of a cabinet row. Use M12 bolts, spring washers, and flat washers to fix the front and back floor holders of each cabinet onto the holder fixing components. Insert M12x30 bolts through the bolt holes of front and back floor holders to fix the side floor holders onto the supports at both ends of a cabinet row. Refer to Figure 12-16.
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12-11

12 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinet Fittings

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 12-16 Fixing floor holders and guide rails

4 3 2 1 5 2 6 7

2 1

1. M12x30 bolt 2. Spring washer 12 5. Bolt 12

3. Flat washer 12

4. Fixing component for front floor holder

6. Fixing component for side floor 7. Side floor holder holder

Step 2 Loosen the bolts M12, and then adjust the height of the floor holder to make its upper plane on the same height as the lower plane of the antistatic floor. After that, tighten the bolts M12. Step 3 Cut the antistatic floor around the cabinet to match the border of the cabinet according to actual conditions at site offices, and then recover the floor. ----End

12-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

13 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinet Fittings

13

Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinet Fittings

About This Chapter


This describes how to install normalized N66-22 cabinet fittings. 13.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions Read this part carefully before installing the cabinet to avoid the reconstruction and damage to devices and injury to human bodies. 13.2 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinet Side Panels This describes how to install normalized N66-22 cabinet side panels. 13.3 Installing Front and Rear Doors of Normalized N66-22 Cabinets This describes how to install front and back doors of the normalized N66-22 cabinets. 13.4 Connecting PGND Cables for Normalized N66-22 Cabinet Doors This describes how to connect the protection ground (PGND) cables for normalized N66-22 cabinet doors. 13.5 Recovering the ESD-Preventive Floor After installing the normalized N66-22 cabinet on the ESD-preventive floor, install the floor holder to support the antistatic floor around the cabinet, and then recover the antistatic floor around the cabinet.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13-1

13 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinet Fittings

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

13.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions


Read this part carefully before installing the cabinet to avoid the reconstruction and damage to devices and injury to human bodies.

Installation Specifications
l l

Make sure that the cabinet doors can be opened and closed easily after they are installed. Grounding cables and grounding terminals of the cabinet door are securely connected.

Precautions
l l

Transport and install the cabinet doors with care to avoid damage. Wear antistatic gloves and antistatic wrist strap during installation.

13.2 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinet Side Panels


This describes how to install normalized N66-22 cabinet side panels.

Context

CAUTION
l

For combined cabinets, you need to install the side panels of only the border cabinets in a row.

Procedure
Step 1 Install the grounding cable at the side panel. Step 2 Install the side panels and use eight M6x12 screws to fasten the side panels. Refer to Figure 13-1.

13-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

13 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinet Fittings

Figure 13-1 Installing side panels

----End

13.3 Installing Front and Rear Doors of Normalized N66-22 Cabinets


This describes how to install front and back doors of the normalized N66-22 cabinets.

Context

CAUTION
Before installing the front and back doors, complete the installation of all kinds of frames, internal components, and circuit boards, as well as the connection of cables. The front and back doors can be installed after all other hardware devices are installed completely.

Procedure
l Install the rear access cabinet doors 1. Align the lower pin of the door panel with the pin hole (the small hole) on the lower enclosure frame and insert the pin into the pin hole.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 13-3

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

13 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinet Fittings

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

2.

Pull down the hook pin at the upper part of the door panel. Align the hole of the hook pin with the pin hole (the small hole) on the upper enclosure frame. Release the hook pin and it bounces back to the original position. Refer to Figure 13-2. Figure 13-2 Installing the rear access cabinet doors

3. l 1. 2.

Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 to install the rear door. Refer to the steps for installing front door of the rear access cabinet to install the front door of the front access cabinet. Install the rear door and use eight M5x10 screws to fasten the rear door. Refer to Figure 13-3.

Install the front access cabinet doors

13-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

13 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinet Fittings

Figure 13-3 Installing the rear door of the front access cabinet

----End

13.4 Connecting PGND Cables for Normalized N66-22 Cabinet Doors


This describes how to connect the protection ground (PGND) cables for normalized N66-22 cabinet doors.

Procedure
Step 1 Loosen the bolts of the grounding terminals on the cabinet doors with a crosshead screwdriver. Refer to Figure 13-4.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13-5

13 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinet Fittings

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 13-4 Loosening the PGND bolt of the door

Step 2 Connect the OT terminals of the PGND cables to the grounding terminals of the cabinet doors. Then, install flat washers, spring washers, and nuts in order. Refer to Figure 13-5. Figure 13-5 Connecting the PGND cable of the door

Step 3 Tighten the bolt with a crosshead screwdriver. Refer to Figure 13-6.

13-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

13 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinet Fittings

Figure 13-6 Fastening the bolt

Step 4 Contact the door panel and grounding bolt on the cabinet base with the black pencil and red pencil of the multimeter. Check whether the PGND cable is in good contact. Refer to Figure 13-7. Figure 13-7 Testing the Insulation

Figure 13-8 shows the connected PGND cables of the front and back doors and side panels.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13-7

13 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinet Fittings

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 13-8 Connected PGND Cables

Step 5 Contact the door panel and grounding bolt on the cabinet base with the black pencil and red pencil of the multimeter. Check whether the PGND cable is in good contact. ----End

13.5 Recovering the ESD-Preventive Floor


After installing the normalized N66-22 cabinet on the ESD-preventive floor, install the floor holder to support the antistatic floor around the cabinet, and then recover the antistatic floor around the cabinet.

Prerequisite
l l l

Make sure that the floor holder components and M12x30 bolt are available. Make sure that spring washers 12 and flat washers 12 are available. Make sure that the spanner is available.

Context
NOTE

l l

The antistatic floor has been removed before you mark the installation position of the supports. For underfloor cabling, place the cables before you restore the antistatic floor.

Procedure
Step 1 Installing the front pallets
13-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

13 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinet Fittings

Fix the front pallet on the support by using the M12x30 bolts, spring washers, and flat washers. Refer to Figure 13-9. Figure 13-9 Installing the front pallets

M12x30

Step 2 Cut the antistatic floor according to the size of the cabinet. Restore the antistatic floor. Refer to Figure 13-10. Figure 13-10 Cutting and restoring the antistatic floor

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13-9

13 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinet Fittings

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

----End

13-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

14 Installing Peripherals

14
About This Chapter

Installing Peripherals

This describes how to install peripherals including terminals, alarm boxes, and EAC-2 environment monitoring device. 14.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions Read this part carefully before installing the peripherals. Familiarizing with the installation specifications and precautions can avoid reconstructing and damage to devices and injury to human bodies. 14.2 Installing Terminals This describes the connection mode and how to install the terminals. 14.3 Installing Alarm Boxes This describes the connection mode and how to install the alarm boxes.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14-1

14 Installing Peripherals

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

14.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions


Read this part carefully before installing the peripherals. Familiarizing with the installation specifications and precautions can avoid reconstructing and damage to devices and injury to human bodies.

Installation Specifications
l

The terminals are generally powered by 220 V AC power supply system. The system must have a protection grounding end and adopt 3-core plugs and sockets. The terminal and the UMG8900 can be connected with the communication cables such as network cables (with RJ45 connectors), RS232 and RS422 serial port cables. The local maintenance terminal (LMT) and the UMG8900 must be well grounded. The protection grounding cables of the LMT and the UMG8900 cabinet must be connected to the same protection grounding bar. The cross section of the protection grounding cable is not less than 4 mm2.

Precautions
All the peripherals must be well grounded to ensure personnel safety.

14.2 Installing Terminals


This describes the connection mode and how to install the terminals.

Context
The UMG8900 manages and maintains the devices through local maintenance terminal (LMT). The LMT adopts the universal PC as its hardware system. You need to install related hardware system to manage the device. The UMG8900 is often connected with multiple LMTs, through which the UMG8900 manages and maintains the devices. LMTs can be connected to the UMG8900 locally or remotely. Refer to Figure 14-1. Figure 14-1 Connection modes for the LMT
LMT LAN switch UMG8900

Local connection mode LMT LAN switch 1 Router 1 Router 2 LAN switch 2 UMG8900

Remote connection mode

14-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

14 Installing Peripherals

If an LMT is connected to the UMG8900 locally, it indicates that the LMT is connected to the OMC interface of the UMG8900 through LAN. That is, the PC with LMT software is connected to the LAN Switch through straight through network cable, and then connected to the OMC interface on the MOMD. If the LMT and the UMG8900 are not in the same network segment, use remote connection mode. That is, connect the LMT to the OMC interface of the UMG8900 through routers.

CAUTION
The terminals are generally powered by 220 V AC power supply system. The system must have a protection grounding end and adopt 3-core plugs and sockets. Ensure that the power is off before pulling or inserting the cable that connects to the serial or parallel ports of the computer.

Procedure
Step 1 Place the workstations in the specified location of the maintenance and monitoring room. Step 2 Install the computers and peripherals, such as the external modem, on workstations. Step 3 Connect the connection cables, such as the power cables of the terminals and signal cables to the monitor. Step 4 Connect one end of the cables to the terminals. Connect the other end of the cables to related devices in the equipment room through cabling trough or cabling rack. The cabling principles are similar to those of the external cables such as external signal cables and trunk cables. Step 5 Connect the terminals to the protection grounding bar in the maintenance and equipment room with the PGND cable. Step 6 Check whether the cables are connected and bound correctly. Make sure that the labels are pasted. ----End

14.3 Installing Alarm Boxes


This describes the connection mode and how to install the alarm boxes.

Context
The UMG8900 adopts universal alarm box provided by Huawei to implement alarm prompt function during the operations and service maintenance. The universal alarm box is of box-type structure and features high maneuverability, maintainability, and security. Figure 14-2 shows the appearance of the alarm box.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14-3

14 Installing Peripherals

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 14-2 Appearance of universal alarm boxes

The alarm box can be connected in two modes:


l

Connecting to the alarm management system of the local maintenance terminal (LMT) If the alarm box is connected to the alarm management of the LMT, the UMG8900 reports alarm information to the LMT. Then, the LMT forwards the information to the alarm box. The PC with alarm management system of the LMT communicates with the alarm box through RS232 serial ports.

Connecting to the UMG8900 If the alarm box is directly connected to the UMG8900, the UMG8900 is connected to the serial port of the alarm box through the ALARM interface provided on the transfer box of the main control frame. The interface complies with the RS422 standard. The alarm information can be reported to the alarm box directly through the ALARM interface provided by the main control frame.

For details on the method for installing the alarm box and connecting the cables, see the Universal Alarm Box User Manual delivered with the alarm box.

CAUTION
l

When the equipment is connected to the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power, ensure the red rocker switch is in the correct position before powering on the equipment. When the equipment is connected to the 220 V AC, the rocker switch must be in "230" position. When the equipment is connected to the 110 V AC, the rocker switch must be in "115" position. Choose proper fuse. Connect the equipment to the 110 V AC with the fuse of F, 2A, H, 250V. Connect the equipment to the 220 V AC with the fuse of F, 1A, H, 250V. Replace fuses with those of the same type.

14-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

14 Installing Peripherals

Procedure
Step 1 Drill four holes with diameter as 6 mm [0.2 in.] on the wall of the maintenance and monitoring room by using a percussion drill, according to the location specified in the engineering design file. In general, the bottom panel of the alarm box is 1500 mm [59 in.] above the floor after the installation. Step 2 Insert four 626 plastic expansion tubes into the fours holes separately. Insert four ST4.225 tapping screws into the plastic expansion tubes with 6 mm [0.2 in.] exposed to the air. Step 3 Hang the alarm box on the tapping screws. Fasten the tapping screws. Step 4 For details on the method for connecting the cables of the alarm box, see the Universal Alarm Box User Manual delivered with the alarm box. Step 5 Check whether the cables are connected correctly. If yes, affix the labels. Place the cables in order and bind them. ----End

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14-5

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

15 Checking Installation

15
About This Chapter
Prerequisite

Checking Installation

This describes how to check the installation.

After the entire hardware installation work is completed, you must check the installation and the power-on conditions. Ensure that the entire installation work complies with the specifications before software installation and system commissioning.

Context
The checks include installation checking and power-on checking. The checking items cover cabinets, cable distribution, connectors, sockets, labels, and on-site environment. After installation checking, power-on checking must be conducted. You must follow the operation procedure to power on each component in sequence. Thus, the electrical safety is ensured. 15.1 Checking Specifications and Precautions This describes the checking specifications and precautions. 15.2 Checking Cabinet Installation This describes how to check the cabinet installation. 15.3 Checking Connections of PGND Cables and Power Cables This describes the method for checking the PGND cables and the power cables. 15.4 Checking Connection of Signal Cables This describes the procedure for checking the connection of signal cables. 15.5 Checking Installation of Connectors and Sockets This describes how to check the installation of connectors and sockets. 15.6 Checking Installation of Peripherals This describes how to check the installation of peripherals. 15.7 Checking Installation of Other Components This describes how to check the installation of other components. 15.8 Checking the Power Supply
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-1

15 Checking Installation

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

This describes how to check the power supply.

15-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

15 Checking Installation

15.1 Checking Specifications and Precautions


This describes the checking specifications and precautions.

Checking Specifications
The checking specifications are based on the actual requirements and the related hardware quality standards.

Precautions
Before power-on checking, make sure that the switches of all the power distribution cabinets and power distribution frames (PDFs) are off.

15.2 Checking Cabinet Installation


This describes how to check the cabinet installation.

Procedure
Step 1 The cabinets in a row are placed in the same line in a close and neat way. Step 2 All the screws are fastened tightly. Each screw has a flat washer and a spring washer. The two washers are fixed in correct order. Step 3 The components of the cabinets are installed well. The cables are intact without any scratch. All labels are correct and clear. Step 4 There are no surplus cable ties, stubs or other sundries in the cabinets The front door, back door and side panel are tidy without any stain or handprint. Step 5 After the cables are connected, push the cover plates to cable-through holes at the top and bottom of the cabinet to prevent animals and dust from entering. ----End

15.3 Checking Connections of PGND Cables and Power Cables


This describes the method for checking the PGND cables and the power cables.

Context
All the power cables and grounding cables are connected firmly. The polarity is correct. The cables are in good contact. The grounding cables include those between DC power distribution cabinet and the PDF on the top of the cabinet, those between the PDF and service frames, and those in all service frames. If the AC power supply is adopted, check whether the AC power cables and grounding cables are connected firmly. Check whether the polarity is correct and whether the cables are in good contact.
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-3

15 Checking Installation

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Power cables, grounding cables cannot be bound with signal cables.

15.4 Checking Connection of Signal Cables


This describes the procedure for checking the connection of signal cables.

Context
For the internal cables such as the clock cable, check the following items:
l l l

The cables are connected correctly. The connectors are tight. Cables are bound correctly. Cable ties are in correct positions and are spaced properly. The cable ties inside and outside the cable bundle cannot be overlapped. Cable ties are trimmed and polished.

For the trunk cables, optical fibers, and network cable, check the following items:
l l l

The cables cannot be stretched at the bending area. Cables are laid according to the specifications. Make sure that the binding space is the same. Cables must be laid smoothly and orderly. Cables inside the cabinets cannot be twisted. Cables outside the cabinets must be bound separately based on the cabinet that the cables belong to. Cables in cabling troughs or along the cabling ladders must be bound and laid in order. The external coats of cables must be intact. Keep redundant cables for future use. Cable ties are well tied and trimmed without sharp ends.

15.5 Checking Installation of Connectors and Sockets


This describes how to check the installation of connectors and sockets.

Context
Check the following items:
l l

The latches of cable connectors are tightly locked. The connector of coaxial cable is tight. Check the trunk cable sockets, network cable sockets, and HEADER sockets for all backplanes. The pins of all sockets must be complete and not bent. Fix the protection caps to the connectors that are temporarily unused.

15.6 Checking Installation of Peripherals


This describes how to check the installation of peripherals.

Context
Check the following items:
15-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide


l

15 Checking Installation

Check whether the terminal and alarm box are placed according to the actual engineering design documents. Check whether the voltage of terminal and alarm box complies with the specifications. The alarm box is firmly fixed on the wall and in horizontal level. The paint of the alarm box is intact. The PVC trough is installed for the power cables and signal cables of the alarm box.

l l

15.7 Checking Installation of Other Components


This describes how to check the installation of other components.

Context
Check the following items:
l l

All labels are tidy and affixed in correct positions. The marks on the labels are clear. Sundries, such as the cable ties, stubs, and drying agent, are removed from the following: cabling trough, bottom of the cabinet, cabling rack, top of the cabinet, and place below the movable floor around the cabinet. Sundries are removed from the equipment room. All things are arranged neatly.

15.8 Checking the Power Supply


This describes how to check the power supply.

Context
You must follow the procedure strictly during power-on checking, that is, power on the cabinet first; power on the frames (including the components such as LAN Switch) secondly; power on the boards finally. If you need to power off the equipment during checking or after checking, perform the following steps: power off the boards first; power off the frames secondly; power off the cabinet finally. Figure 15-1shows the procedure for power-on checking.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15-5

15 Checking Installation

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 15-1 Procedure for power-on checking


Start

Check the power supply to the cabinets Check the power supply to the frames Check the power supply and running of the boards

End

15.8.1 Checking the Power Supply to Cabinets This describes how to check the power supply to cabinets. 15.8.2 Checking the Power Supply to Frames This describes how to check the power supply to frames. 15.8.3 Checking the Power Supply to Boards and Running State This describes how to check the power supply to boards and running state.

15.8.1 Checking the Power Supply to Cabinets


This describes how to check the power supply to cabinets.

Context
Check the following:
l

Check whether the electrical failure such as short circuit occurs to the output power cable of the power distribution cabinet. Check whether the input DC voltage of the cabinets is normal. Check whether the function of visual and audible alarm of PDFs is normal. Check whether the electrical failure such as short circuit occurs to the output power cable and whether input voltage of internal components is normal.

l l l

Procedure
Step 1 Shut down the DC power distribution cabinet. Set all the AC sockets and the power supplies to be off. Step 2 Check whether the short circuit exists between power supplies (48 V1, 48 V2) of DC power distribution cabinet, or between the BGND and the PGND cables. Ensure that the power supplies
15-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

15 Checking Installation

are disconnected with the ground. Ensure that the short circuit fault does not exist among the phase line (live line), the earth line, and the neutral line. Step 3 Make sure that the power of the PDF on the cabinet is off. Connect the power supply of DC power distribution cabinet. In no-load current, check whether the output voltage of the DC power distributed cabinet is within the voltage range with a multimeter.
l

For the N66-22 cabinet, the LED alarm indicator on the PDF blinks. If the buzzer switch is set to ON, the buzzer rings. For the H66-22 cabinet, set the buzzer switch of the ESC monitoring box to ON, and then the buzzer rings.

----End

Postrequisite
After checking the power supply to cabinets, you can check the power supply to frames.

15.8.2 Checking the Power Supply to Frames


This describes how to check the power supply to frames.

Prerequisite
Before checking the power supply to frames, check the power supply to cabinets.

Procedure
Step 1 Make sure that all the slots in the frames are not configured with boards. Step 2 Power on the PDF by setting the switch to ON. At this time, there must be no power alarm. In other words, the green RUN indicator on the PDF blinks and the red ALM indicator is off. The power buzzer does not ring. The fan frame must run normally without any noise. Step 3 Check whether the components in the cabinet have power supply and whether the voltage is within normal range. If the voltage is normal, it indicates that power supply between cabinets and frames is normal. ----End

Postrequisite
After checking the power supply to frames, you can check the power supply to boards and running state.

15.8.3 Checking the Power Supply to Boards and Running State


This describes how to check the power supply to boards and running state.

Prerequisite
Before checking the power supply to boards, check the power supply to frames.
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-7

15 Checking Installation

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Context
After the board is powered on, you can check the working state of the board through the indicator on the front panel. For the meaning of each indicator, see HUAWEI UMG8900 Universal Media Gateway Hardware Description.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the 48 V power input, output cables are connected correctly. Step 2 Power off the cabinet by setting the switch on the PDF to OFF. Insert the boards to the slots on the backplane and then fasten the ejector levels. Step 3 Set the power switches controlling the frames to ON. At this time, all board indicators must be normal. If the indicators of all boards do not light up after the power switches are turned on, it indicates no 48 V DC input or error of the input terminal connection. If the power switch jumps upon being closed, it indicates that there would be short-circuit of payload or connection error on the output terminal (short circuit). ----End

Postrequisite
This describes the installation and powering-on checks. After all the checks, the hardware installation is completed. You can start software installation and system commissioning.

15-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

16 Installing LMT Software

16
About This Chapter
Context
CAUTION

Installing LMT Software

This describes the procedure for installing the LMT software, installation preparations, and steps for installing/uninstalling the software.

Before installing/uninstalling/upgrading the LMT software, make sure that all the LMT applications are terminated. The LMT system can maintain and manage the UMG8900. In addition, interfaces to the UMG8900 are available. The LMT software package contains a graphical installation wizard featuring perfect operability. This document mainly describes the procedure for installing the LMT software. Figure 16-1 shows the connection between the LMT and the UMG8900.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16-1

16 Installing LMT Software

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 16-1 Connection between the LMT and the UMG8900


UMG8900 Remote maintenance agency LAN Switch

LMT

Modem Router

Internet Modem

PSTN

iManager

Remote maintenance system

16.1 Installation Procedure This describes the LMT software installation procedure. 16.2 Preparation for LMT Software Installation This describes the preparatory work for installing the local maintenance terminal (LMT) software. 16.3 Installing LMT Software This describes the procedure for installing the LMT software. 16.4 Checking Installation This describes the method for checking the LMT installation. 16.5 Uninstalling LMT Software This describes the method for uninstalling the LMT software.

16-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

16 Installing LMT Software

16.1 Installation Procedure


This describes the LMT software installation procedure. Figure 16-2 shows the LMT software installation procedure. Figure 16-2 LMT software installation procedure
Start

Installation preparations

Install hardware

Install operating system

Install LMT Software

Check Installation

End

16.2 Preparation for LMT Software Installation


This describes the preparatory work for installing the local maintenance terminal (LMT) software.

Context
The LMT uses a personal computer (PC) as its hardware platform. To ensure the reliability and high performance of the system, the recommended configurations are listed in Table 16-1. Table 16-1 Recommended configurations of the hardware and system for LMT software Item CPU
Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Requirement P4 1.9 G
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 16-3

16 Installing LMT Software

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Item Hard disk Memory Operating system Network card Monitor Other peripherals

Requirement 40 G 512 M Windows 2000 Professional 10/100 M bit/s auto-adaptive 19" flat plane monitor CD-ROM, integrated audio adapter, and sound box

Procedure
l Check installation. 1. Check the operating system of the host. The LMT serves as the client software for data configuration, and operation, maintenance and management of the UMG8900. The LMT is usually installed on a PC where Windows 2000 runs. It can also be installed on a PC where Windows NT or Windows XP runs. 2. Check networking and IP address configuration. Check whether the networking is in line with the networking diagram and IP addresses are properly assigned. The LMT can be directly connected to the operation and maintenance center (OMC) interface on the network packet switch unit (NET) of the UMG8900 through standard crossover network cables. The LMT can also be connected to the OMC interface of the UMG8900 by way of an IP network or hub/switch through straight through cables. l Prepare necessary materials. Prepare the networking diagram, version configuration table, and installation disk. The LMT software can also be installed in other workstations if connecting to the UMG8900 correctly. l Install hardware. The hardware installation includes PC installation and connections of signal cables. 1. 2. Install PC hardware, connect and check the power supply, and connect the LMT to the UMG8900. Connect multiple LMTs through an Ethernet switch or a hub. Check all the connections, and then power on the devices to test if the hardware installation is accomplished. l Install operating system.

16-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

16 Installing LMT Software

CAUTION
Note that the Chinese LMT must be installed with the Chinese operating system and the English LMT be installed with the English operating system. It is to install the operating system in the PC for the LMT. If the PC operating system is available, just set network parameters for the PC. 1. 2. Set network parameters. Configure the IP address and mask for the PC as the data plan requires. Ping the IP address of the OMC interface of the UMG8900 host after the ping command is available in the operating system. If it is successful, it indicates the connection is normal.

Windows 2000 professional operating system is recommended here. Both the Chinese version and the English version are available. You can choose the proper version. For details on the installation of operating system, see the installation manual that delivered with the Windows 2000 product.
NOTE

If the OMU and NET work normally, the connection between PC and OMC interface is reachable, and you can ping through. If the OMU and NET cannot start up normally, see 19 Loading OMU Software Manually. After installing the operating system, set system resolution to 1024 x 768 and small font (default) to have a better display.

----End

Postrequisite
Perform installation if the preparatory work is completed.

16.3 Installing LMT Software


This describes the procedure for installing the LMT software.

Context
The LMT graphical installation software package offers a user-friendly interface to facilitate the software installation in the interactive mode.

Procedure
Step 1 Start the installation program. Choose proper language before installation. Refer to Figure 16-3. Select English or other languages in the drop-down list, and click OK.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16-5

16 Installing LMT Software

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 16-3 Language selection

Step 2 Click Next to start to install the UMG8900 LMT on your computer. Refer to Figure 16-4. Figure 16-4 Welcome to the Installshield Wizard for Huawei LMT

Step 3 Enter the Copyright Notice window. Refer to Figure 16-5. Read the related stipulations carefully. If you cannot accept the terms, check I don't accept these terms, and then click Cancel to exit. To install the LMT, check I accept these terms, and then click Next.

16-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

16 Installing LMT Software

Figure 16-5 License agreement

Step 4 The Select installation directory window is displayed. Refer to Figure 16-6. The default installation directory of the LMT system is D:\HW LMT. You can click Browse to choose and set the path again. When the setting is completed, click Next to enter the The following components will be installed window. Figure 16-6 Selecting installation directory

NOTE

If the LMT systems of different versions are installed on the LMT, the target directory and the browse in Figure 16-6 are dimmed. In this case, you cannot make any modification.

Step 5 The The following components will be installed window is displayed, and the components are listed. Refer to Figure 16-7. Click Next.
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 16-7

16 Installing LMT Software

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 16-7 Components to be installed

Step 6 The Please Input CD KEY window is displayed. Refer to Figure 16-8. For the CD KEY, query the CD KEY list delivered with the UMG8900. Enter the CD KEY. If it is correct, click Next. Otherwise, the system prompts accordingly. Figure 16-8 Entering CD KEY

Step 7 The Installation information confirmation window is displayed. Refer to Figure 16-9. Check whether parameter values are correct. If yes, click Next to copy the installation programs; otherwise, click Previous to change the value.

16-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

16 Installing LMT Software

Figure 16-9 Confirm Installation

Step 8 The Copying files, please wait window is displayed. Refer to Figure 16-10. During the installation, the system displays the copied file name and its copying progress. When the copying is completed, the installation program starts to initialize components. Figure 16-10 Copying files

Step 9 When the installation is completed, the Figure 16-11 window appears. Click Finish, and the installation of the LMT software system is completed.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16-9

16 Installing LMT Software

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 16-11 Installation completed

----End

Postrequisite
After the installation, you need to set some basic parameters, including office ID and user information. Correct office ID setting ensures the connection between the LMT system and the host; proper user information setting prevents illegal users from logging in to the system. For details on the setting and operation instructions of the LMT system, see online help of the LMT.

16.4 Checking Installation


This describes the method for checking the LMT installation.

Context
When the installation of the LMT is completed, you need to check the installation to ensure the normal running of the system. 1. 2. 3. 16.4.1 Checking System Components This describes the system components of the LMT software. 16.4.2 Checking Software Versions This describes the method for checking the software version of the LMT. 16.4.3 Checking Running Status of LMT Service Manager This describes the method for checking running status of local maintenance terminal (LMT) Service Manager.

16.4.1 Checking System Components


This describes the system components of the LMT software.
16-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

16 Installing LMT Software

Context
Check whether the system components are installed completely. Click Start > Programs > HUAWEI local maintenance terminal. The system displays the component menu of the LMT system. A complete set of the LMT system includes the following components:
l l l l l l l l l l

UMG8900 Debug Tool UMG8900 Alarm Transmit Tool UMG8900 Performance Management System UMG8900 Tone File Process Tool FTP Client LMT Service Manager local maintenance terminal Trace Viewer Monitor Viewer Uninstall local maintenance terminal

16.4.2 Checking Software Versions


This describes the method for checking the software version of the LMT.

Context
To ensure that the software version of the LMT system meets the running requirements, you need to check the software version of the LMT system.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Start > Programs > HUAWEI local maintenance terminal > local maintenance terminal . The UMG8900 local maintenance terminal window appears. Step 2 Select Help > About . The About window appears. Refer to Figure 16-12.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16-11

16 Installing LMT Software

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 16-12 About window

Step 3 Check whether the version shown in the About window is consistent with the required version. Make sure the version meets the requirement for the running. ----End

16.4.3 Checking Running Status of LMT Service Manager


This describes the method for checking running status of local maintenance terminal (LMT) Service Manager.

Context
LMT Service Manager is an important component of the LMT software. Its running status can directly affect the running of the LMT system software. When the installation is successfully completed, the system automatically starts up the LMT Service Manager program.

Procedure
Step 1 When the LMT software is installed successfully, the LMT Service Manager Icon at the right corner of the taskbar in the operating system. Step 2 Click . The LMT Service Manager window appears. Refer to Figure 16-13. appears

16-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

16 Installing LMT Software

Figure 16-13 LMT Service Manager window

The LMT Service Manager window includes two parts, namely, service name and status.
l l

If the status of two services is Started, it indicates that the system runs normally. If status of any service is Stopped, it indicates that the system is abnormal or the installation is unsuccessful. In this case, contact Huawei Technical Support to handle the fault. Reinstall the software if necessary.

----End

16.5 Uninstalling LMT Software


This describes the method for uninstalling the LMT software.

Context
When the LMT system needs to be upgraded, you need to uninstall the old LMT system, and then install new LMT system. The system provides the convenient uninstalling operation.

CAUTION
l

Close all the running programs before uninstalling the LMT system to avoid failure or incomplete uninstall. When deleting the old LMT system, restart the computer when prompting to restart, and then install the new LMT system. If the restart follows the installation of new LMT system, it is likely that the LMT system cannot run. The version of the UMG8900 LMT system is UMGS UMG8900V100R007.

Procedure
Step 1 Click Start > Programs > HUAWEI local maintenance terminal > Uninstall local maintenance terminal , and the uninstalling window appears. Refer to Figure 16-14.
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 16-13

16 Installing LMT Software

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 16-14 Uninstalling programs

Step 2 The system provides the option of uninstalling components. If you want to uninstall the whole software system, select HUAWEI local maintenance terminal and click Next. The system starts uninstalling. ----End

16-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

17 Loading Host Software

17
About This Chapter

Loading Host Software

This describes the loading procedure, loading steps, loading method, loading check, and exception handling. 17.1 Loading Procedure This describes the procedure for loading the host software. 17.2 Software Loading Preparation This describes the preparatory work for loading the host software. 17.3 Loading Host Software This describes the steps for loading the host software. 17.4 Loading the License File This describes the procedure for loading the license file. 17.5 Loading Tone Files Dynamically This describes operation steps for loading tone files dynamically. 17.6 Loading PV8 Software This describes the procedure for loading software to the PV8. 17.7 Loading RSP Software This describes the procedure for loading software to the RSP board. 17.8 Checking Loading Result This describes the method for checking the version consistency. 17.9 Problems Handling This describes the method for dealing with problems that may occur during loading or after loading.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17-1

17 Loading Host Software

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

17.1 Loading Procedure


This describes the procedure for loading the host software. If not loaded with the OMU software correctly, the OMU cannot start normally. In this case, you need to load the OMU software manually. For details, see 19 Loading OMU Software Manually. Other boards can be automatically loaded only when the master OMU runs normally. Figure 17-1 shows the procedure for installing host software. Figure 17-1 Procedure for installing host software
Start

Loading preparations completed

Load host software

Load LICENSE file

Load tone files

Load software to PV8 boards Load software to RSP boards Checking version consistency

End

17.2 Software Loading Preparation


This describes the preparatory work for loading the host software. 17.2.1 System Hardware Preparation This describes the system hardware required for loading the software.
17-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

17 Loading Host Software

17.2.2 System Software Preparation This describes the system software required for loading the software. 17.2.3 Configuring MML Batch Files This describes the method for modifying the MML batch files. 17.2.4 Setting FTP Server This describes the method for configuring the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server and the Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server. 17.2.5 Setting the HyperTerminal This describes the method for setting the HyperTerminal. 17.2.6 Configuring IP address on OMC Interface This describes the method for configuring the IP address on the OMC interface of the UMG8900. 17.2.7 Configuring LMT Office Direction This describes the method for configuring the office direction on the local maintenance terminal (LMT). 17.2.8 Modifying MML Timeout Settings This describes the method for setting the man-machine language (MML) timeout on the local maintenance terminal (LMT).

17.2.1 System Hardware Preparation


This describes the system hardware required for loading the software.

Context
Before powering on and loading the system, make the following preparations:

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the hardware installation is completed. Check whether the physical connections of primary boards are correct, whether the positions of boards are correct, and whether the boards pass the power-on test. Step 2 Check whether the sequence to start the frames is correct in multiframe cascading mode. The startup sequence is the main control frame the central switching frame other frames. If the central switching board does not start up normally, other boards cannot finish loading. Step 3 Check whether the frame No. is set. When configuring the frame data, ensure that the frame number is consistent with that of the dial in-line package switch (DIP switch). Otherwise, the frame cannot be loaded with the software and data. For details on the setting of DIP switch, see the HUAWEI UMG8900 Universal Media Gateway Hardware DescriptionFrames. Step 4 Use the crossover cable to connect the OMC interface on the NET with the network port on the PC. If the UMG8900 is connected with the network port through the HUB or the local area network (LAN), use straight through cables.
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17-3

17 Loading Host Software

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Step 5 Connect the debug serial interface COM0 on the OMU and the serial port of the PC with the serial interface cable. ----End

17.2.2 System Software Preparation


This describes the system software required for loading the software.

Procedure
Step 1 Copy all the files under the BAM directory of the software installation package to the directory C:\BAM of the computer. The directory includes all the configuration files of the version and necessary target files. Step 2 Check whether the software and hardware versions are correct according to version consistency table. Make sure the component configurations of all the boards are correct. The master OMU uses the configuration table of the host software components to load the software to the board.
NOTE

The configuration table of the host software components is written into the OMU hard disk before the delivery of the UMG8900 OMU. Change the configuration file only when the configuration of the board software components needs changing.

----End

17.2.3 Configuring MML Batch Files


This describes the method for modifying the MML batch files.

Context
The MML batch file is a text file that records MML commands. ADD IPADDR must be configured in the mml.txt file. The command is used to set the IP address of the BAM maintenance port on the OMU, namely, the OMC interface on the NET. After the OMU starts and becomes the master board, you need to use the IP address to log in to the BAM of the OMU through the MML command line or the graphic interface of the LMT.
NOTE

The default address configured for this command is 129.1.1.1. Before uploading the mml.txt file to the OMU, you can modify the IP address according to the need.

Procedure
Step 1 Open the mml.txt file, and modify ADD IPADDR. Configure the IP address of the master OMU interface (the OMC interface on the NET) for ADD IPADDR. Modify the IP address and the mask information according to the actual conditions. ADD IPADDR: IPT=OMC, IPADDR="10.110.86.224", MASK="255.255.255.0", FLAG=MASTER, INVLAN=NO; Step 2 Put the mml.txt file in the folder C:\bam on the FTP server. The MML batch files function when the OMU is restarted. For details on the FTP server configuration, see 17.2.4 Setting FTP Server. ----End
17-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

17 Loading Host Software

17.2.4 Setting FTP Server


This describes the method for configuring the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server and the Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server.

Context
The loading server provides all software for the UMG8900 host software system. The UMG8900 supports the FTP server and the TFTP server.
l

Set the FTP server: You can use the FTP tool to set the user name, password and service directory of the server, and place the files necessary for the installation environment in the directory C:\BAM of the PC for the FTP server. The BAM directory is already created when the version is released and cannot be modified. You need to set the service directory of the FTP server to BAM directory. Set the TFTP server: You can use the TFTP tool to set the service directory of the TFTP server to C:\BAM.
NOTE

When the uploading file is the dynamic tone file or the UA software (the upper-layer software of the RSP/ PV8), the UMG8900 does not support the TFTP protocol.

CAUTION
Windows 2000, Windows NT and Windows XP require the authentication. The user name and password of the FTP server must be recognized by the operating system, and the communication must be successful. Otherwise, the connection will fail. Windows 98 has no restriction on the FTP server. If the built-in firewall of Windows XP is started and the UMG8900 cannot communicate with the FTP server of the computer, loading the files may fail. Refer to Figure 17-2. You need to click the Advanced tab in the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box to set the firewall.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17-5

17 Loading Host Software

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 17-2 Disabling firewall

For Windows XP and Windows 2000, the setting of TCP/IP filtering rules may also cause failure in loading files. As shown in Figure 17-3, you need to deselect check box Enable TCP/IP Filtering (all adapters) in the TCP/IP Filtering dialog box.

17-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

17 Loading Host Software

Figure 17-3 TCP/IP filtering

Procedure
l Set the FTP tool The UMG8900 uses the FTP tool WFTPD. You can start this tool by double-clicking the wftpd32.exe file released with the software version. 1. Double-click the wftpd32.exe file and a window appears. Refer to Figure 17-4.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17-7

17 Loading Host Software

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 17-4 WFTPD window

2.

Click Security > Users/rights, then a dialog box appears. Refer to Figure 17-5. Figure 17-5 Users/rights dialog box

3.

Click New User, then a dialog box appears. Refer to Figure 17-6. Enter the user name and click OK.

17-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

17 Loading Host Software

Figure 17-6 Configuring the user name

4.

Click Change Pass, then a dialog box appears. Refer to Figure 17-7. Enter the password and click OK. Figure 17-7 Entering the password

NOTE

When using LOD TOBAM to upload files, make sure that the parameters configured in the command are the same as the entered user name and password.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17-9

17 Loading Host Software

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

5.

In the Home Directory dialog box, set the directory for uploading file. When using LOD TOBAM to upload files, set the file directory to C:\BAM. If you upload files through the debug port, set the file directory to C:\. Refer to Figure 17-8. Figure 17-8 Setting the path to upload the file

6. l

Click Done to complete the WFTPD setting.

Set the TFTP tool. The TFTP tool used by the UMG8900 is the TFTPD. You can start this tool by doubleclicking the Tftpd32.exe file released with the software version. 1. Double-click the Tftpd32.exe file and a window appears. Refer to Figure 17-9. Figure 17-9 TFTPD window

17-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

17 Loading Host Software

2.

Click Settings. Then, a dialogue appears. Refer to Figure 17-10. Set the path to upload the file in Base Directory. When using LOD TOBAM to upload files, set the file directory to C:\BAM. Then, click OK. Figure 17-10 Setting the path to upload the file

----End

17.2.5 Setting the HyperTerminal


This describes the method for setting the HyperTerminal.

Context
The control operation of the OMU can be implemented through its serial port. It is recommended to use the HyperTerminal tool provided by the Windows2000 to connect to the serial port (COM0) through serial cables to implement control operation of the OMU. When you configure the HyperTerminal in Windows, set the parameters as follows:
l l l l l l

Baud rate: 57,600 bit/s Data bit: 8 Stop bit: 1 Parity: none Flow control: none Terminal emulation: VT100 (or automatically)

Procedure
Step 1 Establish a connection between serial ports. Connect the PC serial port with the configuration serial port COM0 on the master OMU through the standard EIA/TIA-232 serial port cable. Refer to Figure 17-11.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17-11

17 Loading Host Software

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 17-11 Establishing physical environment


EIT/TIA-232 serial port

PC

MGW

Step 2 Open the HyperTerminal on the PC and set up the corresponding serial port connection. Refer to Figure 17-12. Figure 17-12 Establishing serial port connection

Step 3 Set the parameters for the HyperTerminal. Refer to Figure 17-13.

17-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

17 Loading Host Software

Figure 17-13 Setting parameters for the HyperTerminal

Step 4 Select File > Attributes . Set the terminal type to VT100 or Auto detect In the displayed dialog box. Refer to Figure 17-14.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17-13

17 Loading Host Software

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 17-14 Setting attributes

Step 5 Set ASCII. Click ASCII Setup... in the Settings tab. Refer to Figure 17-15. Figure 17-15 Setting ASCII

17-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

17 Loading Host Software

Step 6 Log in to the HyperTerminal. Use the default super user name and password. They can be modified on the graphical LMT. ----End

17.2.6 Configuring IP address on OMC Interface


This describes the method for configuring the IP address on the OMC interface of the UMG8900.

Context
Load the software to the OMU through the OMC interface. When the OMU starts up normally, modify the IP address on the OMC interface of the OMU, and make sure the LMT can log in to the OMU and maintain the BAM. The following two methods are available.

Procedure
l Run MOD OMCIP to modify the IP address on the OMC interface. 1. Run dbgexit under the command prompt characters of the HyperTerminal, and enter the MML mode. dbgexit; Run lgi under the command prompt characters of the HyperTerminal. lgi:op="admin",pwd="9061mgw"; Run MOD OMCIP in the environment of the HyperTerminal, and modify the IP address of the OMC interface. For example, modify IP address 129.1.1.1 of the interface on the OMU to 10.110.86.224, and subnet mask to 255.255.255.0. MOD OMCIP: OLDIP="129.1.1.1", NEWIP="10.110.86.224", NEWMASK="255.255.255.0"; 4. l Enter dbg in the HyperTerminal, and exit from the MML mode. dbg; Run dbgexit under the command prompt characters of the HyperTerminal, and enter the MML mode. dbgexit; Run lgi under the command prompt characters of the HyperTerminal. lgi:op="admin",pwd="9061mgw"; Run LST IPADDR in the HyperTerminal environment, and check the default IP address of the OMC interface. LST IPADDR: BT=OMU; Run RMV IPADDR in the HyperTerminal environment, and delete the above default IP address of the OMC interface. The default IP address configured for OMU is 129.1.1.1. RMV IPADDR: BT=OMU, BN=0, IFT=ETH, IFN=0, IPADDR="129.1.1.1", INVLAN=NO; Run ADD IPADDR under the HyperTerminal environment, and configure the IP address of the OMC interface.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17-15

2. 3.

Run RMV IPADDR and ADD IPADDR to add and delete IP address of OMC interface. 1.

2. 3.

4.

5.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

17 Loading Host Software

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

ADD IPADDR: BT=OMU, BN=0, IFT=ETH, IFN=0, IPADDR="1.1.1.1", MASK="255.255.255.0", FLAG=MASTER, INVLAN=NO; 6. Enter dbg in the HyperTerminal, and exit from the MML mode. dbg; ----End

17.2.7 Configuring LMT Office Direction


This describes the method for configuring the office direction on the local maintenance terminal (LMT).

Context
When logging in to the LMT for the first time, you need to add an office. Set the office IP address to the IP address specified in the MML.txt file, and then log in to the UMG8900 host through the IP address to install software online.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Start > Programs > HUAWEI local maintenance terminal > local maintenance terminal. Figure 17-16 shows the user login window. Figure 17-16 User login

The users are of two types, that is, domain users and local users. The domain users are managed by the N2000 and the local users are managed by the UMG8900. The account of the domain user is recommended for routine maintenance. The account of the local user is used for the emergency purpose only. The UMG8900 can judge whether the user is the domain user based on the login information. If yes, the UMG8900 sends the user login request to the N2000.
17-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

17 Loading Host Software

The domain users can request to change their passwords to the UMG8900 through the LMT after the login succeeds. In this case, the UMG8900 sends the request for changing the password to the N2000. When the domain users log out of the UMG8900, the UMG8900 sends the logout packet to the N2000. Step 2 Choose System > Office Management. Add the office information in the Office Management dialog box. Refer to Figure 17-17. Input an office name, and the length of characters is 1 to 60. When the length is over 60, the system denies the input of extra characters. The input IP address is that of the OMC interface on the OMU. Figure 17-17 Setting the office information

Step 3 Input the user name and password, and choose the login office in the window. Refer to Figure 17-17. Then, click OK. After login, choose Authority > Change Password to change the admin password immediately. Choose Authority > Account to add and modify user accounts. ----End

17.2.8 Modifying MML Timeout Settings


This describes the method for setting the man-machine language (MML) timeout on the local maintenance terminal (LMT).

Context
Before loading software, set MML Command Timeout(s) in the menu bar of LMT to avoid the timeout prompt. Click System > Command Timeout Setting, and the Timeout Setting dialog box appears. Refer to Figure 17-18. Set MML Command Timeout(s) to 600, and revert to the original value 180 when the loading is completed. Figure 17-18 Modifying timeout setting

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17-17

17 Loading Host Software

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

17.3 Loading Host Software


This describes the steps for loading the host software.

Context
Copy the board software in directory C:\BAM of the computer to the BAM of the MOMD. The board can automatically load the software in BAM of the MOMD during startup.

Procedure
Step 1 Run LOD TOBAM on the LMT to upload the host software and tone files of the MVPD to the BAM. LOD TOBAM: VT=MS, PRT=FTP, SIP="x.x.x.x", UID="bam", PWD="***", BL=VPUT-1; //Change the IP address that follows SIP to the IP address of the LMT, and PWD to bam.
NOTE

The files to be loaded are massive, and thus it will take several minutes to load all files. It is normal if connection timeout is displayed on the LMT.

Step 2 Run LOD TOBT on the LMT to write all the software of the MOMD into the FLASH of the MOMD. LOD TOBT: BT=OMU, EN=DISABLE, SRC=BAM; Step 3 Run SYC BAMFILE on the LMT to synchronize the configuration files and loading target files of the master MOMD to the FLASH of the slave MOMD. SYC BAMFILE: Step 4 Run RST SYS to reset the system. The MVPD can load the software from the BAM of the MOMD during restart. RST SYS: Step 5 When the service runs properly, run SYC MSVER to synchronize the master and slave backup versions of the MOMD. Thus, the MOMD has two copies of the same version. SYC MSVER:; ----End

17.4 Loading the License File


This describes the procedure for loading the license file.

Context
To ensure the normal running of the system, you must get the correct license file. To load the license file, perform the following steps:
17-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

17 Loading Host Software

CAUTION
If both the master and slave OMUs are configured, you need to pull out the slave OMU and load the license file to the master OMU when you load the license file for the first time. After the license file is loaded to the master OMU and is successfully activated, insert the slave OMU. Then, the slave OMU can get the correct license file from the master OMU.

Procedure
Step 1 Save the license file to the C:\license directory of the FTP server. Set the FTP server. Set the directory of the FTP server to C:\license, user name to lic, and password to lic. For details on how to install and set the FTP server, see 17.2.4 Setting FTP Server. Step 2 Download the license file from the C:\licensedirectory of the FTP server to the OMU hard disk with DLD LICENSE. For example, download the license file through the FTP server with the host IP address as 10.110.86.117: DLD LICENSE : IP = "10.110.86.117",USR = "lic", PWD ="***", DIR ="C:\license",FN = "LIC2003080400001.DAT"; Step 3 Run LST LICENSE to confirm the serial number of the license file that needs to be activated. Step 4 Run ACT LICENSE and enter the serial number of the license file to activate the LICENSE file. Step 5 If the system runs while no lawful license file starts, the system prompts you to reset the system to validate the activated license file. Reset the system as required. ----End

17.5 Loading Tone Files Dynamically


This describes operation steps for loading tone files dynamically.

Prerequisite
Loading basic tone packets is usually contained in the process of loading host software. For loading basic tone packets, refer to HUAWEI UMG8900 Universal Media Gateway Installation Guide17 Loading Host Software. Thus, this part focuses on the dynamic loading of a dynamic tone file.

Context
Dynamic loading of tone files is used to change the existing tones in tone packages on the VPU or add new tones to tone packages. Dynamic loading of tone files need to be performed when the traffic is low.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17-19

17 Loading Host Software

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Start the FTP server on the PC for loading. Set user name, password and base directory (the root directory of the load directory). For easy description, set User Name to bam, Password to bam, and Base Directory to c:\bam Step 2 Copy all the prepared dynamic tone files to the \bin\tonepatch subdirectory of the load directory, that is: c:\bam\bin\tonepatch. Step 3 Start the LMT. Run LOD TOBAM to load the tone files to the OMU file system. Set the following parameters for the command:
l

Version Type Set it to DT (Dynamic tone file). File Name It specifies the name of the dynamic tone file to be loaded (excluding the file path). By default, it is All of the files, indicating all dynamic tone files in the load directory c:\bam\bin \tonepatch are loaded. You can also enter the name of a file such as P001DS0001A018001FC.stf or P001DS0001A018001FC.wbv to load it only.

Server IP Address, User Name and Password They are consistent with the IP address of the PC, the user name and password set in Step 1. For example, to load all tone files under c:\bam\bin\tonepatch of the PC 10.0.0.1, run the following command:
LOD TOBAM: VT=DT, SIP="10.0.0.1", UID="bam", PWD="***";

Step 4 Run LST TONEFILE to check if the dynamic tone files loaded just now exist in the OMU file system. You need not set parameters for this command. However, you need to compare the query result including file name and file size of the file with the tone file in the load directory. This is to confirm if the right tone file is loaded. Step 5 Run SYC BAMFILE to load the software and the configuration files including tone files in the file system of the master OMU to the file system of the slave OMU. Step 6 To decrease the risk of file loading, you need to load files to one board at a time. Before loading, isolate the board on which tone files are to be loaded and wait for one minute. This is to reduce calls distributed on the board, and ensure that the new calls are not distributed to this board. The isolation operation does not affect online users on the isolated board.
NOTE

Isolating a board may cause traffic increase on other active boards. Thus, isolate a board only when the traffic is low.

Step 7 Run LOD TONE to load the dynamic tone files in the OMU file system to the VPU. Specify the following parameters for the command:
l

Board Type It specifies the board type on which the tone file is to be loaded. Frame No., Slot No. and Board Position They specify the physical location of a board. If you do not specify them, the tone file will be loaded to all boards of the specified type.

File Name
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

17-20

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

17 Loading Host Software

It specifies the name of the dynamic tone file to be loaded (excluding the file path). By default, all dynamic tone files on the OMU system files are loaded. You can also enter the name of a file to load it only. For example, to load all tone files on the OMU file system to the VPU in slot 3 of frame 1, run the following command:
LOD TONE: FN=1, SN=3, BP=FRONT, BT=VPU;
NOTE

l l

The loading of dynamic tone files impacts the system performance. Therefore, load files when the traffic is low. Do not load all patch files at one time. Load dynamic tone files one by one.

Step 8 After tone file loading, run CHK TONE to check if you have loaded the tone file successfully. CHK TONE: FN=1, SN=3; The following information is displayed, indicating if the tone file matches that in the OMU file system (BAM). If yes, the files are loaded successfully. The output is as follows:
Frame No. Slot No. Board type File 1 3 VPU P0007S0030A00000000.stf 1 3 VPU P0007S0030A00000000.stf 1 3 VPU P0025S0051A00000000.stf ---------------------------------------File number in board = 3 File number in bam = 3 Matched file number = 3 name YES YES YES Exist in BAM

Step 9 Activate the board: After confirming that the dynamic tone files are loaded successfully, activate the board. Step 10 Repeat steps 6 to 8 with other announcement boards to load dynamic tone files to them. Step 11 After loading dynamic tone files and activating all the boards, perform dial tests on services related to the new tones on these boards to check if the loaded tones are validated. ----End

17.6 Loading PV8 Software


This describes the procedure for loading software to the PV8.

Context
Software can be loaded to the PV8 in two modes: loading through dial in-line package (DIP) switches and forced loading. If only one PV8 is configured or the master and slave PV8s are configured,the software can be loaded through the DIP switch or in forced way. Run LOD TOPV8 to set the parameter FLOD for proper loading mode.

Procedure
l DIP loading In this mode, DIP switch 1 must be set to ON. In the DIP loading mode, the parameter FLOD of LOD TOPV8 is the default value NO, which indicates no forced loading. That is, run LOD TOPV8 to load the software through DIP switches. After the board starts up, the software is the new version.
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17-21

17 Loading Host Software

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

CAUTION
Do not reset the board during the loading process. Especially when software is loaded to the slave PV8, you cannot to reset or pull out the master board that can make the board abnormal. 1. 2. Make sure both the OMU and the PV8 are powered on and run normally. To set the FTP server, see 17.2.4 Setting FTP Server. Run LOD TOBAM to load the pv8.bin file in the C:\bam\bin\rsp folder from the server whose IP address is 1.1.1.1 to the BAM of the OMU. LOD TOBAM: VT=UA, FN="pv8.bin", SIP="1.1.1.1", UID="bam", PWD="***"; The parameter VT must be set to UA. This parameter is null by default. The parameter FN refers to the name of the file to be loaded. All files are loaded by default. You can specify a file name to load the file. 3. Run DIR to check whether the file is loaded to the BAM of the OMU.
DIR:DT="C:\bam\bin\rsp"; RETCODE = 0 accomplished 2005-04-12 C:\bam\bin\rsp rsp Directory List: pv8.bin 17:40:14 002 dir(s) 001 file(s)

The result shows that the pv8.bin file is loaded to the BAM of the OMU. 4. Run LOD TOPV8 to load the pv8.bin file in the BAM to the master and slave PV8 boards in frame 2.
LOD TOPV8:BFN=2,EFN=2,FNM=PV8.bin; RETCODE = 0 accomplished PV8 Loading Information --------------- Frame No. Slot No. Frame mode Frame type File name Board state Loading state 2 2 5 6 Main frame Main frame UAFM UAFM pv8.bin Slave normal load Waiting pv8.bin Normal load Waiting

The parameters BFN and EFN refer to the begin frame No. and end frame No. of the frames that hold the PV8 boards. For single-frame loading, BFN and EFN are the same. For multi-frame loading, software is loaded to all PV8 boards in the frames within the range specified by BFN and EFN. The optional parameter FLOD indicates whether to load the software in the forced mode. The default value is NO, which indicates that the loading is in the DIP mode.
NOTE

Multi-frame loading can be performed on 100 frames at the same time.

5. 6.

Pull out the master PV8 board. Set DIP switch 1 to ON and keep DIP switches 2, 3 and 4 to OFF. Then, insert the board back into the frame. Run DSP PV8LOD to query whether the loading succeeds.
DSP PV8LOD:BFN=2,EFN=2; RETCODE = 0 Display PV8 Loading Status Frame No. Slot No. Frame mode Softversion Loadingstate Frame type Filename Board state accomplished

17-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide


2 5 Main frame UAFM Waiting 2 6 Main frame UAFM success (Number of results = 2) pv8.bin pv8.bin

17 Loading Host Software


Slave normal 281 load Normal 281 load

If Loading state of the PV8 in slot 6 is displayed as Load success, it indicates that the software is loaded to the master PV8 board. 7. Set DIP switch 1 for the master PV8 back to OFF. The master and slave PV8 boards cannot be loaded at the same time. Pull out the slave PV8 board and set DIP switch 1 to ON. Keep DIP switches 2, 3 and 4 to OFF. Then, insert the board back into the frame. Run DSP PV8LOD to query whether the loading succeeds.
DSP PV8LOD:BFN=2,EFN=2; RETCODE = 0 Display PV8 Loading Status Frame No. Slot No. Frame mode Softversion Loadingstate Frame type Filename Board state accomplished

8.

2 5 Main frame UAFM Waiting 2 6 Main frame UAFM success (Number of results = 2)

pv8.bin pv8.bin

Slave normal 281 load Normal 281 load

If Loading state of the PV8 board in slot 5 is displayed as Load success, it indicates that the software is loaded to the slave PV8 board. 9. l Set DIP switch 1 for the slave PV8 back to OFF. Forced loading Set the parameter FLOD of LOD TOPV8 to YES, which indicates loading in the forced mode. The board is reset automatically and the software is loaded. After the board starts up normally, the software is the new version.

CAUTION
If both the master and slave PV8s are configured, you cannot load the software to the PV8s at the same time. 1. 2. Make sure both the OMU and the PV8 are powered on and run normally. To set the FTP server, see 17.2.4 Setting FTP Server. Run LOD TOBAM to load the pv8.bin file in the C:\bam\bin\rsp folder from the server whose IP address is 1.1.1.1 to the BAM of the OMU. LOD TOBAM: VT=UA, FN="pv8.bin", SIP="1.1.1.1", UID="bam", PWD="***"; The parameter VT must be set to UA. This parameter is null by default. The parameter FN refers to the name of the file to be loaded. All files are loaded by default. You can specify a file name to load the file. 3. Run DIR to check whether the file is loaded to the BAM of the OMU.
DIR:DT="C:\bam\bin\rsp"; RETCODE = 0 accomplished

C:\bam\bin\rsp rsp Directory List:


Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17-23

17 Loading Host Software


./ ../ pv8.bin 002 dir(s) 001 file(s) 01.08.05 10:40:14

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

The result shows that the pv8.bin file is loaded to the BAM of the OMU. 4. Reset the slave PV8, and then run LOD TOPV8 to load the pv8.bin file in the BAM to the master PV8 in frame 2.
LOD TOPV8:BFN=2,EFN=2,FNM=PV8.bin,FLOD=YES; RETCODE = 0 accomplished PV8 Loading Information --------------Frame No. Slot No. Frame mode Frame type File name Board state Loading state 2 6 Main frame UAFM pv8.bin Normal load Waiting

The parameters BFN and EFN refer to the begin frame No. and end frame No. of the frames that hold the PV8. For single-frame loading, BFN and EFN are the same. For multi-frame loading, software is loaded to all PV8s in the frames within the range specified by BFN and EFN. The optional parameter FLOD is set to YES to indicate loading in the forced mode. The default value is NO, which indicates that the software is loaded in the DIP mode.
NOTE

Multi-frame loading can be performed on 100 frames at the same time.

5.

Run DSP PV8LOD to query whether the loading succeeds.


DSP PV8LOD:BFN=2,EFN=2; RETCODE = 0 accomplished Display PV8 Loading Status Frame No. Slot No. Frame mode Softversion Loadingstate 2 6 Main frame (Number of results = 1) UAFM Frame type pv8.bin Filename Normal Board state 264 load success

If Loading state of the PV8 board in slot 6 is displayed as Load success, it indicates that the software is loaded to the PV8 board. 6. Run LST UAVER to check whether the board software is of the latest version.
LST UAVER:FN=2,SN=6; RETCODE = 0 accomplished UA frame board version information ----------------Frame No. = 2 Slot No. = 6 Board type = PV8 Software version = 281 PCB version = 2 Logical version = ff --END

7.

Reset the master PV8 board, and then run LOD TOPV8 to load the pv8.bin file in the BAM to the slave PV8 in frame 2.
LOD TOPV8:BFN=2,EFN=2,FNM=PV8.bin;FLOD=YES; RETCODE = 0 accomplished PV8Loading Information --------------Frame No. Slot No. Frame mode Frame type File name Board state Loading state 2 5 Main frame UAFM pv8.bin Normal load Waiting

The parameters BFN and EFN refer to the begin frame No. and end frame No. of the frames that hold the PV8 boards. For single-frame loading, BFN and EFN are the
17-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

17 Loading Host Software

same. For multi-frame loading, software is loaded to all PV8s in the frames within the range specified by BFN and EFN. The optional parameter FLOD is set to YES to indicate loading in the forced mode. The default value is NO, which indicates that the software is loaded in the DIP mode.
NOTE

Multi-frame loading can be performed on 100 frames at the same time.

----End

17.7 Loading RSP Software


This describes the procedure for loading software to the RSP board.

Procedure
Step 1 Make sure both the OMU and the RSP boards are powered on and run normally. To set the FTP server, see 17.2.4 Setting FTP Server. Step 2 Run LOD TOBAM to load files rsph302.bin andrsph303.bin in the C:\bam\bin\rsp folder from the server whose IP address is 1.1.1.1 to the BAM of the OMU. LOD TOBAM: VT=UA, SIP="1.1.1.1", UID="bam", PWD="***"; The parameter VT must be set to UA. This parameter is null by default. The parameter FN refers to the name of the file to be loaded. All files are loaded by default. You can specify a file name to load the file. Step 3 Run DIR to check whether the files are loaded to the BAM of the OMU.
DIR:DT="C:\bam\bin\rsp"; RETCODE = 0 accomplished

C:\bam\bin\rsp rsp Directory List:


./ ../ RSPH302.bin 2005-04-12 17:40:14 002 dir(s) 002 file(s) 2005-04-12 17:40:14 RSPH303.bin

The result shows that files rsph302.bin andrsph303.bin are loaded to the BAM of the OMU. Step 4 Run LOD TORSP to load the rsph302.bin file in the BAM to the RSP board in frame 1.
LOD TORSP: BFN=1, EFN=1, YON=LOAD, FNM=RSPH302.bin, WFLH=WRITEFLASH, RST=YES; RETCODE = 0 accomplished Display RSP Loading Status --------------Frame No. Slot No. Frame mode Frame type Filename Board state Loadingstate Write flash 1 9 Direct frame RSP_14 rsph302.bin Normal loadWaiting YES (Number of results = 1)

The parameters BFN and EFN refer to the begin frame No. and end frame No. of the frames that hold the RSP boards. For single-frame loading, BFN and EFN are the same. For multi-frame loading, software is loaded to all RSP boards in the frames within the range specified by the BFN and EFN. Multi-frame loading can be performed on 100 frames at the same time. If the parameter YON is set to LOAD, it indicates the loading begins again after the RSP restarts up. If it is set to CANCEL, it indicates that the loading does not begin.
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17-25

17 Loading Host Software

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

The parameter FNM refers to the name of the file to be loaded. The RSP board can be H302 or H303. For the H302, only the RSPH302.bin file can be loaded. For the H303, only the RSPH303.bin file can be loaded. The parameter WFLH indicates whether to write software to the FLASH of the RSP after loading. If not, the software rolls back to the original version after the RSP restarts up. Step 5 The parameter RST of LOD TORSP indicates whether to reset the RSP. The new software is valid only after the RSP is reset. If the parameter RST is set to NO, you need to reset the RSP manually. When the RSP restarts up, the loading is completed. Step 6 Run DSP RSPLOD to query whether the loading succeeds.
DSP PV8LOD:BFN=2,EFN=2; RETCODE = 0 Display RSP Loading Status Frame No. Slot No. Frame mode Loadingstate 1 9 Main frame of results = 1) UAFS Frame type Filename Board state Softversion accomplished

rsph302.bin

Normal

3121 load success (Number

If Loading state of the RSP board in slot 9 is displayed as Load success, it indicates that the RSP loading is completed. Step 7 Run LST UAVER to check whether the board software is the new version.
LST UAVER:FN=1,SN=9; RETCODE = 0 accomplished UA frame board version information ----------------Frame No. = 1 Slot No. = 9 Board type = RSP Software version = 3121 PCB version = 2 Logical version = ff --END

----End

17.8 Checking Loading Result


This describes the method for checking the version consistency.

Context
Run CHK VERSION to check whether the BAM file version of the MOMD and the MVPD, the running version, and the saved version are correct. CHK VERSION:VT=BAM; The output of the command is shown as follows:
2005-12-26 11:39:12 : CHK VERSION: VT=BAM; +++ HUAWEI UMG8900 2005-12-26 11:38:52 O&M #10 %%CHK VERSION: VT=BAM;%% RETCODE = 0 accomplished Main Version: HUAWEI UMG8900 Vx00R00xCxxBxxx --------------------------------------------

17-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

17 Loading Host Software

Check Result of BAM Current(New) Version Files(by file names): -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------File name File type Formal ver Current(New) ver Suitability Compatibility Board type belong -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------omd.vfs MASTERAPPCODE R005C02B031 <Null> <Null> <Null> OMU omd_ebootrom.bin EXBOOTROMCODE R005C02B021 R005C02B021 Yes <Null> OMU fomd_floodlogic.rbf LOGICCODE R003C03B051SP02 <Null> <Null> <Null> OMU mvpd_mini.vfs MASTERAPPCODE R005C02B031 R005C02B031 Yes <Null> VPU mvpd_ebootrom.bin EXBOOTROMCODE R005C02B021 R005C02B021 Yes <Null> VPU ec_chip.bin OCTASIC R003C03B022 R003C03B022 Yes <Null> VPU ec_vqe.bin ECVx00R00xCxxBxxx R005C02B030 Yes <Null> VPU mvpd_vpd.bit VPDLOGIC R003C03B049 R003C03B049 Yes <Null> VPU dsp_mix_c64.arj DSPFW R005C02B031 R005C02B031 Yes <Null> VPU dsp_g711rx_c64.arj DSPFW R005C02B031 R005C02B031 Yes <Null> VPU dsp_vig_c64.arj DSPFW R005C02B020 R005C02B020 Yes <Null> VPU dsp_mpty_c64.arj DSPFW R005C02B022 R005C02B022 Yes <Null> VPU -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Finished checking current(new) version files saved on BAM Files checked: 12 --END

As shown in the returned results, the information in the Compatibility column indicates whether the formal version matches the current version. The result should be Yes or Null. Use the CHK VERSION command to check whether the versions of the running software match those of the saved software. CHK VERSION:VT=BRD; The output result of the command is as follows:
+++ HUAWEI UMG8900 2006-02-21 17:54:01 %%CHK VERSION: VT=BRD;%% RETCODE = 0 accomplished Checking, please wait... --END +++ RETCODE = 0 Frame No. 1, Slot No. 3, Front board, VPU, No disagreement. +++ RETCODE = 0 Frame No. 1, Slot No. 2, Front board, OMU, No disagreement. +++ RETCODE = 0 Frame No. 1, Slot No. 4, Front board, VPU, No disagreement. +++ RETCODE = 0 Frame No. 1, Slot No. 1, Front board, OMU, No disagreement. +++ RETCODE = 0 Main version: HUAWEI UMG8900 Vx00R00xCxxBxxx +++ RETCODE = 0 Version checking has completed.

For each board, the result should be No disagreement. That is, the version of the running software is the same with that of the loaded software.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17-27

17 Loading Host Software

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

17.9 Problems Handling


This describes the method for dealing with problems that may occur during loading or after loading. During the software installation, some software need to be loaded and the loading process of the OMU is relatively complex. Therefore, problems may occur. Handle the problems based on the following rules:
l

Strictly follow the operation guidelines in the document of software installationPay attention to the attentive sectors. Confirm the validity of the operation before handling problems. Do not modify any files in the folder c:\bam or its sub-folders in the OMU hard disk at random. If you cannot solve the problems by consulting the documentation and the related online help, record the related data and contact Huawei technical support staff at local office immediately.

l l

CAUTION
If the following checking items are normal but there is no display yet, contact Huawei technical support staff at local office. Do not operate more as other faults may occur. 17.9.1 No Display on Serial Port Console After System Starts up 17.9.2 Illegible Characters Displayed on Serial Port Console After System Starts up 17.9.3 Normal Display After System Starts up but Command Input Failure 17.9.4 Communication Failure Between the UMG8900 and the FTP Serve on LMT 17.9.5 OMU Board Startup Failure 17.9.6 Loading Failure of Other Boards 17.9.7 UMG8900 Host Software Incorrectly Uploaded to the OMU Hard Disk 17.9.8 Using File Uploading Command of Loading Management Wrongly 17.9.9 Using Unmatched Version 17.9.10 Failing to Recover Configuration Data After System Restarts up

17.9.1 No Display on Serial Port Console After System Starts up


Check whether the serial ports are properly connected, whether the serial port cable is disconnected, or whether the connected serial port is the same as that configured on the HyperTerminal. You also need to check whether the configured parameters of the serial port on the HyperTerminal are the same as those described in 17.2.5 Setting the HyperTerminal. The
17-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

17 Loading Host Software

parameters include the baud rate set on the HyperTerminal. If not, modify them according to 17.2.5 Setting the HyperTerminal.

17.9.2 Illegible Characters Displayed on Serial Port Console After System Starts up
This fault is usually caused by the wrong configuration on the serial port. Therefore, check the configuration of the serial port on the HyperTerminal. Especially check whether the baud rate is the same as that configured in 17.2.5 Setting the HyperTerminal. If not, modify it. If the fault persists, contact Huawei technical support staff at local office.

17.9.3 Normal Display After System Starts up but Command Input Failure
The fault is usually caused by the serial port cable. Therefore, you need to replace it to rectify the fault. If the new cable fails, you can use another serial port on the console. If you are using the Windows HyperTerminal, you just need to reboot Windows to rectify the fault.

17.9.4 Communication Failure Between the UMG8900 and the FTP Serve on LMT
If the built-in firewall of Windows XP is started and the UMG8900 cannot communicate with the FTP server of the PC, loading files will fail. Refer to Figure 17-19. You need to select Close in Setting in the Advanced tab in the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17-29

17 Loading Host Software

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 17-19 Disabling firewall

For Windows XP and 2000, the setting of TCP/IP filtering rules may also cause failure in loading files. You need to deselect check box Enable TCP/IP Filtering (all adapters) in the TCP/IP Filtering dialog box. Refer to Figure 17-20.

17-30

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

17 Loading Host Software

Figure 17-20 TCP/IP filtering

17.9.5 OMU Board Startup Failure


If the BootROM fails to start up, the system will continually reset the board. If the upper layer software fails to start up, it is probably caused by the upper software failure. If the board is repeatedly reset when the BootROM is started, you can judge whether the fault results from the BootROM version or the upper layer software based on the debugging output of the OMU serial port. The board upper layer software version corresponds to the software system. Changing the software version may result in the failure of the board upper layer software to boot. In preceding cases, check whether the UMG8900 software is complete, and whether their versions are consistent according to the version configuration information table and release notes.

17.9.6 Loading Failure of Other Boards


If the software loading fails on a board except the OMU, the system exports the debugging information on the serial port of the OMU. To judge the loading failure, you need to check the debugging information output on the serial ports on both the failed board and the master OMU. If the system prompts NegoErr on the board, it indicates error in version negotiation. The reason may be that only some or no software of the service board is saved in the hard disk of the master OMU if the board boot mode is set to CONSULT or LOAD. You need to check whether the board software is uploaded correctly.
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17-31

17 Loading Host Software

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

If the system prompts Fail to send DidReq message to OMU on the board and then resets the board, it indicates that the board fails to send the DidReq message to the master OMU when the BootROM run. The reason may be that the master OMU does not start up or that the master OMU starts up but the inter-process communication (IPC) channel between the master OMU and the service board is abnormal. If the IPC channel is normal, you can view the synchronization information of the IPC channels from the master OMU and the board sides when the BootROM starts the loading function. If the IPC channel is abnormal, it may be because the CPUID is calculated incorrectly. In this case, check whether the frame number and slot number of the board are correct. If the system prompts Master application error on the board, it indicates that the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) error occurs when the board starts the upper layer software. The reason may be that the upper layer software saved in the FLASH of the board is damaged or incomplete. If you are sure that the software is loaded from the hard disk of the master OMU, check whether the software saved in the hard disk of the OMU is correct.

17.9.7 UMG8900 Host Software Incorrectly Uploaded to the OMU Hard Disk
Files can be loaded in two modes: one through LOD TOBAM of MML command, and the other through FTP on the debug interface FE0 of the OMU. The uploaded files are not named based on the version configuration table, which causes that the OMU loading management function cannot recognize the files. The uploaded files are incomplete and the binary target files of the board software are uploaded in text, which causes error to the target files saved in the OMU hard disk. Thus, the board cannot start up after software loading. Not all the software in the version configuration information table is uploaded, which causes repeated board resets due to unavailability of corresponding files.

17.9.8 Using File Uploading Command of Loading Management Wrongly


With the support of the FTP server, the loading management function can also dynamically load the host software and update the version configuration table. All the connections and settings on the FTP server are correct. However, after you run LOD TOBAM on the LMT command line, the system does not respond and reports failure after a long time. Cause: If the BAM maintenance port of the OMU is connected with the PC network port through a straight through cable, the connection may fail because the configured IP addresses are not in the same sub-network. The FTP connection may also fail due to network congestion. Make sure that you can successfully ping the IP address of the BAM maintenance network port on the OMU from the PC.

17.9.9 Using Unmatched Version


Each product version has its own hardware logic, BSP, upper layer software, and software configuration data. Therefore, you must use them according to the matched version. Other modes of usage may cause failure in board startup or service running unless compatible usage.
17-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

17 Loading Host Software

In this case, you need to reload the software to the OMU and update the software on all the service boards. Use them according to the matched version.

17.9.10 Failing to Recover Configuration Data After System Restarts up


One possible reason is that the configuration data is not saved. If so, you have to configure the data again and save it.

CAUTION
The configuration data cannot be saved automatically. Therefore, you need to save it to the configuration file with SAVE CFG . In this case, the system can restore the configuration data after it restarts up. Another possible reason is that the OMU hard disk is damaged. If so, you need to replace the OMU. Most often, the configuration data cannot be restored because it is not saved.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17-33

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

18 Configuring Remote Maintenance System

18
Context

Configuring Remote Maintenance System

About This Chapter


This describes the applications, configuring procedure, and checking method of remote maintenance system.

The remote maintenance system provides an interface for maintenance personnel to access and maintain the UMG8900 at a remote end. The maintenance personnel can connect the local computer to the public switched telephone network (PSTN) through the modem and dial up to the remote server. The maintenance personnel can also monitor and maintain the device running in the network through the remote access service provided by the Windows 2000 Server.
NOTE

The Microsoft Windows 2000 operating system belongs to Microsoft Corporation. For details, see technical documents of the Microsoft Windows 2000.

The remote maintenance system mainly applies to the case where the maintenance interface of the device uses a private network address and cannot connect to the Internet directly. The remote maintenance system is unnecessary if the private intranet is used to maintain the device. The remote maintenance system is used only when maintenance personnel cannot log in to the user intranet at the remote end. The maintenance personnel needs to maintain the device through the Internet.
l

Physical connection access mode The UMG8900 provides a remote maintenance system for remote dial-up access. The remote workstation dials up to connect the remote access server (RAS) through the PSTN. Refer to Figure 18-1. The client software is installed on the remote workstation and the remote access service is configured on the RAS.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18-1

18 Configuring Remote Maintenance System

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 18-1 Dial-up service networking


UMG8900 LAN Switch Remote Access Server

Modem

PSTN Modem Remote WS

Software/hardware configuration On local emergency workstation, the Windows 2000 Server operating system is installed and the remote access service is configured. On remote terminal, the operating system such as Windows 98 or Windows 2000 Professional can be installed and the dial-up network program is configured. The external modem or built-in modem is configured on both the remote terminal and the RAS.

18.1 Installation Procedure This describes the procedure for installing the remote maintenance system. 18.2 Installing the Modem This describes the procedure for installing the modem. 18.3 Installing the Remote Access Server This describes the procedure for installing the remote access server. 18.4 Adding Dial-up Users This describes the procedure for adding dial-up users. 18.5 Checking the Remote Maintenance System This describes the procedure for checking the remote maintenance system.

18-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

18 Configuring Remote Maintenance System

18.1 Installation Procedure


This describes the procedure for installing the remote maintenance system. Installing remote maintenance system is to install the remote access server (RAS) on the emergency workstation. Figure 18-2 shows the procedure for installing the RAS on the emergency workstation. Figure 18-2 Procedure for installing remote maintenance system
Start

Install the modem

Install the remote access server

Add dial-up user

Check remote maintenance system

End

18.2 Installing the Modem


This describes the procedure for installing the modem.

Context
The following takes the external modem as an example to describe the installation steps.

Procedure
Step 1 In the Windows 2000 operating system, choose Start > Setting > Control Panel, and doubleclick Telephone and modem. Alternatively, click Start > Setting > Control Panel, then, double-click Add/Remove Hardware to install a modem. If no modem is installed in the system, a dialog box appears after you double-click Telephone and modem. Refer to Figure 18-3. In the Windows XP operating system, choose Start > Control Panel. Double-click Phone and Modem Options. Then, you can set the modem. If the modem is not installed, choose the Modems tab and click Add.... Then, the window as shown in Figure 18-3 is displayed.
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 18-3

18 Configuring Remote Maintenance System

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 18-3 Installing a new modem

Step 2 Select Don't detect my modem; I will select it from a list, and then click Next. Figure 18-4 shows the dialog box that appears. Figure 18-4 Selecting the modem

Step 3 Select the serial port for the modem.


l

Select the modem model in the list and then click Next. Then, select the serial port for the modem.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

18-4

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide


l

18 Configuring Remote Maintenance System

You can also click Have Disk. Insert the modem installation disk, and then specify the path to install files. Select the serial port for the modem. Refer to Figure 18-5.

Figure 18-5 Selecting the serial port for the modem

Step 4 The modem driver is installed automatically. A dialog box appears after the installation, indicating that the installation is successful. Refer to Figure 18-6. Click Finish. Figure 18-6 Completing modem installation

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18-5

18 Configuring Remote Maintenance System

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Step 5 After the modem is installed, select the installed modem in modem tab, and click Properties. You can set the modem property and dial property. In general, you can adopt the default values. Refer to Figure 18-7. Figure 18-7 Setting Phone and Modem Properties

----End

18.3 Installing the Remote Access Server


This describes the procedure for installing the remote access server.

Context
After the Windows 2000 server is installed, the remote access component is automatically installed. However, the status of the routing and remote access server is disabled. You need to configure and enable routing and remote access.

Procedure
Step 1 Click Start > Setting > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Routing and Remote Access to display the Routing and Remote Access window. Right-click the server to be
18-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

18 Configuring Remote Maintenance System

configured. Then, click the Configure and Enable Routing and Remote Access menu. Refer to Figure 18-8. Figure 18-8 Routing and remote access

Step 2 Select Configure and Enable Routing and Remote Access. The Welcome to the Routing and Remote Access Server Setup Wizard window appears. Refer to Figure 18-9. Figure 18-9 Welcome to the routing and remote access server setup wizard

Step 3 Click Next, then the Common Configurations window appears. The common configurations include Internet connection server, Remote access server, Virtual private network (VPN)
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 18-7

18 Configuring Remote Maintenance System

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

server, Network router, Manually configured server. Select Remote access server. Refer to Figure 18-10. Figure 18-10 Common configurations

Step 4 Click Next. The Remote Access Server Setup dialog box appears. Select Set up an advanced remote access server. Then, click Next. Refer to Figure 18-11. Figure 18-11 Remote access server setup

18-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

18 Configuring Remote Maintenance System

Step 5 Click Next. The Remote Client Protocols dialog box appears. Check whether the TCP/IP protocol required by remote client server is listed. If not, add the protocol. Refer to Figure 18-12. Figure 18-12 Remote client protocols

Step 6 Click Next. The IP address Assignment dialog box appears. This dialog box can help the operators select IP address range for remote clients. Select From a specified range of addresses to set the IP address range to remote clients. Refer to Figure 18-13. Figure 18-13 IP address assignment

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18-9

18 Configuring Remote Maintenance System

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Step 7 Click Next to assign a static pool of IP addresses to remote clients. The New Address Range dialog box appears. This server assigns all the addresses in the first range before continuing to the next. Refer to Figure 18-14. Figure 18-14 Address range assignment

Step 8 Click New to assign the IP address range to remote workstations. A dialog box appears. Refer to Figure 18-15. Use the static address set and configure its range. When you configure the static address set, note that the address set must be within a reasonable range of the network. Usually less than four IP addresses are assigned so that other workstations can be added to the server. The local PC cannot use the IP addresses in the static address set. To avoid the conflict of IP addresses, it is recommended to use the network segment ranging from 129.9.160.200 to 129.9.160.202. After setting the address range, click OK. Refer to Figure 18-15. Figure 18-15 New address range

18-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

18 Configuring Remote Maintenance System

Step 9 Click Next. Refer to Figure 18-16. Figure 18-16 Address range assignment

Step 10 The Managing multiple remote access servers dialog box provides a database to verify the identification for multiple remote access servers. Select No, I don't want to set up this server to use remote RADIUS now. Refer to Figure 18-17. Figure 18-17 Managing multiple remote access servers

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18-11

18 Configuring Remote Maintenance System

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Step 11 Click Finish to complete the routing and remote access server setup wizard. Refer to Figure 18-18. Figure 18-18 Completing the routing and remote access server setup wizard

Step 12 After the setup is completed, the Routing and Remote Access window displays the remote access server that is configured. Refer to Figure 18-19. Figure 18-19 Configured remote access server

Step 13 Right-click Ports and then click Properties on the shortcut menu to set the port of the remote access server. Refer to Figure 18-20.
18-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

18 Configuring Remote Maintenance System

Figure 18-20 Setting port properties

Step 14 Select Properties. Then the Ports Properties dialog box appears. Select your modem and then click Configure. Refer to Figure 18-21. Figure 18-21 Selecting the modem

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18-13

18 Configuring Remote Maintenance System

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Step 15 In the displayed dialog box, select both the Remote access connections (inbound only) and Demand-dial routing connections (inbound and outbound) check boxes. Then, type the phone number for this device, which should be the same as that of the telephone connected. Refer to Figure 18-22. Click OK to complete the modem configuration for the remote access server. Then an authenticated client can connect to the server and access the intranet where the server is located. Figure 18-22 Setting port properties of the modem

Step 16 This step enables clients to access the intranet to which the remote access server is connected and to set the properties of incoming connections. Right-click My Network Places and select Open. Then right-click Incoming Connections and select Properties on the shortcut menu. The Network and Dial-up Connections window appears. Refer to Figure 18-23.

18-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

18 Configuring Remote Maintenance System

Figure 18-23 Network and dial-up connections

Step 17 Right-click Incoming Connections Properties, and select Properties on the shortcut menu. Under the Networking tab, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and then click Properties. Refer to Figure 18-24.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18-15

18 Configuring Remote Maintenance System

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 18-24 Incoming connections properties

Step 18 The Incoming TCP/IP Properties dialog box appears. Select Allow callers to access my local area network. Verify other settings and click OK. Refer to Figure 18-25.

18-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

18 Configuring Remote Maintenance System

Figure 18-25 Incoming TCP/IP properties

----End

18.4 Adding Dial-up Users


This describes the procedure for adding dial-up users.

Context
After the dial-up server is configured, you need to allocate accounts to dial-in users; otherwise, remote users cannot access the system.

Procedure
Step 1 Click Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Computer Management and the Computer Management window appears. Refer to Figure 18-26.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18-17

18 Configuring Remote Maintenance System

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 18-26 Computer management

Step 2 Select Local Users and Groups in the expanded navigation tree and click Users. Then, all the users of the server are listed in the right pane of the window. Refer to Figure 18-27. To add a new user, right-click the right panel and click New User on the shortcut menu. You can also click the Action > New User menu in the Computer Management window to add a new user. Figure 18-27 Setting local users and groups

Step 3 Set related parameters and then click Create. Refer to Figure 18-28.

18-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

18 Configuring Remote Maintenance System

Figure 18-28 Adding a new user

To ensure the network security, it is recommended to select the User cannot change password and Password never expires check boxes. Step 4 Right click the new user and then click Properties on the shortcut menu. Refer to Figure 18-29. Figure 18-29 User dial properties interface

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18-19

18 Configuring Remote Maintenance System

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Step 5 In the Dial Properties dialog box, click the Dial-in tab. Then, select Allow access in the Remote Access Permissions (Dial-in or VPN) area and No Callback in the Callback Options area. Refer to Figure 18-30. Click OK to complete setting the dial-in properties. Now the remote operator can access the host through a telephone line. Figure 18-30 Setting dial-in properties

----End

18.5 Checking the Remote Maintenance System


This describes the procedure for checking the remote maintenance system. 18.5.1 Checking Modem This describes the steps for checking the modem. 18.5.2 Checking Remote Access Server This describes the steps for checking the remote access server (RAS).

18.5.1 Checking Modem


This describes the steps for checking the modem.
18-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

18 Configuring Remote Maintenance System

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the telephone line to the LINE port on the modem of the server. Step 2 Click Start > Programs > Accessories > Communication Tool > Phone Dialer, and a window appears. Refer to Figure 18-31. Figure 18-31 Phone dialer

Step 3 Dial the number of another phone for test, and then click Dial. Step 4 Listen whether this test phone rings, and whether there is dial tone when the modem dials. Step 5 If you can hear the ringing and dial tones, it indicates that the modem is correctly installed. Otherwise, the modem is not correctly installed or configured. In the latter case, you need to uninstall the modem, and then install it again. ----End

18.5.2 Checking Remote Access Server


This describes the steps for checking the remote access server (RAS).

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the telephone line to the test computer where the modem and dial-up network adapter are installed. Step 2 Click Start > Programs > Accessories > Communication Tool > Dial-Up Networking and a window appears. Refer to Figure 18-32.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18-21

18 Configuring Remote Maintenance System

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure 18-32 Entering Dial-Up Networking dialog box

Step 3 If there is no connection displayed in the Dial-Up Networking window, double-click Make New Connection icon. Then you can create a new connection as prompted by the system. After the new connection is set up, this connection is displayed in the window. Double-click the new connection and a dialog box pops up. Refer to Figure 18-33. Figure 18-33 Setting up a new connection

18-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

18 Configuring Remote Maintenance System

Step 4 In the dialog box, type the user name and password that are added at the emergency workstation. Type the telephone number used by the modem of the emergency workstation. Then click Connect to start dialing the number. Step 5 Wait and see whether the connection is successful. If it is successful, make the following test:
l

Click Start > Run . In the displayed dialog box, run PING command by typing PING 129.9.x.x and click OK to run this command. Here, 129.9.x.x is the IP address of the computer in the LAN where the emergency workstation is located. The computer can be the emergency workstation, BAM server or common workstation. Check the returned result with the PING command. If the connection is normal, the prompt of Reply from xxx appears. In the prompt, xxx is the typed IP address. It indicates that the dial-up network works normally, and the dial up server is installed successfully. If the PING command fails, check the RAS setting on the emergency workstation.

Step 6 If the dial-up connection fails, check the following items:


l

Whether the IP address of the dial-up network adapter in the remote workstation is Get IP address automatically. Whether the dial-up user is added to the emergency workstation, and whether the user name and password are correct. Whether the RAS is set correctly on the emergency workstation.

----End

Postrequisite
If all the preceding check items are normal, the RAS can access the terminal system of the UMG8900 through the public switched telephone network (PSTN).

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18-23

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

19 Loading OMU Software Manually

19
Context

Loading OMU Software Manually

About This Chapter


This describes the applications, loading preparations, loading procedure, and loading steps.

The OMU of the UMG8900 is installed with software before delivery. The installed software contains management software, service board software and other configuration files. That is the installation of the whole BAM is completed. By default, when the UMG8900 is powered on, the OMU can start normally; If not, you need to load the software to the OMU manually.
NOTE

You need to load the OMU software manually only when the OMU cannot start. If the OMU can start normally, bypass this step and perform 17 Loading Host Software.

19.1 Loading Procedure This describes the procedure for loading software to the OMU manually. 19.2 Software Loading Preparation This describes the preparatory work for loading the OMU manually. 19.3 Software Loading Procedure This describes the procedure for manually loading software to the OMU.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

19-1

19 Loading OMU Software Manually

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

19.1 Loading Procedure


This describes the procedure for loading software to the OMU manually. The OMU manages and maintains the UMG8900 host. The OMU, as the core management unit, also provides the interfaces connecting with the LMT and the iManager. When the OMU starts normally, you can install software in the UMG8900 host. Other boards can start only when the OMU starts normally. The support of the OMU is required in loading and upgrading other boards. Figure 19-1 shows procedures for loading software to the OMU manually. Figure 19-1 Procedure for loading software to the OMU manually
Start

Manual loading preparations completed Power on the main control frame and start the OMU

Set the FTP server

Start the FTP service and download part of the configuration files

Reset and reboot the OMU

Install all software on the OMU

Load software on the slave OMU

Check version consistency

End

19-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

19 Loading OMU Software Manually

19.2 Software Loading Preparation


This describes the preparatory work for loading the OMU manually.

Context
The preparatory work includes:
l l l l l

System hardware preparations System software preparations Modifying MML configuration files Setting the FTP server Setting the HyperTerminal

For details on modifying the MML configuration file, see 17.2.3 Configuring MML Batch Files. For details on setting FTP server see 17.2.4 Setting FTP Server. For details on HyperTerminal see 17.2.5 Setting the HyperTerminal. 19.2.1 System Hardware Preparation This describes the hardware required for loading the OMU software manually. 19.2.2 System Software Preparation This describes the software required for loading the OMU software manually.

19.2.1 System Hardware Preparation


This describes the hardware required for loading the OMU software manually.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the hardware installation is completed. Check whether the physical connections of primary boards are correct, whether the positions of boards are correct, and whether the boards pass the power-on test. Step 2 Connect the OMC interface of the MOMD in slot 1 and the PC network port with the crossover network cable. If the UMG8900 is connected through the HUB or the local area network (LAN), use the straight through network cable to connect them. Step 3 Connect the debug serial port COM0 on the MMIU to the computer serial port with the serial interface cable. ----End

19.2.2 System Software Preparation


This describes the software required for loading the OMU software manually.
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 19-3

19 Loading OMU Software Manually

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Copy all the files in the BAM directory of the software installation package to directory C:\BAM of the PC. The directory includes all the configuration files of the version and the necessary target files. Step 2 Copy the filelist.txt file and omd_vxWorks_l file of the software installation package to the directory C:\ of the PC. ----End

19.3 Software Loading Procedure


This describes the procedure for manually loading software to the OMU.

Context

CAUTION
If loading the software to the master/slave OMUs, you need to pull out the slave OMU. After the software is loaded to the master OMU, insert the slave OMU, and synchronize the software of the master OMU to the slave OMU.

Procedure
Step 1 Pull out the MOMD in slot 2. Power on the SSM frame, and then start the MOMD in slot 1. Step 2 The MOMD runs the basic BootROM, and you can view the startup process through HyperTerminal. Press Enter upon the appearance of the following message to enter the BSP mode.
Press Enter to stop auto-boot...

Step 3 Modify BSP configuration files of the OMU. After the basic BoorROM of the OMU is started, press any key to access the bottom support program (BSP) command menu during auto booting countdown. Use the BSP command character p to view the IP address, user name and password of the FTP server, the name of the VxWorks map file and IP address of the debug port configured by BSP. Other options can be ignored. If the configuration is inconsistent with that of the PC, use the BSP command character c to modify the configuration. Perform the following steps:
[VxWorks Boot]: c //Input the C command to change the boot parameters. boot device : motfcc0 processor number : 0 host name : host file name : omd_vxWorks_l.st file inet on ethernet (e) : xx.xx.xx.xx on the MOMD inet on backplane (b) :

//The name of the VxWorks system mapping //The IP address of the OMC interface

19-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide


host inet (h) : xx.xx.xx.yy gateway inet (g): user (u) : bam FTP server ftp password (pw)(blank=use rsh) : bam the FTP server

19 Loading OMU Software Manually


//The IP address of the PC //The user name for logging into the //The password for logging into

flags (f) : 0x0 target name (tn) : target startup script (s) : other (o) : //Complete setting the boot parameters after pressing the Enter key.

Step 4 Download the omd_vxWorks_l.st file automatically. Use BSP command character @ to automatically download the omd_vxWorks_l.st file from the FTP server of PC. The automatic loading includes writing the OMU-related software to the OMU hard disk, initializing the hard disk (including formatting), and uploading some configuration files in BAM directory of the PC to the OMU hard disk based on the filelist.txt file.
NOTE

The automatic loading includes writing the MOMD-related software into the FLASH of the MOMD, initializing the FLASH file system (deleting the whole FLASH), and loading related configuration files in BAM directory of the PC to the MOMD file system. Then, the MOMD restarts.

Step 5 Insert the MOMD in slot 2. Step 6 Run do reboot on the HyperTerminal to reset the MOMD in slot 1. Then, pull out the MOMD in slot 1. Step 7 Connect the debug network cable to the debug network port of the MOMD in slot 2. Then, connect the debug serial port to the COM1 of the MMIU. Step 8 Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 to load the software to the MOMD in slot 2.
NOTE

If the MOMD in slot 2 starts the software in upper layer, run do reboot to reset the board.

Step 9 Insert the MOMD in slot 1. ----End

Postrequisite
If the software is loaded to two MOMDs, perform the steps in 17.3 Loading Host Software.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

19-5

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

A Mounting Cabling Racks

A
Context

Mounting Cabling Racks

This describes how to mount the cabling racks.

Figure A-1 shows the procedure for mounting cabling racks. Figure A-1 Procedure for mounting cabling racks
Start

Where to mount the cabling rack?

Indoor

Outdoor

Ceiling/floor mounting

Wall mounting

Over-cabinet mounting

Walling mounting

Ceiling/floor mounting

Install the cabling ladder No

Cabling trough required? Yes Mount the cabling trough Mount the accessories End

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-1

A Mounting Cabling Racks

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

NOTE

l l l

The cabling racks include the cabling ladders and cabling troughs (optional). When cables are laid in overhead cabling mode, it is recommended to install cabling racks. If the cabling racks are not required, skip this part. It is recommended to install 400 mm [15.7 in.] cabling ladder rather than cabling troughs above the cabinet. This can facilitate the cabling and is good for heat dissipation.

A.1 Introduction to Cabling Racks This describes the specifications and components of the cabling rack. A.2 Mounting Indoor Cabling Racks This describes how to mount the indoor cabling racks. A.3 Mounting Outdoor Cabling Racks This describes how to mount the outdoor cabling racks. A.4 Mounting Cabling Ladders This describes how to mount the cabling ladders. A.5 Mounting Cabling Troughs This describes how to mount the cabling troughs. A.6 Mounting Accessories This describes how to connect the cable-through racks, end covers, trough rims, and baffle rings.

A-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

A Mounting Cabling Racks

A.1 Introduction to Cabling Racks


This describes the specifications and components of the cabling rack.

Specifications
In overhead cabling mode, mount the cabling rack in the equipment room. The cables can go along the cabling rack. The cabling ladder is mainly used and the cabling trough is an auxiliary component (optional). The specifications of the cabling ladder and cabling trough are as follows:
l l l

Choose 200 mm [7.9 in.] wide cabling trough for 200 mm [7.9 in.] wide cabling ladder. Choose 400 mm [15.7 in.] wide cabling trough for 400 mm [15.7 in.] wide cabling ladder. Choose 400 mm + 200 mm [15.7 in. + 7.9 in.] wide cabling trough for 600 mm [23.6 in.] wide cabling ladder.

The cabling ladder is 2.5 m [8.2 ft.] long and the cabling trough is 2 m [6.6 ft.] long for delivery.

Components
Table A-1 lists the components for mounting the cabling trough. Table A-1 Procedure for mounting cabling racks Figure A-2 Cabling ladder Figure A-3 U-shaped connecting piece

Figure A-4 Bracket angle

Figure A-5 Cable manager

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-3

A Mounting Cabling Racks

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure A-6 Triangular support

Figure A-7 Connecting clip

Figure A-8 Fixing clip

Figure A-9 Cabling trough

Figure A-10 Movable bushing

Figure A-11 End cover

Figure A-12 Rectangular frame

Figure A-13 U-steel

A.2 Mounting Indoor Cabling Racks


This describes how to mount the indoor cabling racks.

Prerequisite
The cabling rack must be insulated from the floor, ceiling, or wall.

A-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

A Mounting Cabling Racks

Context
The indoor cabling rack can be mounted in three ways:
l l

Ceiling mounting or floor mounting Wall mounting

Procedure
l Ceiling mounting or floor mounting

CAUTION
l

The spacing between suspending lever and support lever must be an integer multiple of 50 mm [2.0 in.]. The recommended value is 1250 mm [49.2 in.], that is, each cabling segment is supported by two suspending levers or two support levers. For ceiling mounting or floor mounting, mount the suspending lever or supporting lever outside the cabling ladder for easy mounting of cabling trough. Add the insulating pad and insulating washer during mounting. When fixing the bracket angle to the ceiling or floor with the expansion bolts, replace the flat washer on the expansion bolt with the large flat washer 8. Use the bolt M6x20 to connect the bracket angle with the suspending lever. If the cabling trough is installed on the cabling ladder, mount the bolt as top as possible, and space the bolt at least 40 mm [1.6 in.] from the cabling ladder. Refer to Figure A-14.

When the cabling rack is not mounted against the wall, you can choose the ceiling mounting or floor mounting.

For ceiling mounting, use the suspending lever to connect to the ceiling. For floor mounting, use the support lever to connect to the floor.

Ceiling mounting and floor mounting are similar. The ceiling mounting is taken as an example to describe the mounting procedure. 1. 2. 3. 4. Determine the position for mounting the cabling rack according to the engineering files. Determine and mark the position for mounting the suspending lever according to the position of cabling rack. Choose a 10 bit to drill holes at the marked positions, with the hole depth from 60 mm [2.4 in.] to 65 mm [2.6 in.]. Screw on the nut M8 anticlockwise to the top of the expansion bolt M8x80, and put them into the holes vertically. Knock the expansion bolt with a claw hammer until the tube is knocked completely into the ceiling. Take off the flat washer and spring washer from the expansion bolt. Cut the U-steel with a proper length as the suspending lever according to the height of the cabling rack and equipment room. When the required length exceeds 2.5 m [8.2 ft.], you can connect two U-steels together. For the connection method, see A.4 Mounting Cabling Ladders. Remember to paint the cross section.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. A-5

5.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

A Mounting Cabling Racks

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

6. 7.

Mount bracket angles on both ends of the suspending lever with the bolt M6x20 and nut M6. Put the insulating pad on the expansion bolts, and then put the expansion bolts through the holes in the bracket angle. Add the insulating washers, large flat washers 8, spring washers 8 and nuts M8 onto the expansion bolts. Screw on nuts M8 to fasten the suspending lever. Connect the cabling ladder and the suspending lever with the bolt M8x20 and nut M8. Figure A-14 shows the ceiling mounting. Figure A-14 Mounting the cabling rack to the ceiling
Expansion bolt M8 x 80 Insulating pad Insulating washer Large flat washer 8 Spring washer 8 Nut M8

8.

Bolt M6 x 20

Nut M6

Nut M8

Bolt M8 x 20

9.

When the ceiling has an obstacle or the support span is too wide, you can add a Usteel to connect the two suspending levers and fix it to the cabling ladder. Refer to Figure A-15.

A-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

A Mounting Cabling Racks

Figure A-15 Mounting the cabling rack to the ceiling with an obstacle

Nut M8

Nut M6

Bolt M8 x 20

Bolt M8 x 20

Bolt M6 x 20

Nut M8

Wall mounting You can mount the cabling rack against the wall if necessary. Note the following when mounting the cabling rack against the wall with a triangular support.

When fixing the triangular support to the wall, you must add the insulating pad and insulating washer for insulation between support and wall. When fixing the support to the wall with the expansion bolt, you must use large flat washer 8 instead of the flat washer of the expansion bolt. The spacing between two adjacent triangular supports must be an integer multiple of 50 mm [2.0 in.]. Otherwise, the cabling ladder and the support cannot be fixed. The recommended value is 1250 mm [49.2 in.], that is, each cabling ladder is supported by two triangular supports.

CAUTION
Fix two insulating pads between the column of the triangular supports and the wall, and fix one insulating pad between each bolt and column. 1. 2. Determine the position for mounting the cabling rack according to the engineering files. Determine and mark the position for mounting the triangle support. Mark the positions for drilling holes on the wall through the triangle support. Mount two triangle supports for each cabling ladder and keep 1250 mm [49.2 in.] between two triangular supports. Choose a 10 bit to drill holes at the marked positions, with the hole depth from 60 mm [2.4 in.] to 65 mm [2.6 in.]. Screw on the nut M8 anticlockwise to the top of the expansion bolt M8x80, and put them into the holes vertically. Knock the expansion bolt with a claw hammer until the tube is knocked completely into the wall.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. A-7

3. 4.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

A Mounting Cabling Racks

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

5. 6.

Take off the flat washer, spring washer, and screw from the expansion bolt. Put the insulating pad on the expansion bolt. Put the expansion bolts through the holes on the triangular supports. Add the insulating washers, large flat washers 8, spring washers 8 and nuts M8 onto the expansion bolts. Screw on the nut M8 to fix the triangular supports against the wall. Refer to Figure A-16. Figure A-16 Fixing the triangular support
m 0m

125

Triangular support

Expansion bolt Insulating pad M8 x 80

Nut M8

Spring washer 8 Large flat washer8 Insulating washer

7.

Put the cabling ladder directly on the beam of the triangular support. Align holes in the U-steel lower side of the ladder with those in the beam of the triangular support, and then fix the ladder to the triangular support with the bolt M6x20 and nut M6. Refer to Figure A-17.

A-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

A Mounting Cabling Racks

Figure A-17 Fixing the cabling ladder to the support

Nut M6

Bolt M6 x 20

----End

Postrequisite
After mounting the indoor cabling support, you can install the cabling ladder.

A.3 Mounting Outdoor Cabling Racks


This describes how to mount the outdoor cabling racks.

Context
The outdoor cabling rack can be mounted in two ways:
l l

Wall mounting Ground mounting

CAUTION
When determining the position for the cabling rack with the rectangular frame, put the rectangular frame in the correct direction. Refer to Figure A-18.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-9

A Mounting Cabling Racks

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure A-18 Rectangular frame


Hole for connecting to the cabling ladder

Hole for connecting to the wall

Hole for connecting to the ground

Procedure
l Wall mounting You can mount the cabling rack against the wall if necessary. 1. 2. Determine the position for mounting the cabling rack according to the engineering files. Determine and mark the position for mounting the rectangular frame. Mark the positions for drilling holes on the wall through the rectangular frame. Mount two rectangular frames for each cabling ladder and keep 1250 mm [49.2 in.] between two rectangular frames. Choose a 10 bit to drill holes at the marked positions, with the hole depth from 60 mm [2.4 in.] to 65 mm [2.6 in.]. Screw on the nut M8 anticlockwise to the top of the expansion bolt M8x80, and put them into the holes vertically. Knock the expansion bolt with a claw hammer until the tube is knocked completely into the wall. Take off the flat washer, spring washer, and screw from the expansion bolt. Put the insulating pad on the expansion bolt. Put the expansion bolts through the holes on the beam of the rectangular frames. Add the insulating washers, large flat washers 8, spring washers 8 and nuts M8 onto the expansion bolts. Screw on nuts M8 to fix the rectangular frames on the wall. Refer to Figure A-19. Put the cabling ladder directly on the beam of the rectangular frame. Align the holes at the lower side of the U-steel of the cabling ladder with the mounting holes of the rectangular frame, and connect them with the bolt M6x20 and the nut M6. Refer to Figure A-19.

3. 4.

5. 6.

7.

A-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

A Mounting Cabling Racks

Figure A-19 Mounting the outdoor cabling rack against the wall
Insulating washer Large flat washer 8 Insulating pad Expansion bolt M8 x 80 Spring washer 8 Nut M8

Nut M6

Bolt M6 x 20

Ground mounting If the cabling rack does not go along the wall, you can mount it on the ground. 1. 2. Determine the position for mounting the cabling rack according to the engineering files. Determine and mark the position for mounting the rectangular frame. Mark the positions for drilling holes on the ground through the rectangular frame. Mount two rectangular frames for each cabling ladder and keep 1250 mm [49.2 in.] between two rectangular frames. Choose a 10 bit to drill holes at the marked positions, with the hole depth from 60 mm [2.4 in.] to 65 mm [2.6 in.]. Screw on the nut M8 anticlockwise to the top of the expansion bolt M8x80, and put them into the holes vertically. Knock the expansion bolt with a claw hammer until the tube is knocked completely into the ground. Take off the flat washer, spring washer, and screw from the expansion bolt. Put the insulating pad on the expansion bolt. Put the expansion bolts through the holes on the beam of the rectangular frames. Add the insulating washers, large flat washers 8, spring washers 8 and nuts M8 onto the expansion bolts. Screw on nuts M8 to fix the rectangular frames on the ground. Refer to Figure A-20. Put the cabling ladder directly on the beam of the rectangular frame. Align the holes at the lower side of the U-steel of the cabling ladder with the mounting holes of the rectangular frame, and connect them with the bolt M6x20 and the nut M6. Refer to Figure A-20.

3. 4.

5. 6.

7.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-11

A Mounting Cabling Racks

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure A-20 Mounting the outdoor cabling rack on the ground


Nut M6

Bolt M6 x 20

Nut M8 Spring washer 8 Large flat washer 8 Insulating washer Insulating pad Expansion bolt M8 x 80

----End

Postrequisite
After mounting the outdoor cabling support, you can install the cabling ladder.

A.4 Mounting Cabling Ladders


This describes how to mount the cabling ladders.

Prerequisite
Before mounting the cabling ladder, install the cabling racks.

Context
You may perform the following steps in actual installation: assemble two cabling ladders horizontally; turn the cabling ladder upright; mount the cabling ladder to the wall; lay the cabling ladder upward or downward. The detailed methods are described as follows:
l l l l

Assemble the cabling ladder Turn the cabling ladder Connect the cabling ladder to the wall Joint the cabling ladder
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

A-12

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

A Mounting Cabling Racks

Procedure
l Assemble the cabling ladder. When long cabling ladder is needed, you must connect several cabling ladders together with U-shaped connecting components. At the same time, connect two adjacent cabling ladders with three grounding cables to ensure reliable grounding of the cabling rack. Ground the first and fourth bolts with grounding cable, which are used to connect the cabling ladder and the U-shaped connecting component. Connect the second or third bolt to the second or third bolt at the other side with grounding cables. Figure A-21 shows the method for assembling the cabling ladders. Figure A-21 Assembling cabling ladders

Nut M8 Toothed pad Bolt M8 x 20 Grounding wire

NOTE

If the length of the cabling ladder is not an integer multiple of 2.5 m [8.2 ft.], you can cut off the redundant part. After cutting the ladder, paint the cross section for rust protection and nice appearance.

Turn the cabling ladder. You can turn the cabling ladders either at the same level or at different levels based on the cabling trough of the supports. If both the cabling ladders are mounted with/without cabling troughs, the turning methods are the same. Connect both cabling ladders with the bracket angle, bolt and nut. Make sure that the two ladders are in the same level. Refer to Figure A-22.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-13

A Mounting Cabling Racks

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure A-22 Turning the cabling ladder at the same level (without cabling troughs)

Nut M8

Nut M6

Bolt M8 x 20

Bolt M6 x 20

CAUTION
During the mounting, if one cabling ladder is mounted with cabling trough, make sure the cabling ladder and the cabling trough of the other cabling ladder are at the same level after mounting the cabling ladder. If the cabling ladder to be turned has a cabling trough segment, connect the two cabling ladders with the bracket angle, bolt, and nut. Refer to Figure A-23.

A-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

A Mounting Cabling Racks

Figure A-23 Turning the cabling ladder at different levels

Nut M6 Bolt M6 x 20

Nut M8

Bolt M8 x 20

Connect the cabling ladder to the wall. Connect the cabling ladder to the wall with the bracket angle, insulating pad, insulating washer, spring washer, flat waster, and expansion bolt. Refer to 1 and 2 in Figure A-24. Figure A-24 Connecting the cabling ladder to the wall

Nut M6

Expansion bolt M8 x 80 Insulating pad

Bolt M6 x 20

Nut M8 Large flat washer 8 Insulating washer Spring washer 8

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-15

A Mounting Cabling Racks

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Joint the cabling ladder. 1. 2. Choose a segment of cabling ladder as the climbing ladder. Joint climbing ladder and cabling ladder with the bracket angle, bolt, and nut. The climbing ladder and cabling ladder can be jointed in three modes, including front jointing, side jointing, and oblique jointing. Figure A-25 shows the front jointing. Figure A-25 Front jointing of climbing ladders
Nut M6 Bolt M6 x 20 Bolt M8 x 20

Nut M8

Figure A-26 shows the side jointing. Figure A-26 Side jointing of climbing ladders

Nut M6 Bolt M6 x 20 Bolt M6 x 20 Nut M6

A-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

A Mounting Cabling Racks

Figure A-27 shows the oblique jointing. Figure A-27 Oblique jointing of climbing ladders

Nut M8

Bolt M8 x 20

Nut M8

Bolt M8 x 20

----End

Postrequisite
After mounting the cabling ladder, you can mount the cabling trough. If the cabling trough is not amounted, you can install the fittings.

A.5 Mounting Cabling Troughs


This describes how to mount the cabling troughs.

Prerequisite
Before mounting the cabling trough, mount the cabling racks and cabling ladders.

Context
The cabling trough has two types: 200 mm [7.9 in.] wide and 400 [15.7 in.] mm wide. Therefore, a cabling trough can be mounted on the following:
l l

A 200 mm [7.9 in.] or 400 mm [15.7 in.] wide cabling ladder A 600 mm [23.6 in.] wide cabling ladder

If the cabling ladder needs to be lengthened, lengthen it first, and then fix it on the cabling ladder.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-17

A Mounting Cabling Racks

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Procedure
l Connecting cabling troughs The cabling trough has taper. Therefore, you can only insert the smaller end of the cabling trough to the larger end of the other. Refer to Figure A-28. The insertion depth must be smaller than 250 mm [9.8 in.]. Figure A-28 Connecting cabling troughs

Mount the cabling trough on 200 mm [7.9 in.] or 400 mm [15.7 in.] wide cabling ladder. To mount the cabling trough on the 200 mm [7.9 in.] or 400 mm [15.7 in.] wide cabling ladder, perform the following steps: 1. 2. 3. Choose the 200 mm [7.9 in.] or 400 mm [15.7 in.] wide cabling trough. Put the cabling trough onto the cabling ladder. Fix the cabling trough to the cabling ladder with the fixing clip. Each cabling trough segment needs four clips, with two on each side of the trough. Figure A-29 shows the method for mounting the cabling trough on a 200 mm [7.9 in.] or 400 mm [15.7 in.] cabling ladder. Figure A-29 Mounting the cabling trough on a 200 mm [7.9 in.] or 400 mm [15.7 in.] cabling ladder

Fixing clip Nut M8 Bolt M8 x 20

l
A-18

Mount the cabling trough on 600 mm [23.6 in.] wide cabling ladder.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

A Mounting Cabling Racks

To mount the cabling trough on the 600 mm [23.6 in.] wide cabling ladder, perform the following steps: 1. Connect the cabling troughs of 200 mm [7.9 in.] and 400 mm [15.7 in.] wide with the connecting clips to form a cabling trough of 600 mm [23.6 in.] wide. Each cabling trough segment needs three clips. Fix the cabling trough to the cabling ladder with the fixing clip. Each cabling trough segment needs four clips, with two on each side of the trough. Figure A-30 shows the procedure for mounting the cabling trough on the 600 mm [23.6 in.] wide cabling ladder. Figure A-30 Mounting the cabling trough on a 600 mm [23.6 in.] cabling ladder

2.

Connecting clip

Fixing clip

Mount the cabling troughs obliquely.

CAUTION
The slope of the cabling trough can be smaller than the required. 1. Cut off the upper side of the triangle aperture in the cabling trough. Refer to Figure A-31. Paint the cross section. Figure A-31 Cutting off the upper side of the triangle aperture in the cabling trough

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-19

A Mounting Cabling Racks

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

2.

Bend one part of the cabling trough with the marking line as the axis to the desired angle. Figure A-32 shows the method for bending one part of the cabling trough. Figure A-32 Mounting cabling troughs obliquely

3.

Fix the cabling trough to the cabling ladder with the fixing clip. Figure A-33 shows the cabling trough mounted obliquely onto the cabling ladder. Figure A-33 Cabling troughs mounted obliquely onto the cabling ladder

----End

Postrequisite
After mounting the cabling ladder, proceed with A.6 Mounting Accessories.
A-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

A Mounting Cabling Racks

A.6 Mounting Accessories


This describes how to connect the cable-through racks, end covers, trough rims, and baffle rings.

Prerequisite
Before mounting the accessories, mount the cabling racks, cabling ladders, and cabling troughs.

Context
The mounting of cabling rack involves the mounting of the following accessories:
l l

Mount the cable-through rack Mount the end cover, trough rim, and baffle ring

Procedure
l Mount the cable-through rack. The cable-through rack is often mounted on the cabling ladder over the cabinet. The quantity and mounting positions are based upon the actual condition.

CAUTION
To make sure thon the top of the cable-through rack is flush with that of the cabling rack, note the following:
l

If there is the cabling trough, fasten the cable-through rack to the cabling ladder through lower holes in the cable-through rack. If there is no cabling trough, fasten the cable-through rack to the cabling ladder through upper holes in the cable-through rack.

Figure A-34 shows the cable-through rack without the cabling trough. Figure A-34 Cable-through racks mounted to the cabling rack without the cabling trough

Cable manager

Cabling rack

Bolt M8 x 20

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-21

A Mounting Cabling Racks

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure A-35 shows the cable-through rack with the cabling trough. Figure A-35 Cable-through racks mounted to the cabling rack with the cabling trough

Cable manager

Cabling trough

Cabling ladder

Bolt M8 x 20

Mount the end cover, trough rim, and baffle ring. The trough rim can protect cables from damage and end cover is for nice appearance.

The trough rim covers the bottom edge of the cabling trough. All the exposed bottom edges of the cabling trough shall be covered with the trough rim. The end cover is used at the end of the cabling ladders. Mount end covers for all cabling ladders if possible.

The methods for mounting the trough rim and end cover are shown in 1 and 2 in Figure A-36. The baffle ring is mounted on both sides of the cabling trough to increase the height of the trough and to hold cables inside the trough. Each segment of cabling trough uses four baffle rings, evenly mounted on both sides. The method for mounting the baffle ring is shown in 3 in Figure A-36. Figure A-36 Mounting end covers, trough rims, and baffle rings

A-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

A Mounting Cabling Racks

----End

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-23

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

B Assembling Cable Connectors

Assembling Cable Connectors

This describes how to assemble the cable connectors. B.1 Assembling Power Cable Connectors This describes how to assemble the power cable connectors. B.2 Assembling RJ45 Connectors This describes the how to assemble RJ45 connectors. B.3 Assembling RJ48 Connectors of Twisted Pair Trunk Cables This part describes the how to assemble the RJ48 connectors of the twisted pair trunk cables. B.4 Assembling SMB Connectors This describes how to assemble the SMB connectors.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-1

B Assembling Cable Connectors

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

B.1 Assembling Power Cable Connectors


This describes how to assemble the power cable connectors.

Context
The method applies to the assembly of bare pressure terminals and 50 mm2 to 240 mm2 power cables. B.1.1 Cutting Power Cables This describes how to cut the power cables. B.1.2 Mounting Heat-Shrinkable Tubes This describes how to mount the heat-shrinkable tubes. B.1.3 Stripping Power Cables This describes how to strip the power cables. B.1.4 Crimping Power Cable Connectors B.1.5 Shrinking Heat-Shrinkable Tubes of Power Cable Connectors This describes how to shrink the heat-shrinkable tubes of power cable connectors. B.1.6 Checking Power Cable Connectors This describes how to check the power cable connectors after the installation is complete.

B.1.1 Cutting Power Cables


This describes how to cut the power cables.

Prerequisite
Make the crimping tools available before cutting the power cables.

Procedure
Step 1 Place and roll the cable coils on the support. Measure and cut out a segment of the cable according to the cable layout of the project design. Refer to Figure B-1.

B-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

B Assembling Cable Connectors

Figure B-1 Assembling power cables


1

1. Rolling direction

Step 2 Cut out the power cable with an arm saw.


NOTE

The power cable consists of many core wires, and the wire pairs are fairly fine and soft. Therefore, you need to use a denticulate arm saw (with the denticulate diameter of 0.8 mm, that is, 0.03 in.) to cut the cable. If the condition permits, use the KT35 wire clippers to cut the power cable.

----End

Postrequisite
After cutting out the power cable, you can mount the heat-shrinkable tube onto the cable from the stripped end.

B.1.2 Mounting Heat-Shrinkable Tubes


This describes how to mount the heat-shrinkable tubes.

Prerequisite
Make sure that the power cable is cut out before mounting the heat-shrinkable tubes.

Context
Mount the heat-shrinkable tube onto the cable from the stripped end.

Postrequisite
After mounting the heat-shrinkable tube, strip the cables.

B.1.3 Stripping Power Cables


This describes how to strip the power cables.
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. B-3

B Assembling Cable Connectors

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Prerequisite
Make sure that the power cable is cut out and the heat-shrinkable tube is mounted before stripping the cables.

Context
Use dedicated stripping tool or electrical knife to strip cables. If the condition permits, you can use the AM35 wire stripper.

CAUTION
When stripping cable, check whether the cable core wires are seriously oxidized or corroded. If yes, cut off the oxidized or corroded part.

Procedure
Step 1 Calculate the length of the cable. The length of stripped cable depends on the length of the crimping sleeve behind the bare pressure terminal. For the JG bare pressure terminal commonly used by Huawei, the length of stripped cable is calculated with the formula: L1 = L2 + (2 - 3 mm), that is, L1 = L2 + (0.08 - 0.12 in.). Refer to Figure B-2. Here,
l l

L1 is the length of the stripped cable. L2 is the length of the effective crimping area of the JG terminal.

Figure B-2 Stripping power cables

L1 L2

1. Crimping sleeve

Step 2 Remove the cable insulation layer. Step 3 Strand them tightly, and make sure the stranding direction is the same as the original merging direction of the core wires. ----End
B-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

B Assembling Cable Connectors

Postrequisite
After stripping the power cable, you can crimp the cable.

B.1.4 Crimping Power Cable Connectors


Prerequisite
Make sure that the power cable is cut out, the heat-shrinkable tube is mounted, and the power cable is stripped before crimping the power cable connectors. Complete the preparatory work.
l l

Release the fixing handle and place the tool in right place. Turn on the hydraulic switch to put the compressing device into the in-service state, and lift the hand level.

Context
The methods for using the crimping tools vary with the types of the tools. Figure B-3 shows the crimping tool SS-325 for large-section power cable terminals. Figure B-3 SS-325 parts
2

1. Fixing handle

2. Hydraulic head

3. Hand level

4. Fixing rod

5. Hydraulic switch

To crimp the power cables by using crimping pliers or special molds, perform the following steps:

CAUTION
l l l

If the black line does not appear after the cable is crimped, have it repaired immediately. As for the tool of type SS0325, there is no black line. Place the tools in shadow and out of children's reach. Avoid direct sunshine.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-5

B Assembling Cable Connectors

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Try to insert the core wires into the wire inlets of the terminal crimping sleeve until they cannot be pushed further. The core wires should protrude 2 mm [0.08 in.] to 3 mm [0.12 in.] from the terminal. Refer to Figure B-4. Figure B-4 Connecting core wires with the terminal crimping sleeve
2

23mm

1. Bare pressure terminal

2. Heat-shrinkable tube

Step 2 During crimping, use the molding dies with right cross section. Figure B-5 shows the molding dies corresponding to the 4 types of power cables. Figure B-5 Molding dies related to the power cables

60

60~100

60

80

150

200

60~100 50mm
2

60~100 95mm
2

150~325 120mm
2

150~325 240mm
2

1. Bearing device

2. Compressing device

B-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

B Assembling Cable Connectors

Step 3 Place the cable in the connection position so that the contact surface of the wiring terminal is parallel to the power cable. If they are not parallel, hold the end of the terminal with pliers to adjust it. Step 4 Check the crimping connection to ensure the reliability of electrical connections. Refer to Figure B-6. Figure B-6 Crimping cables

Step 5 Crimp cables. After the cable is crimped, a black line appears at the hydraulic switch, which indicates that the crimping is completed successfully. Step 6 Turn off the hydraulic switch and take out the crimping components. ----End

Postrequisite
After crimping the cables, you can shrink the heat-shrinkable tubes of power cables.

B.1.5 Shrinking Heat-Shrinkable Tubes of Power Cable Connectors


This describes how to shrink the heat-shrinkable tubes of power cable connectors.

Prerequisite
Make sure that the power cable is cut out, the heat-shrinkable tube is mounted, the power cable is stripped, and the cable connector is crimped before shrinking the heat-shrinkable tubes of the power cable connectors.

Context

CAUTION
The heat-shrinkable tube on the cable should wrap up the whole crimping sleeve of the bare pressure terminal, including the joint between the terminal and the cable.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-7

B Assembling Cable Connectors

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Mount the heat-shrinkable tube onto the position where the terminal and the cable are joined. Step 2 Blow the tube with a heat gun until the tube shrinks and wraps up tightly. Refer to Figure B-7. Figure B-7 Shrinking the heat-shrinkable tubes

1. Shrunk heat-shrinkable tube

----End

Postrequisite
After shrinking the heat-shrinkable tubes of power cable connectors, you can check the power cable connectors.

B.1.6 Checking Power Cable Connectors


This describes how to check the power cable connectors after the installation is complete.

Prerequisite
Make sure that the power cable is cut out, the heat-shrinkable tube is mounted, the power cable is stripped, the cable connector is crimped, and the heat-shrinkable tube is shrunken before checking the power cable connectors.

Context
To check the power cable connectors, perform the following steps:

Procedure
Step 1 Check the cable appearance, and make sure that the terminal surface is not oxidized and the cable sheath is not damaged. Step 2 Check the tensile strength. Table B-1 lists the normal tensile strength of ready-made cables.
B-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

B Assembling Cable Connectors

Table B-1 Tensile strength standard of ready-made cables Cable 50 mm2 95 mm2 120 mm2 240 mm2 ----End Tensile Strength 1 KN 2 KN 2.5 KN 5 KN

B.2 Assembling RJ45 Connectors


This describes the how to assemble RJ45 connectors.

Context
Figure B-8 shows the procedure for assembling RJ45 connectors. Figure B-8 Assembling the RJ45 connector
Start

Strip network cable

Insert network cable

Crimping RJ45 connectors Inspecting RJ45 connectors

End

Figure B-9 shows the components of a shielded RJ45 connector and a shielded network cable.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-9

B Assembling Cable Connectors

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure B-9 Components of a shielded RJ45 connector

A B C D F G
A. Jacket of connector B. Metal shell of connector C. Wire holder of connector D. Plug of connector G. Twisted pair cable E. Jacket of network cable F. Shielded layer of network cable

B.2.1 Stripping Network Cables This describes how to strip and cut the cables. B.2.2 Inserting Network Cables This describes how to insert the cables. B.2.3 Crimping RJ45 Connectors This describes how to crimp the RJ45 connector. B.2.4 Inspecting RJ45 Connectors This describes the steps for inspecting the RJ45 connectors and the compliant standards.

B.2.1 Stripping Network Cables


This describes how to strip and cut the cables.

Procedure
Step 1 Put the network cable into connector jacket A. Refer to Figure B-10. Figure B-10 Putting a network cable into a connector jacket

B-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

B Assembling Cable Connectors

Step 2 Peel a 30mm part of the jacket E. Then cut the nylons twine inside the jacket. Cut a 5mm cleft in cable jacket E. Refer to Figure B-11. Figure B-11 Peeling the jacket of a twisted pair cable

Max.5 F

30.0

CAUTION
l l

When peeling the jackets of twisted pair cables, do not damage shielded layers. When peeling the shielded layer, do not damage the insulation layer of the twisted pair cable.

Step 3 Put a twisted pair cable into metal shell B. Wrap the shielded layer F using the metal shell. Refer to Figure B-12. Figure B-12 Putting a cable into a metal shell

Step 4 Put the metal shell of connector through the twisted pair cable to the end. Cut the shielded layer with aluminum foil along the edge of the metal shell. Do not leave any copper wire outside. The twisted pair cable G, about 20 mm, exposes. Refer to Figure B-13.
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. B-11

B Assembling Cable Connectors

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure B-13 Peeling the shielded layer of a twisted pair cable

20.0

----End

Postrequisite
After stripping the network cable, you can insert the cable.

B.2.2 Inserting Network Cables


This describes how to insert the cables.

Procedure
Step 1 The core wires must be inserted in the order specified in the cable design drawings. Figure B-14 and Figure B-15 show the wire sequences of the crossover network cable and the straight through network cable.

B-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

B Assembling Cable Connectors

Figure B-14 Wire sequence of the crossover network cables


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Brown

Orange and white

Green and white

Green and white

Brown and white

Brown

Green

Orange

Brown and white

Orange

Blue and white

Orange and white

Blue and white


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Green

blue

blue

RJ45

RJ45 3 6 1 4 5 2 7 8

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-13

B Assembling Cable Connectors

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure B-15 Wire sequence of the straight through network cables


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Green

Green

Brown Brown and white

Brown Brown and white

Step 2 Put the four pairs of twisted pair cables according to color correspondence through the wire holder C. Refer to Figure B-16. Figure B-16 Wire holder of a connector

Step 3 Align the four pairs of cables G on the holder. Refer to Figure B-17.

Orange Orange and white

Orange Orange and white

G C

Green and white

Green and white

Blue and white blue

Blue and white blue

RJ45
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

RJ45
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

B-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

B Assembling Cable Connectors

Figure B-17 Aligning four pairs of cables on a wire holder

G C

Step 4 Cut the cables outside wire holder C using a wire cutter. Refer to Figure B-18. Figure B-18 Cutting wires

G C

Step 5 Insert the connector holder into connector D with the help of the crimping frame on the top of the metal shell by rotating the metal shielding case B for 90 degrees. Refer to Figure B-19. Figure B-19 Inserting a connector holder

B D

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-15

B Assembling Cable Connectors

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

CAUTION
Put the holder through the connector to the end. ----End

Postrequisite
After inserting the cable, you can crimp the RJ45 connector.

B.2.3 Crimping RJ45 Connectors


This describes how to crimp the RJ45 connector.

Context
The principle of crimping the RJ45 connector is as follows:
l

Before crimping the connector, the RJ45 connector must be placed in the corresponding slot of the crimping pliers. The connector must be fully crimped. After crimping the connector, make sure the metal cutter is lower than the top surface of the RJ45 connector. When crimping an RJ45 connector onto a shielded cable, make sure that metal cutters in the connector are crimped in position and the built-in shielding piece of the connector securely contacts the shielding layer of the cable.

Procedure
Step 1 Push metal shell B towards the connector till the connector and the holder are completely wrapped. Press-fit the connector using a press-fitting tool. Refer to Figure B-20. Figure B-20 Press-Fitting a connector

Step 2 Push metal shell A towards the connector till the metal shell of connector is wrapped. Refer to Figure B-21.
B-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

B Assembling Cable Connectors

Figure B-21 Inserting the metal shell of a connector

One end of cable components is completely assembled. ----End

Postrequisite
After crimping the RJ45 connector, you can check the RJ45 connector.

B.2.4 Inspecting RJ45 Connectors


This describes the steps for inspecting the RJ45 connectors and the compliant standards.

Procedure
Step 1 Inspect the appearances of all the connectors. The connectors with defects such as shell breakage or evident crack, locking piece breakage or crack, or improper cable insertion must be discarded. Step 2 Inspect all the cables. The sequence of the wires must be in line with the design requirements. Step 3 Carry out continuity check on all cables. The continuity ratio must be 100%. Short circuit between cables must be forbidden.
NOTE

For the shielded cable assembled with shielded RJ45 connectors, continuity check must be performed between the shielding shell of the connector and the shielding layer of the cable.

----End

B.3 Assembling RJ48 Connectors of Twisted Pair Trunk Cables


This part describes the how to assemble the RJ48 connectors of the twisted pair trunk cables.
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. B-17

B Assembling Cable Connectors

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Context
Figure B-22 shows the procedure for assembling the RJ48 connectors of the twisted pair trunk cables. Figure B-22 Assembling the RJ48 connectors of the twisted pair trunk cables
Start

Strip network cable

Insert network cable

Crimping RJ45 connectors Inspecting RJ45 connectors

End

B.3.1 Stripping Twisted Pair Trunk Cables This part describes how to strip and cut the cables. B.3.2 Inserting Twisted Pair Trunk Cables This part describes how to insert the cables. B.3.3 Crimping RJ48 Connectors This part describes how to crimp the RJ48 connector. B.3.4 Inspecting RJ48 Connectors This part describes the steps for inspecting the RJ48 connectors and the compliant standards.

B.3.1 Stripping Twisted Pair Trunk Cables


This part describes how to strip and cut the cables.

Procedure
Step 1 Measure the length of the cable to be stripped. Strip the cable with an electric knife or a cable stripper to the length of L + (2 mm to 3 mm [0.08 in. to 0.1 in.]). Refer to Figure B-23. Figure B-24 lists the meaning of L. The stripped 2 mm to 3 mm [0.08 in. to 0.1 in.] cable is used for cable cutting.

B-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

B Assembling Cable Connectors

Figure B-23 Length of the stripped segment on the cable

L+(2~3mm)

Figure B-24 Structure of the RJ48 optical connector

L
1

8 7 6

1. Shielding slice 2. External shielding slice 3. Cable inserting direction 5. Point A 6. Locking pin

4. Internal shielding slice

7. Core wires even with the header 8. Metallic knife

Step 2 Strip the cable sheath. When stripping the cable, make sure that the end of the sheath is neatly stripped and the cutting angle is vertical to the cable. Avoid the damage to the shielding layer when stripping the sheath of the shielded cable. Step 3 Fold the shielding layer. After the sheath is stripped, fold the shielding layer backwards to the root of the cable sheath. Refer to Figure B-25.
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. B-19

B Assembling Cable Connectors

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure B-25 Shielded cables


L

1. Folded shielding layer

Step 4 Cut the core wire. The core wires, especially for the round communication cables, must be cut neatly. Before cutting, spread the core wires evenly apart and cut them neatly with the cutting tool. Refer to Figure B-26. Figure B-26 Trimmed core wires

Step 5 Check the stripping end. The structure and dimensions of the truncated cable must be in accordance with the requirements. That is, the core wire must be equal to L in length. Refer to Figure B-26 . ----End

Postrequisite
After stripping the cable, you can insert the cable.

B.3.2 Inserting Twisted Pair Trunk Cables


This part describes how to insert the cables.

Procedure
Step 1 Plug the cable from the tail of the RJ48 connector and push the cable with proper force until point A of the connector tightly touches the external protection layer of the cable. Each core wire must be plugged along the wire trough of the connector and be even with the header of the connector. Figure B-27 shows the core wires of the trunk cable.
B-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

B Assembling Cable Connectors

Figure B-27 Arrangement of the core wires


1

Table B-2 lists the meaning of the pin assignment. Table B-2 Pin assignment for the RJ48 connector of the 120-ohm twisted pair cable Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 Definition RXRX+ PGND TXTX+ PGND

Step 2 Insert the cable until the core wire of the cable is flush with the header. Step 3 Check the RJ48 connector. Make sure that the shielding layer of the cable butts against point A of the connector and the built-in shielding piece of the connector securely contacts the shielding layer of the cable. ----End

Postrequisite
After inserting the cable, you can crimp the RJ48 connector.

B.3.3 Crimping RJ48 Connectors


This part describes how to crimp the RJ48 connector.

Context
After the cable is inserted well, crimp the connector by using the RJ48 crimping pliers. Figure B-28 shows the ready-made RJ45 connector. Figure B-28 Ready-made RJ45 connector

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-21

B Assembling Cable Connectors

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

The principle of crimping the RJ48 connector is as follows:


l

Before crimping the connector, the RJ48 connector must be placed in the corresponding slot of the crimping pliers. The connector must be fully crimped. After crimping the connector, make sure the metal cutter is lower than the top surface of the RJ48 connector. When crimping an RJ48 connector onto a shielded cable, make sure that metal cutters in the connector are crimped in position and the built-in shielding piece of the connector securely contacts the shielding layer of the cable.

Postrequisite
After crimping the RJ48 connector, you can check the RJ48 connector.

B.3.4 Inspecting RJ48 Connectors


This part describes the steps for inspecting the RJ48 connectors and the compliant standards.

Procedure
Step 1 Inspect the appearances of all the connectors. The connectors with defects such as shell breakage or evident crack, locking piece breakage or crack, or improper cable insertion must be discarded. Step 2 Inspect all the cables. The sequence of the wires must be in line with the design requirements. Step 3 Carry out continuity check on all cables. The continuity ratio must be 100%. Short circuit between cables must be forbidden.
NOTE

For the shielded cable assembled with shielded RJ48 connectors, continuity check must be performed between the shielding shell of the connector and the shielding layer of the cable.

----End

B.4 Assembling SMB Connectors


This describes how to assemble the SMB connectors.

Context
Figure B-29 shows the procedure for assembling the SMB connector.

B-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

B Assembling Cable Connectors

Figure B-29 Procedure for assembling the SMB connector


Strat

Mounting heat-shrinkable tubes and crimping sleeves Stripping trunk signal cables Welding pins of SMB connectors

Crimping SMB connectors

Shrinking heat-shrinkable tubes of SMB connectors

Inspecting SMB connectors

End

B.4.1 Mounting Heat-Shrinkable Tubes and Crimping Sleeves This describes how to mount the heat-shrinkable tubes and crimping sleeves. B.4.2 Stripping Trunk Signal Cables This describes how to strip the trunk signal cables. B.4.3 Welding Pins of SMB Connectors This describes how to weld the pins of SMB connectors. B.4.4 Crimping SMB Connectors This describes how to crimp SMB connectors. B.4.5 Shrinking Heat-Shrinkable Tubes of SMB Connectors This describes how to shrink the heat-shrinkable tubes of SMB connectors. B.4.6 Inspecting SMB Connectors This describes how to inspect the SMB connectors.

B.4.1 Mounting Heat-Shrinkable Tubes and Crimping Sleeves


This describes how to mount the heat-shrinkable tubes and crimping sleeves.

Context
Figure B-30 shows the method for mounting heat-shrinkable tubes and crimping sleeves.
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. B-23

B Assembling Cable Connectors

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure B-30 Mounting heat-shrinkable tubes and crimping sleeves


1 2

1. Heat-shrinkable tube

2. Crimping sleeve

Postrequisite
After mounting the heat-shrinkable tubes and crimping sleeves, you can strip the trunk signal cables.

B.4.2 Stripping Trunk Signal Cables


This describes how to strip the trunk signal cables.

Context

CAUTION
Avoid any damage to the shielding layer and the inner insulation layer when stripping the trunk signal cables.

Procedure
Step 1 Strip the cable sheath and the inner insulation layer with wire stripper. Figure B-31 shows the specification of the stripped segment on the cable (unit: mm). Figure B-31 Stripping trunk signal cables
4.5 2 3

2.3 1 4 11

1. Sheath

2. Inner insulation layer

3. Inner conductor

4. Shielding layer

Step 2 Cut the cable sheath and the inner insulation layer neatly and smoothly. ----End
B-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

B Assembling Cable Connectors

Postrequisite
After stripping the trunk signal cables, you can weld the pins of SMB connectors.

B.4.3 Welding Pins of SMB Connectors


This describes how to weld the pins of SMB connectors.

Context

CAUTION
l l

When welding the pins, do not scorch the inner insulation layer. When welding the pins, make sure that soldering tin does not flow out to the exterior of the pins. The outflow of the soldering tine affects the next step.

Procedure
Step 1 When welding the pins, insert the inner conductor of the cable into the central hole at the end of the pin until the boss at the pin end contacts the inner conductor of the cable. Refer to Figure B-32. Figure B-32 Welding pins
1 2

1. Inner insulation layer

2. Boss

Step 2 Use the solder to weld the pin with the inner conductor of the cable together. The melting point must be above 125C [257F]. ----End

Postrequisite
After welding the pins of the SMB connectors, you can crimp the SMB connectors.

B.4.4 Crimping SMB Connectors


This describes how to crimp SMB connectors.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-25

B Assembling Cable Connectors

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Context

CAUTION
l

Check the SMB connector to be crimped. If the shielded cables lay nakedly outside the crimping sleeve, trim the cable with scissors. When crimping the connector, place the SMB connector in the right place to match the molding die of the crimping pliers.

Procedure
Step 1 Insert the knurled cylinder of the SMB connector between the inner insulation layer and the shielding layer of the cable. Make the shielding layer attach evenly to the knurled cylinder. Make sure that boss of the pins securely connects the inner insulation core of the connector. Refer to Figure B-33. Figure B-33 Crimping the SMB connector onto a cable
1 2 3

1. Shielding layer covering the knurled cylinder evenly 3. Pin

2. Inner insulation core of the connector 4. Coaxial connector

Step 2 Push the crimping sleeve to cover the shielded cable entirely, and crimp the SMB connector with the SMB crimping pliers. ----End

Postrequisite
After crimping the SMB connector, you can shrink the heat-shrinkable tube of the SMB connector.

B.4.5 Shrinking Heat-Shrinkable Tubes of SMB Connectors


This describes how to shrink the heat-shrinkable tubes of SMB connectors.

B-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

B Assembling Cable Connectors

Procedure
Step 1 Mount the heat-shrinkable tube onto the position where the crimping sleeve and the cable are joined. Step 2 Blow the tube with a heat gun until the tube shrinks and wraps up tightly. Refer to Figure B-34. Figure B-34 Shrinking heat-shrinkable tubes
1

1. Shrunken heat-shrinkable tube

----End

Postrequisite
After shrinking the heat-shrinkable tubes of the SMB connectors, you can check the SMB connectors.

B.4.6 Inspecting SMB Connectors


This describes how to inspect the SMB connectors.

Procedure
Step 1 Inspect the appearances of all the cables. Inspect the appearance of the cables. The shielding layer cannot be exposed. Make sure that the pins are inserted well. Step 2 Carry out continuity check on all cables. Check that the inner and the outer conductor are not short-circuited with a multimeter. Step 3 Carry out continuity check on all cables. Check the continuity between the connector pins and the inner conductor of the coaxial cable, and that between the outer shell of the connector and the shielding layer of the coaxial cable with a multimeter. Step 4 Check the tensile strength. Apply proper force (about 60 N) to pull the inner contact pin outward. And there must be no obvious displacement for the inner contact pin. ----End
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. B-27

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

C Introduction to Engineering Labels

C
NOTE

Introduction to Engineering Labels

The engineering labels are used for site installation and future maintenance. The engineering labels are of two types based on power cables and signal cables. The signal cables of the UMG8900 include alarm external cables, network cables, optical fibers, trunk cables. The power cables include DC power cables and AC power cables. The labels can ensure correct cable connections, and easy maintenance.
The labels can be printed according to customers' requirement. However, this must be stated in self-check report.

C.1 Description of Labels This describes the materials, types, shapes, writing and affixing methods, contents, and precautions. C.2 Engineering Labels for External Cables of Alarm Boxes This describes the position of external cables of alarm boxes, requirements for affixing the engineering label, label contents, and examples. C.3 Engineering Labels for Network Cables This describes the applicable scope, content, meaning, and example of the engineering label of the network cable. C.4 Engineering Labels for Optical Fibers This describes the contents, meaning, examples of labels on optical fibers between the devices as well as those between the devices and the optical distribution frames (ODFs). C.5 Engineering Labels for Trunk Cables This describes the contents, meaning, examples of labels on trunk cables between the devices as well as those between the devices and the digital distribution frames (DDFs). C.6 Engineering Labels for Power Cables This describes the position, contents, and examples of AC power cables and DC power cables.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-1

C Introduction to Engineering Labels

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

C.1 Description of Labels


This describes the materials, types, shapes, writing and affixing methods, contents, and precautions.

Label Materials
Features of label materials:
l l l l l l

The thickness is 0.09 mm [0.004 in.] The label is chalk white. The label is made of polyester (PET). The applicable ambient temperature ranges from 29 to +149 [20 to +300]. Laser print and oiliness marker are allowed. The label material is polyester (PET) with UL and CSA certifications.

Types and Shapes of Labels


The engineering labels are of two types, for power cables and signal cables.
l

Labels for power cables The labels for power cables must be attached to the identification plate on the cable ties that are bundled to the cable. The identification plate has an embossment of around 0.2 mm x 0.6 mm [0.008 in. x 0.024 in.]. The embossment is symmetric on both sides, and the area in the middle is for affixing the label. Refer to Figure C-1. Figure C-1 Labels for power cables
26.2 12.2 0.6 11 (2) 10
TO:

R1.0

25 1.5

(1) 100

(3)

0.6

1. Cable tie

2. Labels for power cables

3. Dividing line on the label

Labels for signal cables


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

C-2

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

C Introduction to Engineering Labels

The label for signal cables is L-shaped with fixed dimensions. Refer to Figure C-2. Figure C-2 Labels for signal cables
84.0 7.5 7.0 5.5 5.5

11.0 11.0

10.0

(2) (1)

1.5

(1)

5.5 5.5 7.0 1.0

37.0
1. Dividing line on the label

The dividing lines on the label help to specify the position of a cable. For example, there is one between the cabinet number and the frame number, and another one between the frame number and the board number. The dividing line is 1.5 mm x 0.6 mm [0.059 in. x 0.024 in.] with the color of PONTONE 656c (light blue). The cut dotted line helps to fold the label when affixing it to the cable, and its size is 1.0 mm x 2.0 mm [0.04 in. x 0.08 in.]. There is a mark TO: (upside down in the figure) at the lower right corner of the label. The mark is used to identify the opposite end of the cable on which the label is affixed.

Printing Labels
The contents can be printed or written on the labels. Printing is recommended for the sake of high efficiency and pleasant appearance.
l

Template for printing The word-format template is available for label printout. You can get the template in two ways:

You can download the template from http://support.huawei.com/support/ (path: Engineering Service\Engineering Quality\Quality Standard and Template). You can also obtain the template from Huawei local office.

The template is made with Microsoft Word. Note the following when using the template:
Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-3

TO:
7.5

0.6

(2)

2.0 2. Cut dotted line

C Introduction to Engineering Labels

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

You can directly change the contents on the template according to the site cable connection. Do not change the settings of centered characters, direction, and fonts. When there are too many characters to be filled in, zoom out the characters. Make sure that the printouts are clear and legible.

Cells merging on the template To merge the cells, you need first recover the table structure (if grid lines are displayed, go to step 3). 1. 2. 3. Choose Edit > Select All. Choose Format > Borders and Shading > Borders. Choose Box, and then click OK. Drag the cursor to choose the cells to be merged and choose Table > Merge Cells . Then, modify the content.

If two merged cells are still not enough to accommodate the characters, use multiple lines.
l

Requirements for printer To print the labels, laser jet printer must be used. There is no restriction on the model of the printer. Before printing the label, set up the page and print it on an ordinary blank paper. Perform the following steps: 1. 2. Cover the blank paper onto the whole page of label paper, and check whether the page setup conforms to the requirement. Set the printer properties, such as Paper size and Direction.

If the printout conforms to the requirement, print it on label paper. If not, adjust the page setup and try the printing again until the printout is correct. To adjust the page setup, perform the following steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. Choose File > Page Setup. Choose Layout. Set Header and Footer to 0. Choose Margins. Choose Left for Gutter Position. Adjust the values of Top, Bottom, Left, and Right. If the prompt in Figure C-3 appears before printing, click Ignore to continue. Figure C-3 Print warning

After the page setup finishes, save it for future use. This page setup is necessary only when you use the template for the first time.
l

Requirements for feeding the printer Different from the ordinary paper, the label paper is composed of two pages. No matter what model of the printer you use, feed in the labels one after another by hand. Never use the auto-feed mode to avoid jamming the labels. Different models of printers may have different feeding positions, feed in the labels to the correct position.

C-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide


l

C Introduction to Engineering Labels

Requirements for the printed label

All the printouts must be on the label, and nothing can be printed on the base page of the label. Contents in the cells must be in the center. In the case of a single-line printout, the dividing lines and the mark "TO" cannot be covered by the printed characters. When the cells are merged and the printouts are filled in multiple lines, do not cover the mark TO. To avoid the print content and TO being overlapped, perform the following: Press Space to have the characters printed on the next line.

Writing on Labels
l

Writing tools Use the black oil marker (excluding ball pens) delivered together with the products to write on the labels. If the black oil marker is unavailable, you can use the ball pen (not recommended). Do not leave any oil on the label. The oil may blur the words on labels.
NOTE

l l l

The labels are made of waterproof and dampproof materials. Therefore, do not write on labels with pens or boshes. The delivered marker has two nibs. Use the smaller nib to write the labels.

Fonts For the sake of easy recognition and nice appearance, the font in handwriting must be close to the standard typeface (Times New Roman). Table C-1 lists the standard typeface. Table C-1 Template of standard fonts 0 9 I R 1 A J S 2 B K T 3 C L U 4 D M V 5 E N W 6 F O X 7 G P Y 8 H Q Z

Write the characters in proper size.


l

Writing direction Figure C-4 shows the writing direction of the contents on labels. Figure C-4 Writing direction
1 A01 2 A 06

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

TO: 0 B02

05

C-5

C Introduction to Engineering Labels

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Affixing Labels
After printing or writing the label, remove it from the base page, and then affix it to the cables. The following describes two methods for affixing the labels.
l

Labels for power cables Remove the label from the base page, and then affix it onto the concave on one side of the identification plate. The labels are affixed to the same direction in one equipment room. The cable tie is fastened 2 cm [0.8 in.] from the connectors, and other positions are allowed in special circumstances. Cable ties must be fastened on both ends of a cable. After the cables are bound, the finished identification plate must be on top of the cable in horizontal cabling, or on the right side of the cable in vertical cabling. Make sure that the labels face outward in horizontal cabling. Refer to Figure C-5. Figure C-5 Appearance of the affixed label on the power cable
Cable

TO: B03 -48V2

Cable

Labels for signal cables After the labels are affixed on the cables, the narrow part must be on bottom of the cable in horizontal cabling, or on the right side of the cable in vertical cabling. Refer to Figure C-6. Figure C-6 Appearance of the affixed label on the signal cable
Cable Cable

B03 -48V2

TO: A03 33 33 33 33

TO:

TO: A03 33 33 33 33

C-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

C Introduction to Engineering Labels

To affix the labels, perform the following steps: 1. Determine the proper position on the cable to affix the label. By default, the labels are stuck 2 cm [0.8 in.] from the connector. In special cases, to avoid cable bent or affecting other cables, other positions are allowed to affix the labels. Labels must be stuck on both ends of the cables. Refer to Figure C-7 to determine the position for labels and cables. Determine the label direction based on the cable position. Make sure that the labels are stuck in order. Figure C-7 Affixing the label onto proper position of the cable
Cable Fold to right Stick side Fold down Cable

Stick side

2.

Fold part of the label Fold part of the label, and then affix the label. Make sure that the affixing side is in the middle of the cable. The direction varies depending on the cables. Figure C-8 shows the appearance after the labels are folded. Figure C-8 Folding up the label
Cable Stick side Fold up Stick side Cable

Fold to right

Figure C-6 shows the appearance of affixed labels on cables.

Information on Labels
l

Label contents for power cables Labels for power cables are only affixed on one side of the identification plates. On the labels, there is information (the part after the mark TO:) about the locations of the devices

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-7

C Introduction to Engineering Labels

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

on the other end of the cable, such as peer device, control cabinet, distribution box or power socket.
l

Label contents for signal cables The two sides of the label affixed on the signal cable carry information about the position of the ports connected to both ends of the cable. (For the cable with multiple ends, affix the labels based on actual conditions.) The content on the labels at two ends of the cable (excluding the alarm external cable) are the same. For the alarm external cable, the label only needs to be affixed on the first cabinet of each row to identify the device to which the access terminal is connected. Write on the labels according to the following requirements. Refer to Figure C-9.

Area 1 contains the location information of local end of the cable. Area 2 (with the mark TO:) contains the location information of the opposite end of the cable. Area 3 is folded up inside the label when the label is affixed.

Figure C-9 Labels for signal cables


Area 1 Area

Seen from the cabling end of the device, the text part of the label is on the right side of the cable. The side with TO: that is facing outside carries the location information of the opposite end; and the other side carries the location information of the local end. Thus, the information in Area 1 at one end is the same as the information in Area 2 at the other end of the cable. In other words, the local information at one end is called the opposite information at the other end.

Precautions
l l

When printing/writing and affixing labels, keep the labels clean. Do not affix the labels at the bent part of the cable or other positions that affect the cable connection. Affix the labels around 20 mm [0.79 in.] from the connector. If the desired label positions collide with the main and subordinate labels, affix the engineering labels at proper positions. Labels must be affixed with good order in alignment. Cable ties must be bundled in the same position of power cables, with identification plates on the same side. The cabinet No. (excluding cabinet row No.), frame No. board No., and cable No. are denoted in two digits, from 01 to 99, if they are less than 100. If not, they are denoted in full numbers.

l l

C-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

TO:

Area 2

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

C Introduction to Engineering Labels

C.2 Engineering Labels for External Cables of Alarm Boxes


This describes the position of external cables of alarm boxes, requirements for affixing the engineering label, label contents, and examples. The external cables of alarm box are connected with the first subscriber cabinet of each row (used for power distribution). Labels affixed on the first subscriber cabinet of each row indicate which device uses the access terminal. Labels are not needed on the device side if there is no special requirement. In this case, only area 2 of the label is filled in. When affixing the labels, make sure that this side faces outside. (If there is special requirement on affixing direction, use a proper method accordingly.) Table C-2 lists the content of the labels on the external cables of the alarm box. Table C-2 Content of labels on the external cable of the alarm box Content MN Meaning Cabinet number Example M: The cabinet rows from front to back are numbered from A to Z. N: The cabinet columns from left to right are numbered from 01 to 99. For example, A01 indicates a cabinet in row A, column 01.

NOTE

MN refers to the No. of a specific cabinet. If cabinets are installed in a back-to-back manner, the facing direction of the cabinet must be specified. In this case, MNO stands for the cabinet No. Here, O means the direction of the cabinet, which can be A or B. The meaning of this item for other labels is the same, and thus, is not described.

The label on the alarm cable carries simple information, and only part of the text area needs to be filled in. It is recommended to keep the whole length of the label instead of cutting out the blank area. Figure C-10 shows a label on the alarm cable, on which A01 indicates that the alarm cable is connected from the first cabinet to the cabinet in row A, column 01 in the equipment room. Figure C-10 Example of the label on the alarm cable

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

TO: A01

C-9

C Introduction to Engineering Labels

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

C.3 Engineering Labels for Network Cables


This describes the applicable scope, content, meaning, and example of the engineering label of the network cable.

Applicable Scope
The labels are suitable for the cable of network port on the board in the cabinet frame. The cables are shielded/non-shielded standard network cables.

Label Contents and Meaning


Table C-3 lists the content of labels affixed to the network cable of the board in the cabinet frame. Table C-3 Content of labels on the network cable Content MN-B-C-D Meaning MN: cabinet number B: frame number C: physical slot number D: Ethernet port number MN-Z MN: cabinet number Z: location number Example For example, A01 refers to the first cabinet in row A. Numbered in bottom-up order with two digits, for example, 01. Numbered in top-down and left-right order with two digits, for example, 01. Numbered in top-down and left-right order with two digits, for example, 01. For example, B02 refers to the second cabinet in column B. Valid location number of the terminal device on site. If the cable is connected to a router in a cabinet, the serial numbers of the cabinet, the frame and the Ethernet interface of the router must be specified, for example, B02-03-12. If the cable is connected to the network management system (NMS), the location of the NMS must be specified.

Examples
Figure C-11 shows the label examples. Figure C-11 Example of the label on the network cable
A01 03 10 05

C-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

TO: B02

03

12

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

C Introduction to Engineering Labels

A01-03-10-05 indicates that one end of the Ethernet cable is connected with Ethernet port 05, slot 10, frame 03 of the cabinet in row A, column 01 in the equipment room. B02-03- -12 indicates that the other end of the Ethernet cable is connected with Ethernet port 12, frame 03 of the cabinet in row B, column 02 in the equipment room. No physical slot number.

C.4 Engineering Labels for Optical Fibers


This describes the contents, meaning, examples of labels on optical fibers between the devices as well as those between the devices and the optical distribution frames (ODFs). These labels are affixed to the optical fibers that connect the optical interfaces on the boards in a frame, or on the device boxes. There are two types of labels for optical fibers. One is for the fiber that connects the optical interfaces on two devices. The other is for the fiber that connects the device and the ODF.

Labels for the Optical Fiber Connecting Two Devices


Table C-4 lists the content of the labels on the optical fiber that connects two devices. Table C-4 Content of labels on the optical fiber between two devices Content MN-B-C-D-R/T Meaning MN: cabinet number B: frame number C: physical slot number D: optical interface number R: optical receiving interface T: optical transmitting interface MN-B-C-D-R/T MN: cabinet number B: frame number C: physical slot number D: optical interface number The meaning is the same as mentioned earlier. When the local device and the peer device are not in the same equipment room, MN can be the name of the equipment room. Example For example, A01 refers to the first cabinet in row A. Numbered in bottom-up order with two digits, for example, 01. Numbered in top-down and left-right order with two digits, for example, 05. Numbered in top-down and left-right order with two digits, for example, 05.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-11

C Introduction to Engineering Labels

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Content

Meaning R: optical receiving interface T: optical transmitting interface

Example

Figure C-12 shows the label on the optical fiber between two devices. Figure C-12 Example of the label on the optical fiber between two devices
A01 01 05 05 R

A01-01-05-05-R indicates that the local end of the optical fiber is connected with optical receiving interface 05 on slot 5, frame 01 in the cabinet in row A, column 01 in the equipment room. G01-01-01-01-T indicates that the other end of the optical fiber is connected with optical transmitting interface 01 on slot 01, frame 01 in the cabinet in row G, column 01 in the equipment room.

Labels for the Optical Fiber Connecting the Device and ODF
Table C-5 lists the content of the labels on the optical fiber that connects the device and optical distribution frame (ODF). Table C-5 Content of labels on the optical fiber between the device and the ODF Content MN-B-C-D-R/T Meaning MN: cabinet number B: frame number C: physical slot number D: optical interface number R: optical receiving interface T: optical transmitting interface
C-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

TO: G01

01

01

01

Example For example, A01 refers to the first cabinet in row A. Numbered in bottom-up order with two digits, for example, 01. Numbered in top-down and left-right order with two digits, for example, 05. Numbered in top-down and left-right order with two digits, for example, 05.

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

C Introduction to Engineering Labels

Content ODF-MN-B-C

Meaning MN: row number and column number of ODF

Example M: The cabinet rows from front to back are numbered from A to Z. N: The cabinet columns from left to right are numbered from 01 to 99. For example, G01 indicates the ODF at row G, column 01.

B: row number of the terminal device C: column number of the terminal device R: optical receiving interface T: optical transmitting interface

Range from 01 to 99, for example, 01-01.

Figure C-13 shows the label on the optical fiber between the device and the ODF. Figure C-13 Example of the label on the optical fiber between the device and the ODF
ODF G01 01 01 R

ODF-G01-01-01-R indicates that one end of the optical fiber is connected with the optical receiving terminal in row 01, column 01 of the ODF in row G, column 01 in the equipment room. A01-01-05-05-R indicates that the other end of the optical fiber is connected with optical receiving interface 5 on slot 05, frame 01 in the cabinet in row A, column 01 in the equipment room.

C.5 Engineering Labels for Trunk Cables


This describes the contents, meaning, examples of labels on trunk cables between the devices as well as those between the devices and the digital distribution frames (DDFs). There are two types of labels for trunk cables.
l

One type is used for the trunk cable connecting two devices, such as the trunk board and built-in transmission unit, or two trunk boards. Labels are affixed at two ends of the cables, specifying the cable positions on the device or on the two trunk boards of the same device. The other type is used for connecting the device and the digital distribution frame (DDF). Labels are affixed at two ends of the cables, specifying the cable position on the device and the DDF.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-13

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

TO: A01

01

05

05

C Introduction to Engineering Labels

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

The trunk cables include 75-ohm/120-ohm E1 cables, and 120-ohm T1.

Labels for the Trunk Cable that Connects Two Devices


Table C-6 lists the content of the labels on the trunk cable that connects two devices. Table C-6 Content of labels on the trunk cable between two devices Content MN-B-C-D-R/T Meaning MN: cabinet number B: frame number D: cable number R: receiving interface T: transmitting interface MN-B-C-D-R/T The meaning is the same as mentioned earlier. Example For example, G01. Numbered in bottom-up order with two digits, for example, 01. Numbered in top-down and left-right order with two digits, for example, 12. If multiple signals are integrated in one cable, the receiving/transmitting ends are not specified. When the local device and the peer device are not in the same equipment room, MN can be the name of the equipment room.

Figure C-14 shows the label on the trunk cable between devices. Figure C-14 Example of the label on the trunk cable between two devices
G01 01 05 12 T

G01-01-05-12-T indicates that the local end of the trunk cable is connected with the transmitting terminal of trunk cable 12 on slot 05, frame 01 in the cabinet in row G, column 01 in the equipment room. D02-01-01-10-R indicates that the other end of the trunk cable is connected with the receiving terminal of trunk cable 10 on slot 01, frame 01 in cabinet in row D, column 02 in the equipment room.

Labels for the Trunk Cable that Connects the Device and the DDF
Table C-7 lists the content of the labels on the trunk cable that connects the device and the digital distribution frame (DDF).

C-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

TO: D02

01

01

10

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

C Introduction to Engineering Labels

Table C-7 Content of labels on the trunk cable between the device and the DDF Content MN-B-C-D-R/T Meaning MN: cabinet number B: frame number C: physical slot number D: cable number R: receiving interface T: transmitting interface DDF-MN-B-C-D/ R/T MN: row number and column number of DDF Example For example, A01. Numbered in bottom-up order with two digits, for example, 03. Numbered in top-down and left-right order with two digits, for example, 01. Numbered in top-down and left-right order with two digits, for example, 01. If multiple signals are integrated in one cable, the receiving/transmitting ends are not specified. M: The cabinet rows from front to back are numbered from A to Z. N: The cabinet columns from left to right are numbered from 01 to 99. For example, G01 indicates the DDF in row G, column 01. B: row number of the terminal device C: column number of the terminal device DDF-MN-B-C-D/ R/T D: direction A or B There is such a mark in DDF: A: indicating the DDF terminals are connected to the optical network device. B: indicating the DDF terminals are connected to the switching device. R: receiving interface T: transmitting interface R, T: If multiple signals are integrated in one cable, the receiving/transmitting ends must be specified on each branch of the DDF. (If the receiving/transmitting ends are specified on the DDF, do not specify the receiving/ transmitting ends again.) Range from 01 to 99, for example, 01-01.

Figure C-15 shows the label on the trunk cable between the device and the DDF. Figure C-15 Example of the label on the trunk cable between the device and the DDF
A01 03 01 01 R

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

TO: DDF G01 01

01 AR

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-15

C Introduction to Engineering Labels

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

A01-03-01-01-R indicates that local end of the trunk cable is connected with the receiving terminal of trunk cable 01 in slot 01, frame 03 of the cabinet in row A, column 01 in the equipment room. DDF-G01-01-01-AR indicates that the other end of the trunk cable is connected with the receiving terminal of direction A (connected to optical network device) in row 01, column 01 of the DDF in row G and column 01 in the equipment room.

C.6 Engineering Labels for Power Cables


This describes the position, contents, and examples of AC power cables and DC power cables.

Labels for DC Power Cables


The labels are affixed to the DC cables, including the 48 V, PGND, and BGND cables. The labels for DC power cables are affixed at two ends of the power cables. The DC power cable refers to the power cable and the PGND cable. The labels for DC power cables are affixed to one side of the identification plates on cable ties. Table C-8 lists the information on the labels for the DC power cables. Table C-8 Content of labels on the DC power cables Content MN(BC) - 48 V1 MN(BC) - 48 V2 MN(BC) - BGND MN(BC) - PGND Meaning MN(BC): BC is written right under MN. On the device cabinet side, only MN is used to identify the cabinet. On the power cabinet side, MN identifies the row and column number of the power distribution device such as the control cabinet and distribution cabinet, BC identifies the row and column number of the 48 V connecter (if there is no row number or column number, or the connecter can be identified without them, BC can be omitted). BGND and PGND have no row and column number for identification.

The label only carries location information about the opposite device, the control cabinet or the distribution cabinet, while information of the local end is not necessary. Table C-8 lists the information of two 48 V power supplies on the label. The information for other DC voltages (such as 24 V, 60 V) must be given in similar ways. Make sure that labels are affixed in correct direction. That is, after the cable ties are bundled onto the cable, the identification plates with the labels must face outward. The text on the labels of the same cabinet must be in the same direction. Refer to Figure C-16.

C-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

C Introduction to Engineering Labels

Figure C-16 Example of the labels on the DC power cables

TO: A01 B08

TO: -48V2 B03 -48V2

(1)

(2)

(1) indicates the label at the cabinet side (information about the position of the cable on the power distribution cabinet)

(2) indicates the label at the distribution cabinet side (information about the position of the cable on the cabinet side)

At the cabinet side, the label marked A01/B08- 48 V2 on the cable indicates that the cable is 48 V2 DC supply, which is from the eighth connecter on the second row of 48 V bus bar in the cabinet in row A, and column 1 in the equipment room. At the power distribution cabinet side, the label marked B03 - 48 V2 indicates that the cable is 48 V2 DC supply, which is from the device cabinet in row B, column 03 in the equipment room.
NOTE

In the power distribution cabinet (or the first power cabinet of a row in the transmission equipment room), every terminal on the 48 V terminal block has a numeric identification, such as 08 in A01/B08 - 48 V2 in the previous examples. PGND and BGND are copper bars, on which all the terminals are connected. In this case, it is only necessary to specify the row and column of the power distribution cabinet. For example, A01-BGND means that the power cable is a BGND cable that connects to the BGND copper bar of the power distribution cabinet in row A, column 01 in the equipment room.

Labels for AC Power Cables


The labels are affixed to the AC cables, including the POWER, PGND, and BGND cables. The labels are affixed at two ends of AC power cable. The 220 V AC cables and related PGND and BGND cables are covered with insulating sheath. Therefore, the labels only need to contain the words of AC and the cabinet number (similar to cables of 110 V or other voltages). The labels for AC power cables are affixed to one side of the identification plates on cable ties. Table C-9 lists the content of the labels on the AC power cables.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-17

C Introduction to Engineering Labels

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Table C-9 Content of labels on the AC power cables Content MN-AC Meaning MN: serial number of the cabinet or the socket where the power is led in. Device cabinet side: Cabinet No. Power socket: The location of the socket is marked out according to onsite situation. If the sockets can be identified by row number and column number, they can be numbered following the same rule for the cabinets. If the sockets cannot be identified by rows and columns, specify the detailed locations to avoid confusing with other sockets. The label only carries location information about the peer device and the power socket. The information of the local end is not necessary. Make sure that labels are affixed in correct direction. That is, after the cable ties are bundled onto the cable, the identification plates with the labels must face outward, and the text on the labels of the same cabinet must be in the same direction. Refer to Figure C-17. Figure C-17 Example of the labels on the AC power cables

TO:

TO:

A01 AC

B01 AC

(1)

(2)

(1) indicates the label on the cabinet side (information about the position of the cable on the power distribution cabinet)

(2) indicates the label at the distribution cabinet side (information about the position of the cable on the cabinet side)

At the cabinet side, the label marked A01-AC indicates that the power cable is connected to the socket of row A column 01 in the equipment room. At the power distribution cabinet side, the label marked B01-AC indicates that the power cable is connected to the cabinet in row B, column 01 in the equipment room.

C-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

D Introduction to File System Directory

Introduction to File System Directory

This describes the functions of the file system directory. D.1 Introduction to the LMT File Directory This describes the file structure and functions after the LMT is installed. D.2 Introduction to BAM File Directory This describes the BAM file structure and its functions. D.3 Introduction to Configuration Files This describes the main version and board type in the configuration file minivercfg_fix.ini. D.4 Introduction to Higher Layer Software of Boards This describes the higher layer software of the board, patch names, and functions.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

D-1

D Introduction to File System Directory

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

D.1 Introduction to the LMT File Directory


This describes the file structure and functions after the LMT is installed. This part introduces some useful directories in the LMT file directory such as log, alarm information, data backup and help files. It also describes some important system file directories, such as the directory of INI file (for the user backup conveniently). The format and meaning of some typical files are introduced here. As the UMG8900 client software, the LMT implements configuration management, operation and maintenance, performance management, fault management and tracing function of the UMG8900. The LMT adopts standard installation method. Table D-1 lists the directory structure after the LMT is installed ($ is directory of the LMT software installation). Table D-1 Directory structure of the LMT files Directory $\HW LMT Second Directory \adaptor Third Directory Description All the files of the LMT. Executable files and corresponding supportive files of the LMT related to the UMG8900. Executable files and corresponding supportive files for the LMT Client. Executable files and corresponding supportive files for the LMT Server. Executable files, configuration files needed for start, dependent dynamic library and dependent jar packets saved in the background tray. Configuration files needed when installing LMT and used for uninstalling.

\client \server \tray

\uninstall

D.2 Introduction to BAM File Directory


This describes the BAM file structure and its functions. Table D-2 lists the structure of the BAM file directory.

D-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

D Introduction to File System Directory

Table D-2 BAM file directory Directory C:\BAM Secondary Directory \alm \bin Third Directory \new \config Description System alarm configuration files and alarm shield information Application files The latest application files of boards The UMG8900 software configuration table files minivercfg_fix.ini and the configuration files of board loading mode. Various data, such as alarm, log, performance, fault, and operation, which are saved respectively in corresponding sub-directories. Call log files History alarm information History event information Shielded alarm information Shielded event information Operation log information Performance data Running log information Security log information during system running System log information Tracing data Routine test information Test log System configuration ini files, including bam, command line navigation tree, command executing returning code and node returning information. Both Chinese and English versions are available. Chinese configuration files

\data

\cal \hlm \hvt \mlm \mvt \olg \prf \run \sec \slg \trc \tst \tlg \ini

\chsf

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

D-3

D Introduction to File System Directory

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Directory

Secondary Directory

Third Directory \engf

Description English configuration files System registration files Configuration information saved in the MML command format Telephone numbers in StandALone mode

license mml.txt phoneno.txt

D.3 Introduction to Configuration Files


This describes the main version and board type in the configuration file minivercfg_fix.ini. When software is uploaded to the OMU, the configuration file minivercfg_fix.ini is used. The following part describes the main parameters of the file. D.3.1 Description of Main Version This describes the parameters related to the software of main version in the configuration file minivercfg_fix.ini. D.3.2 Description of Board Software This describes the parameters related to the board software in the configuration file minivercfg_fix.ini.

D.3.1 Description of Main Version


This describes the parameters related to the software of main version in the configuration file minivercfg_fix.ini. Table D-3 lists the description of the main version. Table D-3 Description of the main version Parameter MainVersion BoardTypeCount SysCfgFileCount DataCfgFileCount DirCount SysCfgFileNamen DataCfgFileNamen DownLoadPath Description Level-1 main version of the UMG8900 Number of board service types Number of system configuration files Number of data configuration files Number of directories System configuration file n Data configuration file n Path of software download file in the FTP server

D-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

D Introduction to File System Directory

D.3.2 Description of Board Software


This describes the parameters related to the board software in the configuration file minivercfg_fix.ini. Table D-4 lists the description of board types. Table D-4 Description of board type Parameter PackName StandardPackVersion FileCount LoadPriority FileTagValidation1 FileTypeName1 FrontBackLimit1 Description software package name of the board type Standard version of the software package Number of board files Load priority Tag of file 1 Type of file 1 Limitations to the front and back boards described in file 1. File 1, file 2, and file n are the files of the board. Each file corresponds to seven parameters. FrontBackLimit specifies which board the file belongs to. For example, the board in the front slot or the board in the back slot. Limitations to the hardware type of the front board described in file 1 Limitations to the hardware type of the back board described in file 1 Limitations to the logical type of the front board described in file 1 Limitations to the logical type of the back board described in file 1 Limitations to the hardware version of the front board described in file 1 Limitations to the hardware version of the back board described in file 1 Name of file 1 Start address of the Flash described in file 1 Address length of the Flash described in file 1 Standard file 1 version under the main version Tag of file 2 Type of file 2

FrontHwLimit1 BackHwLimit1 FrontLcLimit1 BackLcLimit1 FrontHwVerLimit1 BackHwVerLimit1 FileName1 FlashAddress1 FlashAddressLength1 StandardFileVersion1 FileTagValidation2 FileTypeName2

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

D-5

D Introduction to File System Directory

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Parameter FrontBackLimit2 FrontHwLimit2 BackHwLimit2 FrontLcLimit2 BackLcLimit2 FrontHwVerLimit2 BackHwVerLimit2 FileName2 FlashAddress2 FlashAddressLength2 StandardFileVersion2 FileTagValidationm FileTypeNamem FrontBackLimitm FrontHwLimitm BackHwLimitm FrontLcLimitm BackLcLimitm FrontHwVerLimitm BackHwVerLimitm FileNamem FlashAddressm

Description Limitations to the front and back boards described in file 2 Limitations to the hardware type of the front board described in file 2 Limitations to the hardware type of the back board described in file 2 Limitations to the logical type of the front board described in file 2 Limitations to the logical type of the back board described in file 2 Limitations to the hardware version of the front board described in file 2 Limitations to the hardware version of the back board described in file 2 Name of file 2 Start address of the Flash described in file 2 Address length of the Flash described in file 2 Standard file 2 version under the main version Tag of file m Type of file m Limitations to the front and back boards described in file m Limitations to the hardware type of front board described in file m Limitations to the hardware type of back board described in file m Limitations to the logical type of front board described in file m Limitations to the logical type of back board described in file m Limitations to the hardware version of front board described in file m Limitations to the hardware version of back board described in file m Name of file m Start address of Flash described in file m

D-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

D Introduction to File System Directory

Parameter FlashAddressLengthm StandardFileVersionm

Description Address length of Flash described in file m Standard file m version under the main version

D.4 Introduction to Higher Layer Software of Boards


This describes the higher layer software of the board, patch names, and functions. Table D-5 lists the names and functions of board higher layer software and patches of the UMG8900.
NOTE

The change of the software version on the boards may result in the version inconsistency with that of the actual high-layer software. Therefore, Table D-5 is listed just for reference.

Table D-5 Higher layer software of boards Board Type OMU Board Software Dynamic Configuration Software Name omd.vfs omd_ebootrom.bin fomd_floodlogic.rbf mvpd_mini.vfs tonefile.arj Default Configuration Software Name omd.vfs omd_ebootrom.bin fomd_floodlogic.rbf mvpd_mini.vfs tonefile.arj

Host software Extended BootROM Hard disk logic

VPU

Host software Basic voice file

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

D-7

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

E Requirements for Device Running Environment

Requirements for Device Running Environment

This describes the requirements for device running environment, including location and construction of equipment room, temperature and humidity, cleanness, erosive gas, electromagnetism, ESD-prevention, lightning protection, and power. E.1 Requirements for Equipment Room Location This describes the requirements for equipment room location. E.2 Requirements for Equipment Room Construction This describes the requirements for equipment room construction. E.3 Requirements for Temperature and Humidity This describes the requirements for temperature and humidity, and the related measures. E.4 Requirements for Indoor Sanitation This describes the requirements for cleanness of the equipment room and related measures. E.5 Requirements for Erosive Gas Condition This describes the requirements for erosive gas condition, and related measures. E.6 Requirements for Electromagnetic Environment This describes the requirements for electromagnetic environment of the equipment room and related measures. E.7 Requirements for ESD Prevention This describes the requirements for electrostatic discharge (ESD) prevention in the equipment room and related measures. E.8 Requirements for Lightning Protection Grounding This describes the requirements for lightning protection grounding. E.9 Requirements for Power Supply This describes the requirements for DC power supply and AC power supply.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

E-1

E Requirements for Device Running Environment

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

E.1 Requirements for Equipment Room Location


This describes the requirements for equipment room location. The requirements for equipment room location are as follows:
l

It is at least 5 km [3.1 mi] away from heavy pollution sources, such as the smeltery and coal mine. The site is at least 3.7 km [2.3 mi] away from medium pollution sources, such as the chemical, rubber and galvanization industries. The site is at least 2 km [1.2 mi.] away from light pollution sources, such as a packinghouse and tan yard. If these pollution sources cannot be avoided, the equipment room must be in the perennial upwind direction of the pollution sources. In addition, adopt a high-quality equipment room or anti-pollution device. The air vent of the equipment room is away from the exhaust from the waste pipes, big cesspools and sewage treatment tanks. The equipment room is kept in the positive pressure state to prevent corrosive gases from entering the room and damaging components. The equipment room is away from industrial and heating boilers. The equipment room is located on the second floor or higher. If this requirement cannot be met, the ground for device installation must be at least 600 mm [23.6 in.] higher than the maximum local flood stage. The equipment room is away from livestock farms. If this requirement cannot be met, the equipment room must be in the perennial upwind direction of the livestock farms. The equipment room is at least 3.7 km [2.3 mi] away from the seaside or salt lake. If this requirement cannot be met, the equipment room must be airtight and installed with an air conditioner for cooling purposes. In addition, the alkalized soil cannot be used as the construction material. Avoid using any original livestock room or fertilizer warehouses as the equipment room. The equipment room must be intact. The equipment room is away from dusty areas, such as polluted roads or sand fields. If this requirement cannot be met, the windows and doors of the equipment room must not face the pollution source.

l l

l l l

E.2 Requirements for Equipment Room Construction


This describes the requirements for equipment room construction. Table E-1 lists the construction requirements for the equipment room. Table E-1 Construction requirements for the equipment room Item Area Net height Specification The equipment room can hold the UMG8900 with the dimension of 2200 mm x 600 mm x 800 mm [87 in. x 24 in. x 32 in.]. The indoor minimum height is the net height between the lowest point of the ceiling and the highest point of the floor. The net height is not less than 3 m [9.8 ft.].
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

E-2

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

E Requirements for Device Running Environment

Item Indoor floor

Specification The floor is semi-conducting and dust-free. The ESD-preventive floor must be paved. The floor blocks are paved securely. The error per square meter is not more than 2 mm [0.08 in.]. If there is not raised floor, use static-conducing material (size to impedance ratio is 1.0 x 107 ohms 1.0 x 1010 ohms). The static-conducting material or raised floor is well connected to the grounding device through current-limiting impedance and connection cable. The current limit resistance is 1 megohm. More than 600 kg/m2. The door is 2 m high [6.6 in.] and 1 m [3.3 in.] wide. One door is sufficient for the purpose. The door and window are sealed with dust-proof rubber tape. The windows are installed with double-layer glass and sealed. Wall paper or paint lusterless paint is allowed, but chalked paint is not recommended. Use grooves to arrange cables. The inner face of the groove is smooth. The reserved length and width of the groove, and number, position and dimensions of the holes comply with the requirements for the arrangement of the transmission device. The power supply pipe, drainage pipe and rain pipe cannot pass through the equipment room. The fire extinguisher is available in an easily accessible place, such as the corridor or staircase, instead of in the equipment room. The installation place is separated from the door of the equipment room. The partition panel helps prevent dust. The air conditioner is installed in the position where the air from the air conditioner is not directed at the device. In the equipment room, specific measures are taken to prevent epiphyte and mildew, as well as rodent, such as mouse.

Floor load bearing capacity Door and window

Wall surface Indoor groove

Water supply and drainage

Partition in equipment room Air conditioner position Other requirements

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

E-3

E Requirements for Device Running Environment

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Figure E-1 Partition in the equipment room


Air conditioner Equipment

Partition panel

E.3 Requirements for Temperature and Humidity


This describes the requirements for temperature and humidity, and the related measures. Table E-2 lists the temperature and humidity requirement. Table E-2 Requirements for temperature and humidity Temperature Long term 0 to 45 [32F to 113F] Short term 5 to +55 [23F to 131F] Relative Humidity Long term 5% to 85% Short term 5% to 95%

NOTE

The measurement points of temperature and humidity refer to the values measured 1.5 m [4.9 ft.] above the floor and 0.4 m [1.3 ft.] away from the front side of the cabinet when there are no protection panels in the front and back of the cabinet. Short term means that the consecutive working duration is not more than 96 hours and that the accumulated working duration of a year is not more than 15 days.

To meet the above requirements, note the following:


l l

Use a perennial temperature-control device irrespective of the local climate. In dry regions, dampen the ground regularly with a wet mop or use a humidifier to increase the humidity in the equipment room. In damp regions, use a dehumidifier to lower the humidity.

E-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

E Requirements for Device Running Environment

E.4 Requirements for Indoor Sanitation


This describes the requirements for cleanness of the equipment room and related measures. The equipment room must be free of explosive, conducting, permeability magnetic and corrosive dust. Table E-3 lists the dust particle limit in the equipment room. Table E-3 Dust particle limit in the equipment room Mechanically Active Material Dust particle Unit particle/m3 Content 3104 (There is no visible dust on desk within 3 days)

NOTE

Dust particle: diameter 5 m

To meet the above requirements, note the following:


l l

Use dust-free materials on the floor, walls, and ceiling. Use a door screen and a window screen on the outside. Ensure that the windows are dustproof. Clean the equipment room regularly, and clean the air filter once three months. Wear shoe covers and ESD-preventive clothes in the equipment room.

l l

E.5 Requirements for Erosive Gas Condition


This describes the requirements for erosive gas condition, and related measures. Measures to prevent erosive gases, such as SO2, H2S, and NH3, must also be taken in the equipment room. Table E-4 lists the requirements on the density of erosive gases. Table E-4 Erosive gas density limits Chemically Active Material SO2 H2S NH3 Cl2 Unit mg/m3 mg/m3 mg/m3 mg/m3 Content 0.20 0.006 0.05 0.01

To meet the above requirements, note the following:


Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. E-5

E Requirements for Device Running Environment


l

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

The equipment room must be far away from areas with high density erosive gases, such as chemical plants. The air inlet must be located against the direction of the pollution sources. The storage batteries must be placed in a separate room. Ensure that personnel from a professional company inspect the environment regularly.

l l l

E.6 Requirements for Electromagnetic Environment


This describes the requirements for electromagnetic environment of the equipment room and related measures. Table E-5 lists the electromagnetic requirement. Table E-5 Electromagnetic range Environment Electromagnetic Low-frequency magnetic field Amplitude-modulation radio-frequency electric field Pulse-modulation radiofrequency electric field Frequency (Hz) Ampl. A/m (rms) Frequency (MHz) Ampl. V/m (rms) Frequency (GHz) Ampl. V/m (peak) Parameter 50 to 20 000 10 to 0.025 0.009 to 1000 3 1 to 20 3

To suppress the interference signals, note the following:


l

The equipment room must be away from transformers, high-voltage wires, and high-current devices. For example, the equipment room must be 20 m [66 ft.] away from AC transformers, and 50 m [164 ft.] away from high-voltage wires. The equipment room must be away from a high-power broadcasting transmitter. For example, the equipment room must be 500 m [547 yd.] away from a high-power broadcasting transmitter. If there is a mobile communication transmitter installed in the communication building, the interference degree must comply with the relevant standards and regulations. If required, take measures to shield and isolate the interference. Do not use portable wireless devices in the equipment room.

E.7 Requirements for ESD Prevention


This describes the requirements for electrostatic discharge (ESD) prevention in the equipment room and related measures. The absolute voltage of electrostatic must be less than 1000 V. To meet the above requirements, note the following:
E-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide


l l l

E Requirements for Device Running Environment

Popularize the knowledge of ESD prevention among the operators. Control the humidity in the equipment room to reduce the impact of static electricity. Lay ESD-preventive floor in the room. Wear antistatic shoes, uniforms, and wrist straps before entering the room.

E.8 Requirements for Lightning Protection Grounding


This describes the requirements for lightning protection grounding. Table E-6 lists the requirements for lightning protection grounding. Table E-6 Lightning protection grounding requirements Item Building requirements Description The equipment building is of reinforced concrete structure. The equipment building is equipped with a lightning arrester The ground for lightning arrester and the protection ground of the equipment room share the same group of grounding bodies. AC power supply system adopts TN-S power supply The communication office has a dedicated power transformer. The power cables have metal bushing or insulation bushing, and are led in to the office through a metal pipe under ground. The metal bushing or metal pipe is grounded at both ends. The length under group is not less than 15 m [16.4 yd.]. The three phase lines at the low-voltage side of the AC transformer in the communication office have separate seamless zinc oxide lightning protector. The shell of the transformer, the AC neutral line at the low-voltage side, and the metal bushing of the power cable connected to transformer shell are grounded nearby. Lightning protector for incoming power cable Do not lead the AC or DC power cables overhead, either in or out or to/from the communication office. After low-voltage power cables are led into the equipment room, lightning protector is installed for the power cables in the AC voltage regulator and AC switchboard, and the lightning protector is grounded nearby. In the city, use a power lightning protector with nominal discharge current of more than 20 kA. In the suburbs with more lightning dangers, use a power lightning protector with strike through-flow of more than 60 kA. In mountains or higher buildings in the city, use a power lightning protector with strike through-flow of more than 100 kA. The length of grounding cable for power lightning protector is less than 1 m [3.3 ft.].

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

E-7

E Requirements for Device Running Environment

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

Item DC power distribution grounding

Description The DC working ground of the communication office (positive of 48 V or negative of 24 V) is connected to the indoor grounding bus nearby, and the grounding cable satisfies the requirements for the maximum load of the devices. The power supply devices for the communication office have DC working grounding cable connected to the grounding bus in the communication building or the protection grounding bar in the equipment room.

Equipotential connection

The communication devices and auxiliary devices, such as mobile base station, transmission device, switching device, power supply device, and digital distribution frame (DDF), are well grounded. Their protection grounds are connected to the grounding bar in the equipment room. The working ground and protection ground of the communication device in the equipment room share the same ground net. The cabling rack, suspension metal bracket, cabinet or shell, metal air vent and metal doors and windows are well grounded.

Grounding requirements

Do not connect the neutral line of AC power cable to protection ground of the communication device. Do not use a fuse or switch on the grounding cables. All grounding cables are as short and straight as possible.

Grounding impedance requirements

The grounding impedance of the grounding system is recommended to be less than 10 ohms. The upper part of the grounding body is more than 0.7 m [2.3 ft.] from the ground. In cold areas, the grounding body must be buried under frozen soil layer. Measure the grounding impedance regularly, to ensure the validity of grounding.

Signal cable layout requirements

In the communication office, signal cables are laid underground. The communication cables have metal bushing or are laid in metal pipe when they are led in or out of the communication office. The grounding cable for lightning protector is as short as possible. Unused wires in the cables are well grounded in the equipment room.

E-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

E Requirements for Device Running Environment

Item Grounding bus requirement

Description The grounding bus can be realized in grounding ring mode or grounding bar mode. The grounding cable must not be aluminum. When different kinds of metals are connected, correct measures must be taken to prevent couple corrosion. The grounding bus cable is made of copper bar with a sectional area of not less than 120 mm2 or zinc-coated steel with the same impedance. The grounding bus cable is insulated from the steel of the building.

Grounding lead-in cable requirement

The grounding lead-in cable is not longer than 30 m [98.4 ft.]. Use zinc-coated steel with sectional area of 40 mm x 4 mm [1.57 in. x 0.16 in.] or 50 mm x 5 mm [1.96 in. x 0.2 in.] as the material.

E.9 Requirements for Power Supply


This describes the requirements for DC power supply and AC power supply.

Requirements for AC Power Supply


Adopt the centralized AC power supply model of mains, uninterrupted power supply (UPS), and a reserved diesel generator. Adopt three-phase and five-wire, or monophase three-wire AC power for low-voltage power supply system. Table E-7 lists the nominal voltage and rated frequency of low-voltage AC power supply system. Table E-7 Specifications of AC voltage and frequency Nominal Voltage 10/127/220/380(V) Rated Frequency 50 Hz

Adopt UPS for the backup AC power supply. Keep it on the same phase with the mains. Set the switching time between mains and UPS to less than 10 ms. Otherwise, the device may reboot or reset. Consider the working current and protection current when choosing the AC power supply capacity. Ensure that one device has one AC power supply protection unit. When designing the DC power supply system, consider the maximum static and dynamic load of the system. Always keep sufficient room for the two thresholds. Choose the model of the power cables based on the maximum load of power supply. The power supply specifications of AC-powered device are as follows:
l l

Voltage fluctuation of communications device: 10% +5% of rated voltage Voltage fluctuation of power supply device and important buildings:15% - +10% of rated voltage Frequency fluctuation: 4% - +4%. Aberration rate of voltage sine wave: 5%
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. E-9

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

E Requirements for Device Running Environment

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

The diesel generator set of the office automatically functions in case of power failure, automatically supplies power when the mains is not enough, and automatically stops functioning when power is restored. It can be tested and controlled remotely in the standard interface and communication protocols. The specifications of the power cables are as follows:
l l

Use the neutral line of the same cross-sectional area as the live line. Choose the DC power feeder on long-term load. The DC power feeder with the crosssection more than 95 mm2. Use the neutral line of the same cross-sectional area as the live line. Use fire-resistant AC cables.

Suggestions on AC power supply are as follows:


l

When the voltage of mains power supply is not stable, use the voltage regulator in any of the following conditions: Powered by mains, the voltage fluctuation of communications device exceeds the rated threshold (10% +5% of rated voltage). Powered by mains, the voltage exceeds the rated voltage fluctuation of communications device. Not directly powered by mains, the voltage fluctuation exceeds the rated threshold (15% +10% of rated voltage). The voltage exceeds the rated AC voltage fluctuation of DC power supply device. Use UPS or inverter to prevent interruption or surge of power supply. Use a diesel generator set when the mains is faulty. The capacity of the generator set must be 1.5 to 2 times larger than that of the UPS. Two groups of storage batteries are designed in parallel. Use one group of UPS storage batteries. The batteries can be working in parallel or serial connection. Use main inverter based on the maximum power. Keep one backup available.

l l

Requirements for DC Power Supply


The DC power supply of communication offices must be stable. Place the power device close to the communication device to make the DC feeder as short as possible. Ensure that the loop voltage from the battery port to the device port is lower than 3.2 V. This reduces the costs on power consumption and installation. When there are more than two switching systems, use two or multiple independent power supply systems. Set up multiple independent power supply systems for important communication centers. Each power system supplies power to the independent equipment room. In ordinary offices, use centralized power supply room and a battery room or separate power supply. In small-capacity offices, use centralized power supply mode. Keep the boards away from the erosive chemicals discharged from batteries. Table E-8 lists the requirements for DC power supply. Table E-8 DC power supply specifications Item Voltage fluctuation of 48-V input end
E-10

Specification 40 V to 57 V

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

HUAWEI UMG8900 Installation Guide

E Requirements for Device Running Environment

Item Voltage fluctuation of 60 V input end Anti-surge current capability Voltage stability

Specification 51 V to 69 V At least 1.5 times greater than the rated load current capability When the AC input voltage range is from 85% to 110% of the rated value, and the load current is from 5% to 100% of the rated value, the output voltage of the current stabilizer is an integral value between 56.4 V and 46.0 V. The variance is less than or equal to 1%. Less than or equal to 5% of the integral value of DC output voltage 200 mV The recovery time is less than 200 ms. The exceeding amount is less than or equal to 5% of the integral value of DC output voltage.

Voltage surge at power-on and poweroff Peek-to-peek noise voltage Dynamic response

Suggestions on DC power supply are as follows:


l

Adopt the mode of separate power supply. Use multiple DC power supply systems and set power device in multiple positions. Adopt the standard DC power supply system, and set the output voltage of the communications device to meet the required voltage range. Improve the reliability of the AC power supply system, and reduce the storage batteries. In small-capacity offices, add more storage batteries if it is difficult to enhance the reliability of the AC power supply system. The total capacity of the high-frequency switch rectifier must satisfy the power of the communication loading and battery charging. Set the backup rectifier modules. If there are less than 10 active modules, set one as backup module. If there are more than 10 active modules, set one as backup module for every 10 active modules. Install the storage batteries in two or more groups. The capacity is determined by the duration in which the storage batteries supply power to the load. In most offices, the batteries must be able to supply power for at least one hour.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

E-11